You are on page 1of 354

MANUAL OF STANDARDS AND PROCEDURES

TUCSON UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT Department of Engineering, Facilities and Planning 2025 E. Winsett Street Tucson, Arizona 85719 (520) 225-4880 (520) 225-4864 (FAX)

Rev. January 1, 2007

Index

Index: Introduction Division 0 Standards and Procedures Division 1 - General Requirements Division 2 - Site Work Division 3 Concrete Division 4 Masonry Division 5 Metals Division 6 - Wood and Plastics Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection Division 8 - Doors and Windows Division 9 Finishes Division 10 Specialties Division 11 - Equipment Division 12 - Furnishings Division 13 - Special Construction Division 14 - Conveying Systems Division 15 Mechanical Division 16 Electrical Division 17 - Technology/Communications Appendix a - Reference Standards Appendix b - Accessibility Appendix c - Forms Appendix d - Typical Details Appendix e Commissioning, Closeout and Warrantees

Rev. 01/01/2007 Page 1 of 1

Index

TUCSON UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT MANUAL OF STANDARDS AND PROCEDURES

Rev. 01/01/2007

Standards & Procedures - Div 0 Page 1 of 16

DIVISION 0

STANDARDS AND PROCEDURES 1.0 STATEMENT OF PURPOSE This Manual of Standards and Procedures is a part of the Agreement between the Architect/Engineer and Owner and provides a general guideline of standard architectural and engineering procedures of the Tucson Unified School District (TUSD) in the design and construction of new and remodeled District facilities. Since the District desires to encourage creativity and originality in design this Manual is focused on the technical and administrative aspects of the project development process and is not intended to direct or limit the design effort. 2.0 2.1 STANDARDS DUE TO THE EXTENT AND VARIETY Due to the extent and variety of District facilities it is necessary to standardize certain elements of building projects. These elements are listed in the respective sections of Specifications discussed in this Manual. The specification of proprietary components shall be done only in accordance with Procurement Rule R7-2-1009; that rule states the District shall not use specifications in any way proprietary to one supplier unless a statement is included of the reasons why no other specifications is practicable, a description of the essential characteristics of the specified product, and a statement permitting an acceptable alternative product to be provided in accordance with procedures of prior approval or substitution. Any modification or variation from the standards used by the Engineering & Planning Services Department of TUSD shall have the prior approval of the TUSD Project Manager. 2.2 NEW FACILITIES AND SIGNIFICANT ADDITIONS New facilities and significant additions to existing facilities shall be designed to current educational or functional standards as identified in the educational specifications provided by the Owner and as verified by the Architect and Owner, User Groups in pre-design project analysis. Refer to Appendix B, Technology Specifications. 2.3 RENOVATIONS OF AND MINOR ADDITIONS Renovations of and minor additions to existing facilities shall be designed to current code and functional standards within the limitations of the scope of the project and the construction budget. 2.3.1 CODE UPGRADE FOR LATERAL LOADS (SEISMIC AND WIND) It is the intent of the District to design in accordance with Chapter 16 of the International Building Code (and succeeding editions). All new structures and new portions of existing structures are to be designed according to current code for lateral analysis. Additions and alterations may be made to any building without requiring the existing portion of the building to comply with current lateral force code requirements only under the following conditions: The new portions of the addition or alteration conform to the current code requirements for lateral loads. The building is not undergoing a change in use or occupancy. If financially feasible, the existing roof and second floor structural systems are to be anchored to the walls if not presently anchored.

The addition or alteration will result in the existing building or structure being no more hazardous based on life safety and fire safety than before such addition or alteration was undertaken. The lateral force resisting elements of the existing portion of the building are in reasonably good condition and are in place and performing adequately as originally designed.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Standards & Procedures - Div 0 Page 2 of 16

DIVISION 0

Any serious structural problems in existing buildings are to be corrected, but the District does not intend to provide a blanket code upgrade of existing structures for lateral load requirements unless these requirements are deemed necessary or are required by current code. 3.0 SERVICES BY OWNER The District will provide the following services to the Architect, unless otherwise required by contract. 3.1 SITE SURVEY The District will provide a boundary and topographic survey of the site and its immediate surroundings, including existing utilities. Refer to Paragraph 4.1.2.9 for survey augmentation requirements. See Appendix C, Survey Forms. 3.2 SOILS AND MATERIALS TESTING The District will provide the services of a qualified geotechnical engineering laboratory, acceptable to the Architect and Engineers, for the following services: a. b. c. Conduct tests of subsurface soils conditions and prepare a report and specifications for earthwork design. Make recommendations for structural foundation, pavement design, trench and slope stability, corrosive potential, and hazardous waste contamination identification. Test and report on materials quality during construction, including but not limited to earthwork, concrete, mortar and grout, masonry, welds, pavement sections, roofing, and fire proofing.

3.3

AIR AND WATER BALANCING The General Contractor under the Base Bid shall provide systems balancing. Refer to discussion of Division 15, Specification Requirements. If question arises over the adequacy of the balancing provided, the District will provide an independent balancing contractor to verify the balancing.

3.4

EXISTING DATA The District will provide all available existing site and improvements data to the Architect, including as-built record drawings, specifications, and shop drawings. It shall be the Architect's responsibility to review the Districts archives to establish what documents are pertinent to the project.

3.5

PROJECT MANAGEMENT The District will assign a Project Manager from the Engineering & Planning Services Department to assist the design team in scheduling staff meetings, in clarification of District procedural requirements, and in verification of the educational specifications with District personnel.

3.6

EDUCATIONAL SPECIFICATIONS The Project Manager will provide the Architect with educational specifications, as prepared by District personnel knowledgeable about the primary needs of the project. These criteria are not intended to be all-inclusive, but will be provided to relate the general scope of the project as well as required areas of academic, general and support facilities.

3.7

PAYMENT OF FEES The District will pay the cost of building permits, plan reviews, plumbing permit fees, mechanical permit fees, utility connection fees, grading permits, and other costs charged by governmental authorities having jurisdiction, which are necessary to be paid in order to secure approval to construct.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Standards & Procedures - Div 0 Page 3 of 16

DIVISION 0

4.0 4.1 4.1.1

SERVICES BY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER BASIC SERVICES VERIFICATION OF DESIGN CRITERIA The Architect-Consultant shall meet with the Project Manager and District personnel familiar with the needs of the project to review and verify the criteria contained in the educational specifications, and shall prepare formal documentation of the verified criteria for approval, including a statement of the probable construction cost of the various elements of the project and implementation of the energy and utility reduction program. The basic project requirements that determine the scope and functional requirements of the project shall be the result of the Architect's detailed analysis and research of the needs and requirements of the District. On projects of limited scope, only verification of these criteria will be required, as a "Basic Service." On more complex projects a "Program for Design" may be required, as "Additional Service", to determine in detail the requirements of the project. Investigation of recently completed projects of similar size and function may also be required. Services from a Civil Engineer will be required for work on right-of-way access or bus-bay projects. Both Design And Construction Administration Services are required.

4.1.2

SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS The Architect-Consultant shall give special consideration in the design of the project to the following areas of concern.

4.1.2.1

CONSERVATION OF NATURAL RESOURCES The school District has established a utilities reduction goal of 35%. This goal is to include the reduced consumption of electrical, natural gas and water resources. Maintenance is also considered a resource and shall be considered in any design proposal. Each project shall address these issues and provide a detailed report at the schematic design stage. The efforts of the Architect shall be coordinated with all disciplines and the standards set forth by the school District. The design of the project shall reflect the conservation of energy and water to the greatest extent feasible. Passive design techniques, low energy or water use appliances, and similar methods shall be given priority. Historical utilities consumption will be evaluated for all projects and used as a basis of utilities reduction by the architectural team. At the schematic design stage a report will be prepared evaluating alternative utility reduction strategies addressing the following areas. Building envelope, the building "U" values shall be the average over the entire area. Walls shall include windows, doors, frames, and general construction. Roof shall include framing, skylights, and openings. Walls U-0.05 maximum (R-19 Min.) High mass walls only U-0.05 max. (R-19 Min.) Frame walls U-0.3 maximum (R-30 Min.)

Roofs

Floors shall be isolated from the walls. 4.1.2.1.1 ASHRAE

Also ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2004, Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings; ASHRAE Standard 100.5-2006, Energy Conservation in Existing Buildings; institutional and voluntary compliance with Arizona House Bill 2206 modifying the energy conservation standards for state buildings shall be complied with.
Rev. 01/01/2007 Standards & Procedures - Div 0 Page 4 of 16

DIVISION 0

The Architect shall evaluate the project for compliance with the standards and report the findings at schematic design. The most stringent standard shall apply unless agreed to in writing by TUSD Engineering and Planning Department. All glass shall be designed such that direct sunlight into classrooms is avoided. South facing glass shall have sufficient overhang to prevent direct sunlight during the cooling season. Spaces that will require cooling due to excessive glass during the heating season are not allowed. Additional strategies to reduce utilities consumption shall include use of glass to provide day lighting into rooms, orientation, etc. Special glass such as tempered, tinted, coated or double glass will have spare panes of typical size in amount of 3% stored on site for replacement of broken glass. 4.1.2.1.2 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS The mechanical and electrical consultants shall coordinate their work with the TUSD Energy Coordinator to assure consistent application of the standards. Mechanical systems shall be evaluated on a case by case basis. When requested a minimum of three most probable systems shall be computer modeled using DOE 2.X, Blast, Carrier's HAP, Elite or equal and evaluated for utilities consumption. Solar heating shall be evaluated for swimming pool heating and large shower facilities. Heating and cooling loads shall be calculated based upon the following criteria: Outside conditions 1100 F dry bulb 720 F wet bulb 800 F dry bulb 670 F wet bulb

Inside conditions

Safety Factors

10% cooling 10% heating

4.1.2.1.3

LIGHTING STANDARDS (Also, see Appendix "D") Lighting standards have been set to reduce consumption while increasing quality and the learning environment. As a minimum, existing areas of the project will be de-lamped and re-lamped with high efficiency florescence lighting.

4.1.2.1.4

LANDSCAPE / IRRIGATION SYSTEMS Turf irrigation is by far the largest user of water in the District. Contractor to provide Calsense 2000 central irrigation controller with activated phone modem and transient protective board. Additional consideration shall be given to sprinkler head selection and coverage. Irrigation system is under Calsense ET 2000 central system. Investigate water meters at each site for possible separation of irrigation and domestic use to reduce sewer fees.

4.1.2.1.5

ENERGY AND UTILITY EVALUATION For energy and utility evaluation the following values shall be:

Rev. 01/01/2007

Standards & Procedures - Div 0 Page 5 of 16

DIVISION 0

Electricity Natural gas Water Maintenance Turf Maintenance

$ $ $ $ $

0.12 per KWH 0.60 per THERM 2.00 per CCF 40.00 per hour 0.65 per square yd per year

Each system shall be evaluated for operating cost at the above rates. The evaluation will be taken over a 20-year period with consideration for replacement. All economic cost evaluations shall be taken as simple pay back with the yearly owning cost averaged over the 15-year period. The ASHRAE (Current edition), HVAC Applications Hand Book shall be used as a reference and Chapter 33 in particular for service life estimates. All calculations shall be submitted and will become the property of TUSD. Energy Management And Control Systems will be installed in all schools. Coordination with the District's Facilities Energy Management Control Systems Manager is critical to maintain consistency in control strategies. 4.1.2.2 DISABLED ACCESSIBILITY The design of the project shall provide for maximum accessibility and use of the facilities by the physically disabled, and the most restrictive requirements of the Arizona Revised Statutes, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, the International Building Code, the American National Standards Institute, and the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) shall determine the design criteria to be used. The Architect shall include specific criteria to be used in the design of the project in his verification of the educational specifications or his program for design, as applicable. (also see Appendix B) On renovation projects, the various options for providing accessibility shall be reviewed in detail with TUSD to provide consistency with TUSD District-wide ADA compliance plan. 4.1.2.3 NATIVE VEGETATION Comply with the Arizona Native Plants Law in regard to preservation or transplanting of significant cactus and native trees, for incorporation in the design of the facility where appropriate. Refer to Landscape, Division 2 and see Appendix B. 4.1.2.4 PROJECT BUDGET The District has limited funds for the construction of its facilities and is charged with the responsibility to use these funds efficiently and wisely. The Architect-Consultant shall design the project in such a manner that the completed facilities represent quality consistent with wise budget management. The Architect shall keep the Owner aware of cost and scope relationship through progress estimates during project development. 4.1.2.5 MASTER SCHEDULE The Architect and the Project Manager shall prepare a "Master Schedule" for the professional services to be provided in the project. The schedule shall be based on time increments appropriate to the project and shall list the dates of starting and completing each element of the work, the names of personnel responsible for each element, and submittal dates for schematic design, design development, and construction document reviews. It is critical that the "Master Schedule" be meet due to the impact on construction schedules and facility use planning. After initial acceptance, it shall be the responsibility of the Architect to request, in writing and in advance, revisions to the "Master Schedule. 4.1.2.6 ASBESTOS STUDY & REPORT The Architect, Engineering Project Manager (PM) and Asbestos Project Manager (APM) shall meet to discuss the Asbestos Containing Material Inventory (ACMI) report for the facility. At that time or at subsequent meetings the impact of the remodeling and renovation on asbestos containing material (ACM) will be evaluated and any
Rev. 01/01/2007 Standards & Procedures - Div 0 Page 6 of 16

DIVISION 0

necessary removal of ACM will be designed by the APM or his designated consultant. These design specifications shall then become an integral part of the Architects contract documents. (See Section 07555) 4.1.2.7 4.1.2.8 (SECTION REMOVED 7/05 TITLED FALL-OUT SHELTER DESIGN) ARCHEOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS The Architect shall request assurances from the Owner that any required archaeological investigations have been completed before the geotechnical investigation or other construction activities take place. 4.1.2.9 LAND SURVEY The District will supply all survey needs of a project to the design team. When augmentation is required the following guidelines shall pertain for the provision of survey work. To identify horizontal and vertical ties to locally accepted monumentation shall be made with the following agencies as applicable: Pima County, Department of Transportation, Survey Section. City of Tucson, Transportation Department, Engineering Division, Field Engineering Section.

Field surveys shall extend sufficiently past a project construction limit to identify possible grading impacts to abutting properties, impact to drainage patterns, and impacts to access provisions. 4.1.2.10 ENVIRONMENTAL SITE ANALYSIS When deemed necessary by the Project Manager and approved as an additional service, studies to determine the probability of site contamination will be conducted by qualified professionals in the field. While each site will be unique, the general scope of studies will be sequential in nature and proceed as follows: Level A Level B Level C Record Search and Site Reconnaissance. Soil Sampling and Laboratory Testing. Remediation Program.

Written reports of results at each level of study will serve as a basis for the District to decide on the need to proceed to the next level. 4.1.2.11 LIMITATION OF OFF-GASSING Materials shall comply with the latest standard of off-gassing set by the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD). 4.1.3 AGENCY REVIEWS AND APPROVALS The Architect shall contact all agencies, which have jurisdiction over the project, to determine and verify their requirements and shall incorporate those requirements in his verification of educational specifications and design criteria or the program for design, and in the design of the project. He shall secure and provide to the Project Manager copies of all agency approvals of the design documents and the final construction documents. Reviewing agencies include, but may not be limited to the following: State of Arizona: State of Arizona Energy Office State of Arizona, Office of Emergency Affairs State Fire Marshal
Rev. 01/01/2007 Standards & Procedures - Div 0 Page 7 of 16

DIVISION 0

Factory Mutual City of Tucson: Department of Building Safety Fire Prevention Division Planning and Zoning Engineering Pima County: Department of Building Codes Planning and Zoning Wastewater Management Flood Control Engineering Utility Companies: Electric Power Water Utility Gas Utility Telephone, TV, CATV Easements shall be provided in conformance with the requirements of the utility companies. The easements shall be common to the greatest extent possible. 4.2 SCHEMATIC DESIGN The schematic design phase will proceed after the Project Manager issues written acceptance of the verified design criteria or program for design. The Architect shall prepare and present schematic design drawings illustrating possible design solutions, for review and discussion by the Project Manager and other District personnel, to determine the most feasible design direction. Refer to the Owner-Architect Agreement. Submit an opinion of the probable construction cost based on current unit costs for other similar construction. The Energy Utilities Conservation Report shall be submitted at the schematic drawing phase. The report shall contain the following items: 1. 2. 3. 4. Building envelope compliance with the standards established by TUSD and the referenced National and State energy guides. Application of lighting standards for level, uniformity, color and occupancy sensors. HVAC system analysis for life cycle analysis. Landscape and irrigation analysis of land use, type and soil analysis. Recommendation for minimum maintenance and water use and provide the following as part of the report: a. Soil analysis prior to landscape construction b. Suggested plant list to be used, see Appendix B c. Life cycle cost analysis for landscape and irrigation system d. ET-based water schedule e. Projected 12-month water use consumptive table per site f. Percent of turf to total landscape area per site g. List of chemicals to be used h. Design criteria statement i. Inert material list j. Square footage or turf and type k. Number of trees, type(s) and sizes l. Number of shrubs, type(s) and sizes
Standards & Procedures - Div 0 Page 8 of 16

Rev. 01/01/2007

DIVISION 0

5. 6. 4.3

Overall project utility budget per square foot compared to historical utility usage Submit all calculations with report

DESIGN DEVELOPMENT The design development phase will proceed when the Project Manager issues written acceptance of the final schematic design. Refer to Section 1.4 of the Owner-Architect Agreement.

4.4

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS The construction documents, consisting of drawings, specifications, and other documents as described in Section 1.5 of the Owner-Architect Agreement, will proceed when the Project Manager issues written acceptance of the design development documents. The Architect shall assist the Project Manager in the development of a construction management plan. Construction documents shall be packaged so as to obtain two bids. Package One shall include all construction except Landscape. Package Two shall be for landscape work only and may be bid at the proper time to meet growing seasons and completion of work of general contractor. Landscape package to be bid by bonded landscape contractors. Review phasing and schedules with TUSD Staff.

4.4.1

NEW CONSTRUCTION New construction is required, under current Agreements between the District and the City of Tucson and Pima County Building Codes Departments, to be processed through plan check and receive a building permit. Alteration construction is exempt from the requirement for a building permit, but not from code requirements.

4.4.2

THE ARCHITECT The Architect shall submit a complete set of District approved design development documents to appropriate agencies for review and comment when a building permit will be required for the project.

4.4.3

FINAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS Final drawings and specifications having building permit approval of code authorities shall be submitted in duplicate to the TUSD Engineering & Planning Services Department 30 days prior to the scheduled out-to-bid date.

4.4.4

FINAL RECORD SET The set of specifications and drawings signed by the Board will comprise the final record set, and no changes to this may be made except by Addendum, which must receive the approval of a Senior Project Manager before issuing.

4.5

BID PHASE When authorized by the Project Manager, the Owner shall issue the bid documents to prospective bidders and plan services through selected printing companies. Bid documents shall be made available to plan services at no charge and to prime bidding general contractors with a deposit. The Owner shall determine the deposit amount, refundable to bidders if bid documents are returned complete and in usable condition within seven calendar days following the bid date. Refer to the Owner-Architect Agreement for additional requirements. Project Plans and Specifications will be printed by companies selected by TUSD at TUSD expense.

4.6

CONSTRUCTION PHASE The construction phase will begin with the award of the contract for construction. Refer to Section 1.7 of the Owner-Architect Agreement for a complete discussion of the requirements of this phase. At the completion of construction, the Architect shall furnish to the Owner a complete set of Record Drawings and specifications, which shall include all architectural, structural, mechanical, civil and electrical changes with the date and the name

Rev. 01/01/2007

Standards & Procedures - Div 0 Page 9 of 16

DIVISION 0

of the contractor. The Architect shall generate one set of reproducible Record Drawings by utilization of CAD (computer Assisted Drafting) and shall deliver the CAD diskette in .dwg format and one in .tif or similar format approved by the Owner. The Architect shall provide Drawings made on vellum originals at their expense. The Contractors red lines and marked-up specifications shall also be delivered to the Owner. Printing cost is to be paid by the Districts Engineering & Planning Services Department and will not be paid as a reimbursable expense. The Architect shall certify that the project has been constructed according to the energy and utilities report. The Architect and his consultants shall participate with the design team in the final systems commissioning of the mechanical, plumbing, electrical, lighting, irrigation and control systems before closeout of the project. 4.7 WARRANTY INSPECTION Upon completion of construction, the Architect shall obtain from the Contractor sets of operation and maintenance manuals and warranties from the Contractor. The Architect shall review the operation and maintenance manuals and warranties to determine that they are complete and in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The warranty period for the Contractor shall begin with the date of the Certificate of Substantial Completion issued by the Architect and shall be not less than two years for general work with longer periods for specific items. Shortly before the end of the warranty the Architect shall schedule a joint inspection of the project with the prime Contractor, HVAC and Electrical Subcontractors, the Project Manager, TUSD's Facilities Management, Warranty Clerk and the Architect-Consultants to determine any warranty items requiring repair, replacement, or service due to warranty related issues. TUSD Facilities Management (aka, Maintenance) will be responsible for Administration of the Warranty period. To allow for adequate management of the warranty, the Architect shall aid the Project Manager in a timely closeout of the project. 4.8 ADDITIONAL SERVICES Several additional services under Section 1.8 are identified in the Owner-Architect Agreement. The Architect shall have advance written authorization to proceed on additional services. Fees for additional services shall be determined and agreed in advance; otherwise hourly rates shall be used as described in the Agreement. 4.9 PROJECT NUMBER TUSD will assign a TUSD project number for each project. This number shall be included on all transactions related to the project such as drawings, documents, invoices or reports related to the project. 5.0 5.1 DRAWINGS GENERAL DRAWING REQUIREMENTS Drawings shall be prepared by skilled and experienced personnel under the direction of registered professionals, for all phases of the project. The construction documents shall be prepared to meet or exceed the following minimum requirements. 5.1.1 SHEET SIZE Sheet size shall be uniform and shall not exceed 42" in any dimension. Preferred sheet size is 24" by 36" or 30" by 42". 5.1.2 A TITLE BLOCK A title block shall be provided on each sheet of the drawings, for each phase of the project. The Title Block may be on the right and/or bottom margin of the drawing sheet. It shall contain the name of the prime consultant, the school or site name, official name of the project, the project number, sheet title, date, sheet or drawing number, sequence

Rev. 01/01/2007

Standards & Procedures - Div 0 Page 10 of 16

DIVISION 0

number of the sheet in the set, space for revision dates, and space for the architects and engineers responsible for the work to affix their registration seals. 5.1.3 DRAWING MEDIA Drawing media shall be no less than Clearprint 1000H, Paper Vellum, or single or double matte Mylar, punched for pin-bar drafting if appropriate to the project. Paper sepia media is not acceptable for construction documents but may be used for previous phases. 5.1.4 OVERLAY DRAFTING TECHNIQUES Overlay drafting techniques, if used, shall be managed to utilize a minimum number of overlay layers per finished composited sheet. Code layers for printing sequence. 5.1.5 DRAFTING MEDIA Drafting media shall consist of graphite lead or ink for tracing papers, plastic lead or ink for Mylar transparencies. 5.1.6 LETTERING Lettering shall be neat, legible, produce excellent reproduction, and shall be in an Architectural block style. Minimum size for lettering is 1/8" for notes, 1/4" for drawing or detail titles. 5.1.7 A NORTH ARROW A North arrow shall be adjacent to the title of each plan related drawing. North shall be oriented to the top of drawing sheets unless otherwise necessary. Maintain consistent north arrow orientation throughout the set of drawings. 5.1.8 THE DRAWING SCALE The drawing scale shall be clearly indicated on each plan, elevation, section, detail, or other drawing. Where the drawing has no scale, clearly indicate. Floor plans, building elevations and building sections shall be drawn to 1/8" or 1/4" scale. Scales of 1/16", 3/32", 3/16" shall not be used, except that 1/16" may be used for a building overall key plan or roof plan. Details and wall sections shall be drawn to scales of 3/8", 1/2", 3/4", 1-1/2", 3", 6", or full size as deemed most appropriate to convey the intent of the drawing. Organize drawing sheets to minimize the mixing of scales on each sheet. Site plans shall be drawn to an engineering scale of 1/20 or 1/40 unless other scale is approved by the Project Manager for large sites. 1/10" = 1' and other odd-number scales shall not be used. 5.1.9 SECTIONS AND DETAILS Sections and details shall be clearly referenced on the plans and elevations, and wall section cuts shall be indicated on the plans and elevations and referenced on building sections. Indicate clearly where typical conditions begin and end, and where non-typical conditions occur. Carry building sections completely through the building or buildings; indicate beginning and end of building sections clearly on plans. 5.1.10 NUMBER Number each interior room and outdoor space (on all plans) including closets, chases, storage areas, stairs, patios, covered walks, mechanical equipment enclosures and similar spaces. Provide a Room Finish Schedule on the floor plan sheet or an adjacent sheet to indicate the name, number, all finishes, and heights of each space. Refer to example, "Room Finish Schedule Form and Legend." Provide a legend adjacent to the schedule to define codes.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Standards & Procedures - Div 0 Page 11 of 16

DIVISION 0

5.1.11

DOORS AND FRAMES Doors and frames shall be numbered on the construction drawings with the rooms they serve. For example, the primary door to Room 100 will be Door 100. The secondary door in or to that room will be Door 100A, and so on. Pairs of doors without a center mullion (or with a removable center mullion) will have one door opening number for the pair of doors. Pairs of doors with a fixed center mullion or panel will each have a door opening number. Indicate direction and extent of swing on plan. Provide a "Door and Frame Schedule" on or near the floor plan sheet. Each door or frame shall be assigned a "hardware reference number." Verify the sequence with TUSD Locksmith and indicate the number on the door and frame schedule. Provide elevations of door and frame types with typical and critical dimensions. Indicate typical hardware heights. Coordinate with the Engineering Department to prepare a separate door name and numbering sequence for building use after construction, for inclusion of permanent door signs and numbers in the bid.

5.1.12

WINDOWS - BORROW LIGHTS Windows and borrow lights shall be referenced by a suitable mark on the plan to a Window and Opening Schedule as provided in Appendix D. Provide elevations of window and opening types with typical and critical dimensions. Clearly reference details.

5.1.13

INDEX OF DRAWINGS Index of drawings on the project title sheet shall include each drawing sheet number, the drawing sheet title, and the sequence the drawing occurs in the set. For example: MARK C2 C3 TITLE Horizontal Control Plan Vertical Control Plan SEQUENCE 5 6

5.1.14

PROVIDE TYPICAL FIXTURE LOCATION Provide typical fixture location requirements by means of a series of typical graphics. Indicate required heights, locations, clearances of lavatories, air dryers, paper towel dispensers, grab bars, toilet tissue dispensers, mirrors, signs, and similar items.

5.1.15

DIMENSION DRAWINGS Dimension drawings with 12" or larger expressed as feet and inches, smaller expressed as inches. Avoid fractions less than 1/4" in dimensioning. Provide separate dimension lines for building overall, building breaks, wall openings, and interior walls. Generally, hold dimension lines outside the plan except where required for clarity to be within the plan. Do not include thickness of masonry walls in dimension strings. Relate separate dimension lines at common points for ease of checking and layout. The Architect shall calculate dimensions for the project and coordinate dimensions on consultant drawings for consistency. When appropriate for the project, provide grid lines on the plans with letter designations on one axis and number designations on the other axis. Vertical drawings such as wall sections, building elevations and sections shall have existing and finish grades indicated, and vertical dimensions shall be referenced from a common level. Foundation plans shall have finish floor elevations and bottom of footing elevations indicated. Framing plans shall have heights of critical framing members indicated, referenced from finish floor elevations. Roof plans shall have roof drainage flow direction indicated throughout and roof slope shall be indicated for each different condition, expressed as fractions of an inch per foot of run.

5.1.16

CHECK DRAWINGS Check drawings of each discipline against each other and the architectural drawings to avoid conflicts of clearance, access, height restrictions, and dimensions.

5.1.17

SUBMIT TWO (2) REVIEW SETS


Standards & Procedures - Div 0 Page 12 of 16

Rev. 01/01/2007

DIVISION 0

Submit two (2) review sets of construction drawings and specifications at appropriate intervals but not less than 50%, 90% and 100% complete for review by various departments of the District. The 90% submittal shall include a Detailed Probable Cost Estimate and Statement to the Project Manager as required by paragraph 1.3.8 of the OwnerArchitect Agreement. Incorporate District comments and reply to the Project Manager with a narrative listing of responses and actions. 5.1.18 ORGANIZE DRAWINGS Organize drawings in a logical sequence, which relates to the disciplines preparing the documents and to the normal sequence of construction, generally as follows: DRAWING GROUP A Series C Series DISCIPLINE/SUBJECT Architectural Drawings. Civil Drawings, including Site Survey, Horizontal Control Plan, Vertical Control Plan, Site Detail Drawings, Water, Sewer, Storm Drain Plans, and Paving Plans. Demolition Drawings, including both site and building demolition work and utility cut-offs. Electrical Drawings: Power, Lighting, Security, Fire, Control System. Fire Protection Plans (if not part of Plumbing Drawings). Project Title Sheet, names of Architect and Consultants, signature block for Owner approvals. General Project Information; Index of Drawings, Code Compliance Data, Zoning Data, Location Map, similar information. Food Service Drawings (if any): Plans, Schedules, Utility Plans, Equipment Elevations and Sections. Landscape and Irrigation Plans and detail drawings, schedules, etc. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Drawings Plumbing Drawings Structural Drawings

D Series E Series FP Series G Series

K Series L Series M or H Series P Series S Series 5.1.19 KEYNOTING

Keynotes, if utilized, shall be located convenient to the drawing referenced. 6.0 6.1 SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL Organize, index, and number specifications in accordance with the Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) format for construction specifications, copyrighted by the Construction Specifications Institute. Automated systems such as CSI and Master spec are encouraged. These master systems do not relieve the Architect or Consultants of the responsibility to properly edit based on local products and methods, to verify conditions of the master apply to local conditions, or to research and include in the final document products, materials, or methods, which are appropriate for local usage. 6.1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Standards & Procedures - Div 0 Page 13 of 16

Rev. 01/01/2007

DIVISION 0

Specifications shall be printed on standard 8-1/2" by 11" paper, bound on the left with a removable binder, and printed two sides. The manual shall be white paper. The Architect shall confirm with the Project Manager if the documents require Governing Board approval. If it does, the Governing Board Members' names and a signature line for their signature are required on the cover. The cover shall also include the project title, the District, the publication date, the assigned District Project Number, the assigned District Bid Number, the Architect, the seal of the Architect, and such other information or graphics as the Architect prefers, including consultants. 6.1.2 A TITLE SHEET A title sheet may follow the cover for signatures of the Governing Board and others as designated by the Project Manager, if preferred by the Architect. 6.1.3 A TABLE OF CONTENTS A Table of Contents shall be provided immediately following the Title Sheet, all specifications shall be indexed and all pages shall be numbered within each section. Where a Division has no work required, so indicate in the Table of Contents. The Architect shall seal the final Table of Contents as well as the cover. 6.1.4 DETAILS AND SCHEDULES Details and schedules shall not be bound in the specifications, but shall be on the drawings. 6.1.5 WORDING Wording of the specifications shall be clear, concise, and accurate. Review wording and topics for conflict with notes on the drawings. Specifications shall be clear in their intent and serve to supplement the drawings. 6.2 CONTRACT FORMS Contract forms as provided by the District shall be listed as General Requirements in the Table of Contents, separate from the Technical Specifications. The Architect shall review and recommend to the Project Manager changes or customizations of forms including the Notice Inviting Sealed Bids, Instructions to Bidders, Proposal, and the List of Subcontractors and Material Vendors. The following documents comprise the contract forms and shall be bound in the Specification Manual, in the order listed: Notice Inviting Sealed Bids Instructions to Bidders Proposal List of Subcontractors and Material Vendors Bid Bond Performance Bond Labor and Material Payment Bond Notice To Proceed/Receipt of Notice Asbestos Certification Statement Contract and General Conditions Addendas issued during the time of Bidding and Change Orders executed during the period of the contract shall be contract documents.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Standards & Procedures - Div 0 Page 14 of 16

DIVISION 0

6.2.1

THE LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS The list of subcontractors shall be tailored to suit the specific project. It is not to include trades or materials not used on the project but shall include critical trades and materials and all those comprising at least five percent of the project by dollar estimate. A separate form shall be provided for the Contractor to indicate subcontractors used if certain alternates are selected.

6.2.2 6.2.3

(SECTION REMOVED 10/91 TITLED "CONTINGENCY AMOUNTS") ALLOWANCES Allowances, if any, shall be confirmed by the Project Manager and included in the Proposal.

6.2.4

ALTERNATES Alternates to the Base Bid, if any, shall be approved and prioritized by the senior staff in advance and be completely described in the specifications and summarized on the proposal form. If no Alternates, this shall be clearly indicated on the proposal form.

6.2.5

TIME FOR CONSTRUCTION The Architect and the Project Manager shall verify time for construction, liquidated damages amounts, and similar information.

6.2.6

BID DATE AND TIME Bid date and time shall be established by the Project Manager with the advice of the Architect, and shall if possible be a date and time which will have least conflict with bid dates of other projects. Avoid Monday and Friday bid dates.

6.2.7

PRIOR APPROVAL PROCESS A prior approval process shall be provided in the Instructions to Bidders in compliance with the Arizona Revised Statutes. The prior approval process shall require requests to be submitted to the Architect for review: (1) (2) (3) No less than 10 calendar days prior to the bid date or the revised bid date. By a prime bidding contractor, and To contain adequate data for evaluation of the requested item.

If the request does not meet these criteria, the Architect is not required to consider the request but shall maintain a log of all requests and their disposition. The Architect and his consultants shall review qualifying requests and publish prior approvals in an Addendum issued no less than 5 calendar days prior to the bid date. 6.3 PROPRIETARY SPECIFICATIONS Proprietary specifications of products or services shall be in strict accordance with the provisions of Arizona Revised Statutes and Procurement Rule, R7-2-1009 and shall be approved by the Project Manager in writing. Unless no other product or service meeting unique requirements of the project is known to be available, the Architect shall specify on the basis of essential characteristics and list at least three acceptable products or services complying with the project requirements. The Technical Specifications portion of this manual lists certain products or services preferred by the District due to their need to standardize maintenance inventories.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Standards & Procedures - Div 0 Page 15 of 16

DIVISION 0

6.4

SOILS AND MATERIALS TESTING Soils and materials testing shall be performed by a firm acceptable to the District and the Architect, and a purchase order shall be issued by the District to the testing firm before they perform such testing. The Architect shall provide a project description and site plan to the testing firm for their use in determining scope of testing.

6.5

NOTES TO THE SPECIFIER The following pages contain notes to the specifier for use in preparation of the project specifications. The notes are organized in seventeen Divisions in accordance with the CSI format for Construction Specifications, and contain minimum standards and preferred products and services listings. For clarity, divisions are divided in several sections. The Architect may combine or further subdivide some sections where this would enhance understanding of the project for the bidders and would streamline the specifications.

7.0

CONSTRUCTION SIGNS Major TUSD projects shall have construction signs that identify the school site and the project. Refer to Appendix D, typical details, for a sample of the basic sign required. Contact the TUSD Project Manager for direction on the use of the basic sign or a specifically designed sign as well as the current sign information required. The contract documents shall include specifications for the general contractor to provide and install the required construction sign.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Standards & Procedures - Div 0 Page 16 of 16

DIVISION 1

TUCSON UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT MANUAL OF STANDARDS AND PROCEDURES

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 01010 01020 01026 01027 01030 01035 01050 01200 01300 01400 01500 01600 01700

TITLE SUMMARY OF THE WORK ALLOWANCES AND CONTINGENCIES UNIT PRICES APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT ALTERNATES CHANGE PROCEDURES FIELD ENGINEERING PROJECT MEETINGS SUBMITTALS QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES TEMPORARY FACILITIES MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND SUBSTITUTIONS PROJECT CLOSE-OUT

Rev. 01/01/2007

General Requirements -1 Page 1 of 5

DIVISION 1

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GENERAL COMMENTS Specifier shall coordinate provisions of Division 1 with the TUSD Owner-Contractor Contract and General Conditions. This Division provides the opportunity to specify special Owner requirements which may not be easily presented elsewhere, and to present requirements which apply to all divisions of the specifications. SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK Provide a summary of work to describe the general scope and extent of the project, to indicate schedule or work sequence requirements, coordination with Owner activities, special early or phased project completion, partial occupancy, work under other concurrent contracts, contractor use of the premises, limitations of the contractor in use of the site, pre-ordered products, Owner-furnished items, and similar concerns. SECTION 01020 - ALLOWANCES AND CONTINGENCIES When approved by the Project Manager, list and describe all allowances and contingencies numerically with a narrative description and a dollar amount to be included in the Proposal and describe conditions pertaining to their use. SECTION 01026 - UNIT PRICES Where appropriate for the project and when approved by the Project Manager and Senior Staff, instruct the bidders in the application of unit prices and describe the unit prices required for the project. Coordinate with other sections of specifications and with applicable portions of the drawings. SECTION 01027 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT Describe the administrative and procedural requirements of the processing of applications for payment and the conditions which must be met for each type of application to be processed. Confirm District procedures with the assigned Project Manager. Types are first application, progress applications, substantial completion application, and final application. Include clear instructions on requirements for Waivers of Lien. Include requirements for submitting the Schedule of Values prior to beginning construction. SECTION 01030 - ALTERNATES An alternate is a specific construction activity or area of work; the bidders shall provide a value for this in their proposals for the project. Where appropriate due to the project scope and budget, and with the approval of the Senior Staff, list and describe in this section each alternate bid Item to be included in the Proposal. Additive alternates only. Owner will normally decide to accept or reject the Alternate proposal before the Agreement is signed but may, when so provided in the proposal and in this section, defer the decision to accept for a specific period of time after construction is underway. Coordinate with drawings to verify that scope of described alternate agrees with drawings, and clearly identify it on the drawings. Alternates should be arranged in the order they would be accepted as determined by Senior Staff. Minimize the number of alternates on the project. Designate alternates so that the cost of one is not dependent on the acceptance or rejection of another, unless a distinct order of priority in selection is indicated.

Rev. 01/01/2007

General Requirements 1 Page 2 of 5

DIVISION 1

SECTION 01035 - CHANGE PROCEDURES Describe the procedures to be followed for changes or modifications to the project that are necessary after the contract is executed. Changes may be caused by unforeseen conditions, by Owner requests, by adjustment of allowance or unit price amounts, and due to discrepancies in the contract documents. Changes may result in modifications of contract cost, in time for completion, in both, or may result in documentation of a change for the record with no modification to cost or time. All changes to the project shall be documented by the Architect and recorded on the record drawings. The Architect shall prepare necessary drawings and descriptions of the required change, solicit a Change Order Proposal from the Contractor, evaluate the Proposal, and advise the Owner on its merits. The Architect shall maintain records of correspondence for inclusion with the Change Order documentation for approval. Designate that the Contractor shall be allowed to add overhead, profit, and actual cost of bond and sales tax to the actual labor and material cost of additive changes. The Contractor shall submit complete documentation of costs which make up changes, whether additive or deductive. Review General Construction Agreement for mark-up conditions. SECTION 01050 - FIELD ENGINEERING On small projects and on additions and alterations, the requirements for accurate layout of the project by the Contractor may be covered in the General Conditions and in other sections of the specifications. On significant projects such as a new campuses and those with critical line and grade, specify in this section land survey, civil engineering, and structural engineering which may be required of the Contractor. SECTION 01200 - PROJECT MEETINGS Project meetings include pre-construction conferences, pre-installation meetings, coordination meetings and weekly progress review meetings. The Contractor is required to schedule: 1. Preconstruction Conference at the site after execution of the Agreement and before commencement of construction activities. Conduct the meeting with an agenda and review responsibilities and personnel assignments as well as critical conditions of the work schedule. Pre-installation Meetings to be held prior to the installation of work which requires the coordination with other work. Coordination Meetings regularly on complex projects or as required on less difficult or smaller projects. Weekly Progress Review Meetings with the Architect, the Contractor, the Project Manager, and other persons concerned with current progress or with a need to know of anticipated conditions.

2.

3.

4.

The Architect shall prepare his minutes of all meetings and supply the Project Manager and Contractor with a typed copy within three working days. SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS Submittals which may be required during the project may include shop drawings, product data, samples, schedules, reports, Materials Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), and miscellaneous documentation. Review the general conditions and the project scope to determine the need for each type. Retain one set of approved documents for the Owner, one for the Architect, and a log of all submittals and actions taken.

Rev. 01/01/2007

General Requirements 1 Page 3 of 5

DIVISION 1

The Contractor is required to submit a Construction Schedule and CPM Schedule within 15 days of execution of the Agreement. The schedule shall indicate the contract completion date even if the contractor's schedule calls for the construction to be completed prior to the date. The Contractor shall submit a MSDS complying with OSHA guidelines for all materials incorporated into the construction for review by the Architect. The Submittal Section shall include a reference to Section 01700, Project Close-Out, where a list of submittals and surplus materials required to be turned in at the end of the project shall be provided. The District often requires information on the costs of certain portions of the project or of specific items incorporated into the project for the purpose of assigning funding, complying with grant requirements, submitting for available rebates, etc. The contract documents shall require that the Contractor shall assist the District in this effort by submitting cost breakdowns, invoices or other pertinent data. This service, unless determined to be unusually complex, shall be provided at no additional cost to the District. SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES The Owner will contract with and pay for the services of an independent materials testing laboratory acceptable to the Owner and the Architect for quality control testing during construction. Coordinate with other sections of the specifications to properly indicate to the bidders the practice which will be used and to denote the scope of testing required in each Section. The Architect shall coordinate with Pima County Building Codes or City of Tucson Building Safety to determine what special inspections these agencies or others may require. SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES Clearly indicate the temporary facilities which are required on the project. Identify Temporary Utilities, Temporary Construction and Support Services, and Security and Protection Services, including temporary fencing. Indicate which, if any, are to be provided by the Owner and if the Contractor is allowed to connect to Owner utilities. Review General Conditions and carefully coordinate. Stipulate conditions under which materials must be stored during construction, within a locked protective fence or within suitable storage vehicles or containers. Unsuitable or damaged materials shall be removed from the site and replaced at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for construction site safety procedures and for providing necessary temporary safety provisions. Safety warning tape is not acceptable as a barricade. SECTION 01600 - MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND SUBSTITUTIONS This section is of great importance because proper selection of products is critical to the success or failure of the project. Because this is public work it is mandatory to have non-proprietary specifications unless no other product is available to suit the Owner's criteria. However, while great effort by the Architect and Owner may go into the selection and specification of products, the ultimate selection of the product, which will be incorporated in the project, rests with the Contractor and will often be based more on price and delivery schedule. This section shall be written by the Architect to set forth procedures to be used by the Contractor in selecting products for construction, potentially limiting his options, and will establish procedures to assure compliance with the contract documents. This Section shall also set forth a process by which the Contractor may seek approval of a substitute for a specified product. Asbestos containing products will not be used in any TUSD building and specifications shall expressly prohibit their use.

Rev. 01/01/2007

General Requirements 1 Page 4 of 5

DIVISION 1

SECTION 01700 - PROJECT CLOSE-OUT This section is primarily a summary of procedures specified in other sections for items and activities required at the end of the construction process. It is useful to clarify procedures, final submittals, warranties, "as-builts", insurance, waivers of lien, maintenance material, and other items. It is also useful to define what will constitute Substantial Completion and Final Completion. Summarize the closeout procedures of other sections in this section, including as-built drawings, submittals, training, record drawings, lien waivers, consent of surety, etc. Consider requiring the submission of maintenance and operation videos on major building elements such as HVAC, control systems, and electrical systems. Provide a summary list of surplus materials required to be submitted at the end of the project. This section should clearly state that in addition to the status of the construction, the status of project close-out documents will be considered in the determination of Substantial Completion. TUSD Facility Management will not accept maintenance of a project without 1. 2. 3. Inspection of the facility by TUSD Shops Required operational training Maintenance and Operational (M&O) Manuals

On phased projects where partial Substantial Completion is scheduled the Contractor shall be required to provide copies of M&O information and copies of Contractor's record prints for related areas. A bound book of warranties for all items included under a partial substantial completion shall be submitted; otherwise, the warranty period shall be considered to begin at the time of the final Substantial Completion date. (Refer to Appendix E Closeout Documents)

Rev. 01/01/2007

General Requirements 1 Page 5 of 5

DIVISION 2

TUCSON UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT MANUAL OF STANDARDS AND PROCEDURES

DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 02070 02230 02300 02361 02500 02700 02800 02810 02820 02830 02900 02910 02920 02930 02940 02950 02960

TITLE SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SITE CLEARING EARTHWORK TERMITE CONTROL PAVING AND SURFACING SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEMS RECLAIMED WATER POTABLE WATER CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES LANDSCAPE DESIGN GUIDELINES LANDSCAPE WORK BALLFIELDS INTERSCHOLASTIC PLAYLOTS PLAYCOURTS TURF ESTABLISHMENT MAINTENANCE

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 1 of 49

DIVISION 2

DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK GENERAL DESIGN AND PLANNING GUIDELINES The following items summarize the Engineering & Planning Services Department's specific guidelines for site improvements. The guidelines are discussed in detail in subsequent Division 2 sections. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. A review of the proposed landscape irrigation and site improvements MUST be held with TUSD Senior Staff prior to preparation of construction documents. Remedial grading of small problem areas of the playgrounds is preferred over extensive regrading of large or entire areas of the playgrounds. Grass/turf areas should be limited to actual playground areas. Other areas should have low maintenance surfaces. The landscape and irrigation work will be bid in a separate bid package. The bid package is to be properly timed for coordination with site availability and planting seasons. Determine which is more cost effective to replace an older irrigation system with a completely new system or make remedial repairs. When adding trees, there should be a preference for several mature trees in lieu of smaller specimens. The use of small shrubbery should be limited to "accent" landscape areas. Decomposed granite should not be used next to sidewalks or concrete play courts. A strip of bare earth approximately ten feet wide should parallel all fences. Consideration about replacement of playground equipment should be based on condition of existing equipment, safety issues, outside funding sources, etc. and the standard used will be the CPSC. All site improvements are to be evaluated for compliance with ADA Standards. Playground turf replacement and repairs should be phased to provide adequate growth periods without exposure to student use. Adequate play field area shall be available at all times for student use. A 90 day maintenance period for planting and turf should be included in all specifications with specific provisions for cutting grass, watering supervision and maintenance, and weed control. The TUSD Design REVIEW Checklist found in Appendix C is to be incorporated with the 100% Review by the TUSD Senior Staff prior to bidding. All request for marquee style site signs submitted to the Director of Engineering & Planning Services for approval and compliance with the TUSD signage policy.

SECTION 02070 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION For work on existing school facilities the Architect is to include this section in order to clarify types of items to be demolished, methods of demolition not allowed, coordination with Owner's uses, salvage to Owner, protection and repair of the existing facility, utility shut-offs, and related issues. These items must be researched and confirmed for each project. The Architect shall identify salvage to the Owner in the specifications. Refer to Section 07550, Roofing for Existing Construction for requirements for demolition or removal of existing roofing. IN NO CASE, shall the contractor be allowed to disturb asbestos containing roofing materials without following the guidelines in Section 07555, Notice Of Asbestos-Containing Roofing Materials.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 2 of 49

DIVISION 2

SECTION 02230 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Protecting existing trees and vegetation to remain. Removing trees and other vegetation. Clearing and grubbing. Topsoil stripping. Removing above-grade site improvements. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. School Facilities Board Section Execution Requirements for verifying utility locations and for recording field measurements. School Facilities Board Temporary Facilities and Controls for temporary utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and environmental protection measures during site operations.

2.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and other deleterious materials. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Record drawings according to Tucson Unified School District - Closeout Procedures. 1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.
Site Work-2 Page 3 of 49

Rev. 01/01/2007

DIVISION 2

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with Tucson Unified School District requirements. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

2.

B. Limits of Disturbance: Provide staking of limits of disturbance at areas of construction. Verify with the Owner and Architect prior to clearing operations. C. Salvageable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated. D. Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing. E. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protections necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements to remain in place.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 1. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off-site when satisfactory soil materials are not available on-site. .

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. C. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated. D. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 4 of 49

DIVISION 2

1.

Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

3.2 TREE PROTECTION A. Erect and maintain a temporary fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain. Remove fence when construction is complete. 1. 2. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within drip line of remaining trees. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within drip line of remaining trees.

B. Do not excavate within drip line of trees, unless otherwise indicated. C. Where excavation for new construction is required within drip line of trees, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 1. 2. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and covered with soil. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter with an emulsified asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. Cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out. Backfill with soil as soon as possible.

3.

4.

D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 1. Employ a qualified arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, to submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by the qualified arborist.

2.

3.3 UTILITIES A. Owner will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site clearing when requested by Contractor. 1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing.

B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.

C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 5 of 49

DIVISION 2

2.

Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.

D. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed. E. Removal of underground utilities is included in Division 15 mechanical or Division 16 electrical Sections. 3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots. 1. 2. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. Completely remove stumps, roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches (450 mm) below exposed subgrade. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees.

3.

4.

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 8-inch (200-mm) loose depth, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. 1. Strip surface soil of unsuitable topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. 2. 3. 4. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches (1800 mm). Do not stockpile topsoil within drip line of remaining trees. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal. Stockpile surplus topsoil and allow for respreading deeper topsoil.

3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 6 of 49

DIVISION 2

1.

Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.

3.7 DISPOSAL A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, and pavements. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. Aggregate base course for slabs-on-grade. Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls." Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, removing topsoil, and protecting trees to remain. Division 2 Section "Landscaping" for finish grading, including placing and preparing topsoil for lawns and plantings. Division 15 and 16 Sections for excavating and backfilling buried mechanical and electrical utilities and buried utility structures.

3.

4.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 7 of 49

DIVISION 2

C. Aggregate Base Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water. D. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations. 1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Architect. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.

2.

E. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. F. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below sub-base, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. G. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. H. Free Draining Backfill: Soil materials used for backfill against basement and retaining walls. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. 2. Each type of plastic warning tape. Vapor barrier.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. Verification of suitability of each footing subgrade material, in accordance with specified requirements. A letter of certification from the Soils Engineer stating that the earthwork performed is in compliance with the Soils Engineering Report and Project Specifications.

2.

3. 4.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D3740 and ASTM E548. B. Pre-excavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section Project Meetings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 8 of 49

DIVISION 2

A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. 2. 3. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.

B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. C. If the project is located at the site of an existing building or other existing construction, which has been or will be demolished, all disturbed soils shall be replaced as engineered fill under the direct supervision of the Soils Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: Borrow soils and existing on-site soils that exhibit low swell potential. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soils not meeting the requirement of satisfactory soils, clayey soils with swell potential. 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained resulting in non-uniform water contents and densities after compaction.

D. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials. E. Borrow Soils: Imported soils, with at least 100 percent passing 6-inch sieve, 70 - 100 percent passing 3-inch sieve, 50-100 percent passing NO.4 sieve, 30 percent maximum passing the No. 200 sieve, maximum expansive potential equal to 1.5 percent measured on a sample compacted to approximately 95 percent of the ASTM 0698 maximum dry density at about 3 percent below optimum water content. The sample is confined under a 100-psf surcharge and submerged. Maximum liquid limit of 30 and maximum plasticity index of 12. F. Aggregate Base Course: Imported soils, with at least 100 percent passing 1-inch sieve, 90 - 100 percent passing 3/4-inch sieve, 38 - 70percent passing 1/4-inchsieve, 0 - 12 percent passing No. 200 sieve; the plasticity index shall not exceed 5, the sum of the plasticity index and percent passing the No. 200 sieve shall be a minimum of 5, at least 30 percent by weight of the aggregate material retained in the No.8 sieve shall have at least one rough and angular surface, which has been produced by crushing, resistance to abrasion shall be in accordance with maximum loss of 9 percent at 100 revolutions and maximum loss of 40 percent at 500 revolutions. G. Engineered Fill: Satisfactory soil materials, as approved by the Soils Engineer, placed and compacted to required density and moisture conditions under observation and testing of the Soils Engineer.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 9 of 49

DIVISION 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Protect subgrades and foundations soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. C. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. D. The soils removed and disturbed during the building demolition shall be verified to have been replaced as engineered fill prior to excavating for building foundations. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.

2.

3.3 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate Jo indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Foundations and Slab-on-Grade at Building: All existing fill and loose native soils shall be removed from the building area, including below slabs-on-grade. All soils disturbed during the building demolition shall be removed and recompacted as engineered fill. All foundations shall bear on relatively dense native soils or engineered fill extending down to the dense native soils. All subgrade
Site Work-2 Page 10 of 49

Rev. 01/01/2007

DIVISION 2

soils beneath the slabs-on-grade shall be scarified, moisture-conditioned, and compacted to a minimum depth of 10 inches. Scarification and recompaction can be omitted if slab subgrade consists of engineered fill.

3.6 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE A. Notify Soils Engineer/Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. If Soils Engineer/Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. 1. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

C. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Soils Engineer/Architect. 3.7 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used when approved by Soils Engineer/Architect. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect.

3.8 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. 3.8 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, vapor barrier. Surveying locations of underground - utilities for record documents. Inspecting and testing underground utilities. Removing concrete formwork. Removing trash and debris. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. Soils Engineer shall approve subgrade. All existing fills shall be removed. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

8.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 11 of 49

DIVISION 2

3.10 FILL A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills. B. All exposed subgrade areas shall be scarified to a minimum depth of 10 inches. C. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. D. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Under grass and planted areas, use engineered fill. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

3.11 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 3 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. 2. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 3 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

B. Wetting of the site soils and/or repetitive construction traffic may create unstable conditions. Workability may be improved by scarifying and drying. Over-excavation of any wet zones and replacement with granular materials may be necessary. 3.12 COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 10 inches in loose depth for material compacted. B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soils at near optimum moisture contents to the following minimum standards per ASTM D698: 1. 2. Scarified subgrade soils: On-site and borrow fill soils: a. Beneath foundations: b. Beneath slabs (fill less than 3 feet in thickness) c. Beneath slabs (fills greater than 3 feet in thickness) 3. 4.
Rev. 01/01/2007

95 percent

95percent 95percent 98 percent 95percent 90 percent


Site Work-2 Page 12 of 49

Aggregate base (beneath slab): Miscellaneous backfill in non-structural areas:

DIVISION 2

3.13 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. 2. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances.

B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested with a 10-foot (3m) straightedge. 3.14 FREE DRAINING BACKFILL A. Free Drainage Backfill: Place and compact soil material in at least a 1-foot-wide section adjacent to the basement walls from the top of foundation to within 2 feet of final grade. Above the free drainage backfill, place a lowpermeability fill to reduce infiltration of surface water into the backfill. 3.15 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE A. Under slabs-on-grade at the basement level, place 2-inch sand over vapor barrier over 4-inch aggregate base course on approved subgrade. B. Under slabs-on-grade at first floor level and balance of project, place 4-inch aggregate base course on approved subgrade. C. Aggregate Base Course Placement: 1. When compacted thickness of drainage course is 6 inches (150 mm) or less, place materials in a single layer. When compacted thickness of drainage course exceeds 6 inches (150 mm), place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick when compacted.

2.

3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality control testing. B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work complies with requirements. C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify designbearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect. D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 698, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies:
Rev. 01/01/2007 Site Work-2 Page 13 of 49

DIVISION 2

1.

Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least One test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for each 100 feet (30 m) or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for each 150 feet (46 m) or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.

2.

3.

E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. F. Testing Agency shall provide a letter of certification that the earthwork performed is in compliance with the Soils Report and Project Specifications. 3.17 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded; rutted; settled; or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.

3.18 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.

SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 14 of 49

DIVISION 2

A. This Section includes the following for termite control: 1. Soil treatment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EPA: Environmental Protection Agency. B. PCO: Pest control operator. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Treatments and application instructions, including EPA-Registered Label. B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of termite control products certifying that treatments furnished comply with requirements. C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. D. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for Owner's record information, including the following as applicable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Date and time of application. Moisture content of soil before application. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used. Areas of application. Water source for application. Dated report for each monitoring and inspection occurrence indicating level of termite activity, procedure, and treatment applied before time of Substantial Completion. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide.

9.

10. Quantities of termite bait used. E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A PCO who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced and has completed termite control treatment similar to that indicated for this Project and whose work has a record of successful inservice performance.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 15 of 49

DIVISION 2

B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides, and label with a Federal registration number, to comply with EPA regulations and authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with EPA-Registered label requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, and grading and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs, before construction. 1.8 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by applicator and Contractor certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. C. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Continuing Service: Provide a proposal for continuing service, including monitoring, inspection, and retreatment for occurrences of termite activity, from applicator to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) continuing service agreement, starting on the date of Substantial Completion. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL TREATMENT A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water or foaming agent, and formulated to prevent termite infestation. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to the product's EPA-Registered Label. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AgrEvo Environmental Health, Inc.; a Company of Hoechst and Schering, Berlin.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 16 of 49

DIVISION 2

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

American Cyanamid Co.; Agricultural Products Group; Specialty Products Department. Bayer Corp.; Garden & Professional Care. DowElanco. FMC Corp.; Pest Control Specialties. Zeneca Professional Products.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of the soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparing substrate. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil and around foundations. B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended by termiticide manufacturer. C. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.

3.4 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered-Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute tile treatment evenly. 1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 17 of 49

DIVISION 2

2.

Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along entire inside perimeter of foundation walls. Along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations as previously indicated. Treat adjacent areas including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground. Masonry: Treat voids. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated.

3.

4. 5.

B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions. D. Post warning signs in areas of application. E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application.

SECTION 02500 - PAVING AND SURFACING 1.1 AGENCY REVIEWS Coordinate with the currently adopted requirements of the jurisdiction of the project. 1.2 DESIGN CRITERIA Conformance with the following guidelines is encouraged by the District, but submittals will be as a courtesy only to develop a better understanding of the site and neighborhood issues, which will affect the project. When located in unincorporated Pima County, paving and surfacing design criteria will include, but may not be limited to the latest edition of the following: "Standard Specifications for Public Improvements" "Standard Details for Public Improvements" "A Policy on Geometric Design of Highway and Streets" "Procedures and Requirements for Subdivision Plats and Development Plans" Pima County Zoning Code: Chapters 18.61, "Hillside Development, Overlay Zone;" 18.67; "Buffer Overlay Zone;" 18.71, "Development Plan Standards;" 18.75, "Off-Street Parking and Loading Standards," and 18.77, "Roadway Frontage Standards" When located in the City of Tucson, paving and surfacing design criteria will include, but may not be limited to the latest editions of the following: "Standard Specifications For Public Improvements" "Standard Details for Public Improvements" "A Policy on Geometric Design of Highway and Streets" "City of Tucson, Planning Department's "Development Standards" Tucson Zoning Code, Article III, Division 2, "Design Standards;" Article IV, "Off-Street Parking"; and Article V, "Off-Street Loading".
Rev. 01/01/2007 Site Work-2 Page 18 of 49

DIVISION 2

Paved areas receiving chip and seal process to receive double applications. As soon as the stone aggregate has adhered to the loose aggregate, aggregate is to be vacuumed/swept and removed; bare spots to be filled by hand. Parking areas receiving new paving to have a minimum of 1 " asphalt concrete over 4" ABC. Driveways to receive minimum of 2" asphalt concrete over 6" ABC. SECTION 02700 - SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 1.1 AGENCY REVIEWS -SEWERS Coordinate with the Pima County Waste-Water Management Department and the Pima County Health Department. 1.2 DESIGN CRITERIA - SEWERS Sanitary sewerage design criteria includes, but may not be limited to the currently adopted edition of the "Manual of Engineering Standards and Procedures", PCWWM and of "Bulletin No. 11", ADHS. 1.3 AGENCY REVIEW - DRAINAGE Coordinate design decisions and construction requirements with the Pima County Department of Transportation, Development Division, or with the City of Tucson Transportation Department, Engineering Division, as appropriate. 1.4 DESIGN CRITERIA - DRAINAGE When requested by TUSD, or reviewing agencies, develop and submit a hydrology report/study indicating on and off site drainage patterns, etc. Drainage design criteria will include, but may not be limited to the latest edition of the following: Pima County Location: a. b. c. d. e. f. Flood plain and Erosion Hazard Management Ordinance "Storm water Detention/Retention Manual" "Drainage and Channel Design Standards for Local Drainage" "Hydrology Manual for Engineering Design and Flood Plain Management Within Pima County, Arizona" "Flood Insurance Study - Pima County, Arizona" Uniform Building Code - Chapters 29, 32 and 70, as applicable

City of Tucson Location: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Tucson Zoning Code, Section 32 - "Flood plain Regulations" "Storm water Detention/Retention Manual" "Drainage and Channel Design Standards for Local Drainage" "Flood Peak Estimator Method" and published modifications "Hydrology Manual for Engineering Design and Flood Plain Management Within Pima County, Arizona" as modified by the City of Tucson Flood-plain Section "Flood Insurance Study - City of Tucson, Arizona" Uniform Building Code - Chapters 29, 32 and 70, as applicable.

Verification of Flood Plain Requirements should be established during the design development phase.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 19 of 49

DIVISION 2

SECTION 02800 - LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL (SECTION 02800) 1.1 DESCRIPTION When directed, design a complete irrigation system to provide water to the necessary plant material, both new and existing, associated with any new work. The system shall be automatic, underground, and designed to conserve water and be as efficient as possible while still meeting the water requirements for all plantings. The system shall be separate from the domestic water service and have its own meter. Where reclaimed water is available, system shall be connected to reclaimed water distribution system. Refer to City of Tucson Water Reclaimed Water User's Manual with Supplements A & B. Generally, sprinkler heads shall be located ten feet away from fence and building lines (Refer to sketch in Appendix "A".) Sprinkler set backs does not apply to athletic fields. Turf growth along fence and building lines should be discouraged. Areas of turf to be abandoned shall be blocked out. Determine the location of existing utility lines which will affect the design and construction of the irrigation system. Verify existing water pressure and gallons per minute at the water source for the irrigation system and indicate on irrigation plans. Provide a complete hydraulic analysis for critical system components. Where the source pressure is inadequate to operate the system, the consultant shall evaluate alternative methods of reducing pressure loss before recommending a booster pump be installed. The factors include but are not limited to feeder pipe up-sizing, meter type and size, back flow preventer type and capacity, mainline size, valves and heads. Keep all irrigation controllers, valves, lines and heads clean and in good working order. Any damages during maintenance period shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner. All sprinkler heads must be periodically adjusted to grade during the establishing period. Irrigation program must be checked and adjusted periodically to prevent any accidents or damages; i.e., hung valves, blow outs, program failures. 1.2 GENERAL GUIDELINES Irrigation drawings shall bear the stamp of the project Landscape Architect. System shall be designed to provide the maximum water requirement within the allowable water window, including establishment. Lateral line shall be designed for a maximum pressure variation of no more than 20%. The system shall be designed to avoid run-off, ponding and overspray. The system shall be designed in zones to isolate differing water requirements such as turf, shrubs, ground cover, and areas of differing sun exposure, sloping areas of 3:1 or greater. Where the water requirements are compatible trees and ground covers may share a valve with trees. All trees shall receive bubbler irrigation including trees in turf. Separate controller programs shall be provided to allow for the different water requirements of the plant materials.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 20 of 49

DIVISION 2

All turf areas shall be designed for distribution uniformity of 80% or greater where possible and a minimum distribution uniformity of 65% shall be achieved. Uniformity is defined as using the Lower Quarter Distribution Uniformity Method. A minimum safety factor of 10% for both flow and pressure shall be designed into the system. A water velocity not to exceed five (5) feet per second shall be used to calculate pipe sizing. On borderline calculations pipe shall be sized one size larger. Pipe velocities shall not exceed five (5) feet per second for PVC pipe and ten (10) feet per second for galvanized and copper pipe. All pipe sizes shall be delineated on plan. No low head drainage shall be allowed where the volume exceeds eight (8) c.f. The system shall be designed to operate on reclaimed water per Tucson Water even if not presently available. Separate metering shall be provided for irrigation systems. System shall have a master valve wired to controller. (Install one shielded cable, Belden or equal along with Master valve wiring.) The TUSD standard warranty, establishment period and required record drawings shall be used. 1.3 DESIGN SUBMITTALS The designer shall provide the following submittals to the District for approval: Submit data defining source pressure, flow, and total operating time within a water window not to exceed eight hours. (Concept design submittal.) List of materials not specified in the approved standards with explanations. Pressure loss calculations for the worst zone, which may be one or, a combination of the farthest zone, the largest volume zone or the highest zone. Design distribution uniformity data from manufacturer or certified testing laboratory for major irrigated turf area. Valve Operating Chart. See example in Appendix indicating the gallons per minute, run time, precipitation rate for heads on each valve, and frequency of operation during a one month period. Submit total amount of water required on a monthly basis for the entire system for established landscape. RECORD DRAWINGS AND MANUALS Require the Contractor to provide as-built record drawings showing the locations and depth of the following items: Connection to existing water lines. Sprinkler control valves. Routing of sprinkler pressure lines (dimension maximum 100' along routing). Quick-coupling valves. 1.5 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Connection to existing electrical power. Routing and control wiring. Other related equipment as directed by the Owner's representative.

1.4

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 21 of 49

DIVISION 2

The Landscape Architect shall schedule the irrigation systems' test with the Contractor and coordinate the time with the Project Manager. The initial test and one additional test, if found to be necessary, are to be considered as part of the installation. Any tests that are required thereafter, a deduction of three hundred dollars per test will be charged to the General Contractor. Any monies received shall be placed in the contingency fund. 1.6 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. REQUIRED OBSERVATIONS BY CONSULTANT Mainline testing Lateral test Layout of booster pump, mainline lateral, valves, back flow preventer and controller. Control Wire Sprinkler installation and spacing. Coverage test Final Observation

Between 30 and 60 days after the establishment period a water audit shall be performed by a certified water auditor. The results shall be used to determine the operating characteristics of the system. Where a discrepancy of more than 20% between the design uniformity and actual uniformity is found the cause shall be noted and the changes necessary to achieve the design conditions identified. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Require the Contractor to prepare and deliver operation and maintenance manuals as follows: Catalog and parts sheets on every material and equipment installed under this Contract. Guarantee statement. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. Provide the Owner's maintenance personnel with instructions for major equipment. Require Contractor to guarantee the sprinkler irrigation system in accordance with form below. A copy of the guarantee form shall be included in the Operations and Maintenance Manual. The guarantee form shall be on the Contractor's letterhead and contain the following information: 1.8 GUARANTEE FOR SPRINKLER IRRIGATION SYSTEM We hereby guarantee that the sprinkler irrigation system provided is free from defects in materials and workmanship, and the work has been completed in accordance with the drawings and specifications, ordinary wear and tear, and unusual abuse or neglect excepted. We agree to repair or replace any defects in material or workmanship which may develop during the period of one year from date of Substantial Completion and to repair or replace any damage related to such defects at no additional cost to the Owner. We shall make such repairs or replacements within a reasonable time, as determined by Owner, after receipt of written notice. In the event of our failure to make such repairs or replacements within a reasonable time after receipt of written notice from the Owner, we authorize the Owner to proceed to have said repairs or replacements made at our expense and we will pay the costs and charges therefore upon demand.

PROJECT

LOCATION

CONTRACTOR'S
Rev. 01/01/2007 Site Work-2 Page 22 of 49

DIVISION 2

SIGNATURE

ADDRESS

PHONE NO.

ACCEPTANCE DATE

PART 2 PRODUCTS (SECTION 02800) 2.1 MAINLINE PIPE Pipe mainline - 2 1/2" to 4" shall be PVC class 200 Ring-Tite, integrally colored purple with epoxy coated steel or cast iron fittings. Pipe mainline, 2" and smaller shall be solvent weld PVC Schedule 40 with Schedule 80 fittings. Primer and Solvent for Schedule 40 pipe and fittings required; Weld on #711 or 717. Pipe shall be integrally colored purple. Mainlines shall have 12 gauge wire placed above the pipe for locating purposes. The wire shall be terminated in an 8" pigtail in a valve box at each end. 2.2 LATERAL PIPE PVC non-pressure lateral line piping shall be PVC Class 200 with solvent-weld joints for sizes 3/4" and larger and Sch 40 for 1/2" size. Pipe shall be made from NSF approved, Type I, Grade II PVC compound conforming to ASTM resin specification D1784. PVC solvent-weld fittings shall be Schedule 40, Type 1, NSF approved conforming to ASTM test procedure. 2.3 GALVANIZED PIPE FITTINGS Galvanized pipe fittings where indicated on the drawings, use galvanized steel pipe ASA Schedule 40 mild steel screwed pipe. Fittings shall be medium galvanized screwed beaded malleable iron. Galvanized couplings may be merchant coupling. 2.4 VALVES All fittings for valve installation shall be Sch 80. unions. 2.5 2.5.1 ELECTRONIC CONTROL VALVES Remote Control-brass contamination resistant, Buckner 20930 Series, Superior 4000 Series. Remote control Valves shall be isolated with zone valve. Each valve shall have its own zone valve. Electric control valves shall be brass construction and have a manual flow adjustment. Provide and install one control valve box for each electric control valve. Design system so no valve is larger than two inches. Dirty water valves required. Each valve to be fitted with 2 Sch 80 threaded

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 23 of 49

DIVISION 2

Valves shall be isolated with a zone valve. Where adjacent valves occur they may share a singular zone valve. Valve shall have a 22 gauge stainless steel identification tag permanently affixed in an approved manner to valve stem or bonnet and shall identify valve station and controller; embossed or engraved in metal. 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 Zone Valve (Remote Control) Champion 300 Series, angle control valve. Isolation Valve (Mainline) AWWA resilient seat with renewable seat. Specialty Valves: Air relief valve shall be used as required. Pressure Reducing valve (separate) as required. Master Valve, Inbal, Cla Val or Ames, flanged. 2.5.5 Quick Coupling Valves, two piece Rainbird 5LRC (red non-potable cover) shall not be used without Senior Staff approval and shall not to be used with reclaimed water systems. FLOW MONITORING EQUIPMENT Data Industrial flow sensor with surge protection and with an insert type sensor with a 400 psi rating installed in valve box with Belden or approved equal shielded communication wire controller location. 2.7 VALVE BOX Plastic box and lid. Carson #1324 with metal detectable lid, purple in color or approved equal. 2.8 HOSE BIBBS Hose bibs shall not be used on reclaimed water lines. 2.9 CONTROL WIRING Control wire depth shall be at 24 inches and follow the mainline were possible. Two green wires shall be installed as spares to the most remote valve location in each direction. The spare wires shall terminate in valve box. Wires shall be bundled and taped at 10' o.c. and an expansion loop of 24" shall be installed at each change in direction and at 300' intervals. At valve connection location adequate wire shall be neatly coiled to allow removal of bonnet six inches above finished grade. Field splices shall be permitted at valve boxes only, full rolls of wire shall be used to avoid any unnecessary field splicing. Where splices are approved the splice shall be made with epoxy filled devices. White #12AWG common and red #14 AWG circuit control wire or larger as required. Spare wires shall be green #14 AWG wire. 2.10 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS Calsense ET 2000 including transient protection board. 2.11 SPRINKLER HEADS Large Turf Rotors, Full Circle, Hunter I-40 Large Turf Rotors, Part Circle, Hunter I-40 Medium Turf, Hunter I-25ADS (Stainless Steel) with prior approval by TUSD Maintenance Department. Small Turf, Hunter I-20, or Rainbird 1804 PRS-SAM Note:
Rev. 01/01/2007

2.6

For Medium and Large Turf Rotors provide anti-theft devices, Dura ATD or equal.
Site Work-2 Page 24 of 49

DIVISION 2

2.12

BUBBLERS All plants not irrigated by spray heads shall be irrigated by pressure compensating flow controlled bubblers. Bubblers shall be installed as detailed in the construction documents. Drip systems allowed only in gardens and habitats with prior approval through Facilities Management; using hard pipe, Rainbird multi-head emitters and Rainbird pressure regulator.

2.13

SWING JOINTS Swing joints shall be a factory assembled Schedule 80 pipe assembly with double "O" rings manufactured by Lasco or Dura.

2.14

BACK FLOW PREVENTION DEVICE No device larger than two inches. Utilize manifold design with multiple devices if supply needs to be greater than 2". Device to be secured in lockable steel wire mesh cage or other approved security enclosure. One device required for each meter. Back flow preventer to be reduced pressure type as approved by USC FCCC & HR.

2.15

ENCLOSURES All back flow preventers, filters, wye strainers, wall or exterior mounted controllers and booster pumps shall be enclosed to prevent injury or vandalism. Hoffman, LeMeur or locally fabricated products to these standards or approved equal. All enclosures to be primed and painted with a desert tan color. Controllers shall be enclosed with Hoffman-type enclosures.

2.16

RECLAIMED WATER COMPATIBLE EQUIPMENT Some school sites may be scheduled to utilize reclaimed water for site irrigation purposes. Consultant shall check availability and location of reclaimed water and determine with Owner, if it is feasible as irrigation water source. If reclaimed water is to be used, consultant shall obtain chemical analysis of reclaimed water and his design shall reflect the filtering and equipment requirements to meet the characteristics of the reclaimed water. Impact of reclaimed water over time on all irrigation components must be considered.

2.17

BOOSTER PUMPS GPM and psi for irrigation water source shall be determined by the consultant early in the design process. It may be necessary to add booster pumps to accommodate new irrigation needs and allow existing irrigation to perform as intended. It shall be the consultant's responsibility to make this determination and design required booster pumps for system. If the irrigation system is scheduled for use with reclaimed water the system shall be designed for that pressure. A booster pump may be required until the reclaimed system is on line. Booster Pumps shall be skid mounted with solid enclosure; ventilation as required. Use dedicated flow sensor and surge protection at pump where applicable. Pump shall have a NMA service rating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (SECTION 02800) 3.1 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 25 of 49

DIVISION 2

The electrical power supply and the controller location shall be coordinated with the consultant and TUSD's Energy Engineer. Controller shall be located within a mechanical room directly accessible to the exterior and within visual range of the playing fields. The controller shall be grounded in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and applicable codes. Controllers shall be enclosed in Hoffman-type enclosures. 3.2 CONTROL VALVE BOXES Valve box shall be buried with a minimum cover of 4" with a metal detectable lid supported on bricks at all four corners, containing one valve per box and shall be located along the sides of fields near the fence line and in inert material areas where possible. Valve box spacing shall be a minimum of six inches and aligned. 3.3 BURIAL OF PIPE Mainline Pipe shall have a minimum of 24" cover with a plastic warning tape at a minimum of 8" and have thrust blocks installed on all pipe 2 1/2" and larger. See Appendix "A." 3.4 LATERAL LINE Lateral Pipe shall have a minimum of 18" of cover. 3.5 BACKFILL AND COMPACTION Mainline shall have a minimum of 3" above and 3" below of fine granular material containing no aggregate larger than 3/8" in diameter. 3.6 SLEEVES Sleeves shall be a minimum of 2" diameter or 2 pipe sizes larger than the service pipe being sleeved. Burial depth shall be a minimum of 24". All new sleeves shall have their location identified by permanently marking the paving surface, edge or wall as approved by TUSD. New concrete shall be imprinted at the sleeve location, to be coordinated with Landscape Contractor. Unless otherwise specified, a separate sleeve shall be provided for control wiring. Under no circumstances shall waterlines share a sleeve with 120v wiring or other utilities. 3.7 THRUST BLOCKS Concrete thrust blocks shall be installed at specific locations per manufacturer's recommendations and instruction. Thrust blocks shall be installed for mainlines at all changes in direction, tees and gate valves for all mainlines larger than 2 1/2" and larger. See Appendix "A." 3.8 LINE CLEARANCE All lines shall have a minimum clearance of 6" from each other and from lines of other trades. Parallel lines shall not be installed directly over one another. 3.9 EXISTING TREES (See Section 02900) Where it is necessary to excavate adjacent to existing trees, require all possible care to avoid injury to trees and tree roots. Excavation in areas where 2 inches and larger roots occur shall be done by hand. All roots two inches and larger in diameter, except directly in the path of pipe or conduit, shall be tunneled under and shall be heavily wrapped with burlap to prevent scarring or excessive drying. Pruned roots larger than two inches require root sealer.
Rev. 01/01/2007 Site Work-2 Page 26 of 49

DIVISION 2

3.10

TESTING OF IRRIGATION SYSTEM Mainline shall be tested at a 150 psi water pressure for two hours and approved by the owner's representative. A force pump with reservoir is required for test.

SECTION 02810 - RECLAIMED WATER Reclaimed water use will be in accordance with City of Tucson, Tucson Water User's Manual and A.D.E.Q. Regulations R18-9, Article 7. On school sites using or scheduled to use reclaimed water, back flow assemblies must be installed on all potable water lines serving the site. The back flow preventers must be reduced-pressure-principle type of assembly. Reclaimed water shall not be used to test the irrigation system prior to receiving an acceptance of the dye test and system. There shall be no unprotected cross-connections between the irrigation's system and the school potable water line. A dye test must be performed on the irrigation system prior to connecting to the reclaimed meters. The dye test will be performed and monitored in accordance with Tucson Water requirements. The test must be performed with potable water. The contractor will provide a test fixture that provides potable water to the irrigation system. The contractor may borrow TUSD's test fixture if it is available. The test fixture will connect between the back flow preventer and the meter on the potable water lines. The connection must be removed or capped off after the test. The fixture will consist of a two inch back flow preventer, a tee with a plug or cap for adding powdered dye that is a minimum of two inches in diameter, and a strainer down stream of the tee in the event dye tablets are required. SECTION 02820 - WATER - POTABLE 1.1 AGENCY REVIEW Depending on the location in the District, TUSD is served water by the following in 1990. Verify at time of project design and coordinate design and service needs with the appropriate entity. a. b. c. d. e. f. 1.2 Tucson Water Lazy C Water Company Diablo Water Company Winterhaven Water Company Hub Water Company Monterey Water Company

DESIGN CRITERIA Verify that the Tucson Water "Waterworks Standard Specifications and Details" are the appropriate design criteria required by the water company. When appropriate, provide for reclaimed water use per Tucson Water's "Users Manual for Use of Reclaimed Water" along with all supplements. General Arizona Department of Health Services requirements as defined in "Bulletin No. 10" are applicable.

SECTION 02830 - CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 27 of 49

DIVISION 2

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. 2. Galvanized steel chain-link fabric. Privacy slats.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for filling and for grading work. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete post footings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CLFMI: Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute. B. Zn-5-AI-MM Alloy: Zinc-5 percent aluminum-mischmetal alloy. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Fence and gateposts, rails, and fittings. Chain-link fabric, reinforcements, and attachments. Gates and hardware. Privacy slats.

1.5 PROJECT-CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences and gates shown on Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field measurements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 28 of 49

DIVISION 2

A. Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric: Height indicated on Drawings: Provide fabric fabricated in one piece widths for fencing in height of 12 feet (3.6 m) and less. Comply with CLFMI's "Product Manual" and with requirements indicated below: B. Mesh and Wire Size: 2-inch mesh and No. 9 gauge wire unless otherwise indicated; provide 1. No. 6 gauge wire up to 10 feet high on baseball backstops and up to 7 feet high on softball backstops. 2. Zinc-Coated Fabric: ASTMA392, with zinc coating applied to steel wire before weaving according to ASTM A 817, Type II, zinc coated (galvanized) with the following minimum coating weight: a. Class 1: Not less than 1.2 oz./sq. ft. applied prior to weaving.

C. Selvage: Knuckled at both selvages. 2.2 FENCE FRAMING A. Round Steel Pipe: Standard weight, Schedule 40, galvanized steel pipe complying with ASTM F :1 083. Comply with ASTM F 1043, Material Design Group IA, external and internal coating Type A, consisting of not less than 1.8-oz./sq. ft. (0.55-kg/sq. m) zinc; and the following strength and stiffness requirements: 1. Line, End, Corner, and Pull Posts Top Rail, and Bottom Rails: Per requirements for Light Industrial Fence.

B. Post Brace Rails: Match top rail for coating and strength and stiffness requirements. Provide brace rail with truss rod assembly for each gate, end, and pull post. Provide two brace rails extending in opposing directions, each with truss rod assembly, for each corner post and for pull posts. Provide rail ends and clamps for attaching rails to posts. End, corner, and pull posts to be a minimum 2-1/2 OD up to 6 foot fabric height, 3" OD up to 12 foot fabric height, and 4" OD over 12 foot of fabric height. Line posts to be a minimum of 2" OD up to 6 foot fabric height, 2-1/2" OD up to 12 foot fabric height and 3 OD over 12 foot fabric height. C. Top Rails: Fabricate top rail from lengths 21 feet (6.4 m) or longer, with swedged-end or fabricated for expansiontype coupling, forming a continuous rail along top of chain-link fabric. D. Minimum pipe weight per diameter: (type 1, schedule 40) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 2.3 TENSION WIRE A. General: Provide horizontal tension wire at the following locations: 1. Location: Extended along bottom of fence fabric. 1 5/8" 2" 2 1/2" 3" 3 1/2" 4" 6 5/8" 8 5/8" 2.27 lbs/ft. 2.72 lbs/ft. 3.65 lbs/ft. 5.79 lbs/ft. 7.58 lbs/ft. 9.11 lbs/ft. 18.97 lbs/ft. 28.55 lbs/ft.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Wire: 0.177-inch- (4.5-mm-) diameter, marcelled tension wire complying with ASTM A 824 and the following:

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 29 of 49

DIVISION 2

1.

Coating: Type II, zinc coated (galvanized) with the following minimum coating weight: a. Matching chain-link fabric coating weight.

2.4 SWING GATES A. General: Comply with ASTM F 900 for the following swing-gate types: 1. 2. Single gate. Double gates with privacy slats for trash enclosure.

B. Metal Pipe and Tubing: Galvanized steel. Comply with ASTM F 1083 and ASTM F 1043 for materials and protective coatings. C. Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from round galvanized steel tubing with outside dimension and weight according to ASTM F 900 for the following gate fabric height: 1. Gate Fabric Height: Match height of adjacent fencing.

D. Frame Corner Construction: As follows: 1. Welded.

E. Gate Posts: Fabricate members from round galvanized steel pipe with outside dimension and weight according to ASTM F 900 with minimum post sizes for the following leaf widths: 1. 2. 3. 4. Leaf width 0 - 6 feet: gate post 3" OD (4" OD at ball fields) Leaf width 6 - 12 feet: gate post 4" OD Leaf width 12 - 18 feet: gate post 6 5/8" OD Leaf width over 18 feet: gate post 8 5/8" OD

F. Hinges: Size and material to suit gate size, non-lift-off type. Offset to permit 180-degree gate opening. For gate leaves up to 8 foot width, provide minimum 1 pair of hinges for each leaf up to 6 foot height and 1-1/2 pair over 6 foot height. For gate leaf widths over 8 foot width, provide 1-1/2 pair of hinges for each leaf up to 6 foot height and 2 pair over 6 foot height: G. Latch: Forked type or plunger -bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as integral part of latch. H. Keeper: Provide keeper for gates, which automatically engages gate leaf and holds it in open position until manually released. I. Gate Stops: Provide gate stops for double gates, consisting of mushroom-type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage center drop rod or plunger bar. Include locking device and padlock eyes as integral part of latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with single padlock.

2.5 FITTINGS A. General: Provide fittings for a complete fence installation, including special fittings for corners. Comply with ASTM F 626.
Rev. 01/01/2007 Site Work-2 Page 30 of 49

DIVISION 2

1. 2. 3.

Post and Line Caps: Hot-dip galvanized pressed steel or hot-dip galvanized cast iron. Provide weather tight closure cap for each post. Rail and Brace Ends: Hot-dip galvanized pressed steel or hot-dip galvanized cast iron. Provide rail ends or other means for attaching rails securely to each gate, corner, pull, and end post. Rail Fittings: Provide the following: a. Top Rail Sleeves: Hot-dip galvanized pressed steel or round steel tubing. Not less than 6 inches (153 mm) long.

4.

5. 6.

Tension and Brace Bands: Hot-dip galvanized depressed steel. Tie Wires, Clips, and Fasteners: Provide the following types according to ASTM F 626: a. Standard R-6undWire Ties: For attaching chain-link fabric to posts, rails, and frames, complying with the following: 1) Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel: 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire; galvanized coating thickness matching coating thickness of chain-link fence fabric. b. Round Wire Clips: Hot-dip galvanized steel or aluminum for attaching chain-link fabric to Hbeam posts. Round Wire Hog Rings: Hot-dip galvanized steel or aluminum for attaching chain-link fabric to horizontal tension wires.

c.

2.6 PRIVACY SLATS A. Material: Aluminum, not less than 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) thick, sized to fit mesh specified for direction indicated. B. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.7 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE A. General: Comply with ACI 301 for cast-in-place concrete. B. Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 03300. 2.8 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout, recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 31 of 49

DIVISION 2

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed, unless otherwise permitted by Architect.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet (152.5 m) or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements specified. B. Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated, in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. Concrete foundation width to be a minimum of four times the maximum post width. C. Post Setting: Hand-excavate holes for post foundations in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. Set terminal, line, and gateposts in concrete footing. Protect portion of posts aboveground from concrete splatter. Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Using mechanical devices to set line posts per ASTM F 567 is permitted. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured. 1. Concealed Concrete Footings: Stop footings 2 inches (50 mm) below grade to allow covering with surface material.

3.4 CHAIN-LINK FENCE INSTALLATION A. Terminal Posts: locate terminal end, corner, and gateposts per ASTM F 567 and terminal pull posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment of 15 degrees or more. B. Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at 8 feet (2.44 m) o.c. C. Post Bracing Assemblies: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Install braces at end and gateposts and at both sides of corner and pull posts. Locate horizontal braces at midheight of fabric on fences with top rail and at two-thirds fabric height on fences without top rail. Install so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension. D. Tension Wire: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with 0.120-inch (3.05-mm-) diameter hog rings of same material and finish as fabric wire, spaced a maximum of 24 inches (609 mm) o.c. Install tension wire in locations indicated before stretching fabric. 1. Bottom Tension Wire: Install tension wire within 6 inches (150 mm) of bottom of fabric and tie to each post with not less than same gage and type of wire.

E. Top Rail: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. RunTancon1inuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved runs and terminating into rail end

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 32 of 49

DIVISION 2

attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail at terminal posts. Provide expansion couplings as recommended by fencing manufacturer. F. Bottom Rails: Install at all basketball courts and where indicated on the drawings. G. Chain-Link Fabric: Apply fabric to inside of enclosing framework. Leave 1-inch between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage, unless otherwise indicated. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor to framework so fabric remains under tension after pulling force is released. A. H. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull, and gate posts with bands spaced not more than 15 inches (380 mm) o.c. tension

H. Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to firmly secure fabric to fine posts and rails. Attach wire at one end to chain-link fabric, wrap wire around post a minimum of 180 degrees, and attach other end to chain-link fabric per ASTM F 626. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to individuals and clothing. 1. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts 12 inches (304 mm) o.c. and to braces 24 inches (609 mm) o.c.

I.

Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bans on the side of the fence opposite the fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts.

3.5 GATE INSTALLATION A. General: Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Gate: Adjust gate to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free from binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. B. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.

SECTION 02900 - LANDSCAPE DESIGN GUIDELINES All designs must fulfill the educational requirements programmed for each school site. All designs shall give consideration to current District maintenance procedures and capabilities, so as to provide an easily serviceable and maintainable facility. All designs shall address security of user and of the physical resources. Adhere to xeriscape design principles whenever possible. Turf areas should be limited to functional areas. Turf reduction at existing sites is a major goal. Turf growth along fences and building lines should be discouraged. See Appendix "A". The landscape planning and design should integrate with work of Architect and Engineers.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 33 of 49

DIVISION 2

Campus site design is a reflection of the school's function to teach physical and mental skills in a pleasant, safe environment that is both efficient in conservation of natural resources and functional. Trees already growing on the site should be integrated into the new landscape plan and preserved if healthy, if a desirable species, and if they can be functionally accommodated.. If existing trees are to be removed, school staff (principal and faculty) should be notified as far in advance as possible. The landscape designs should make use of water harvesting techniques to provide landscape areas with supplemental water where practical and possible. Because the process of tree planting is part of many teachers curriculum to teach children about their responsibility for the environment, we believe that tree planting on school grounds is an ongoing process. Landscape Architects should take this into account and consider setting aside an area of school grounds that will be gradually planted by students over the coming years as directed by individual programs. The area will need an expandable irrigation system installed. NOTE: This doesn't mean that students and teachers are solely responsible for planting trees on the school grounds. Shade trees should be planted at the time of renovation in heavily used student areas to provide shade as soon as possible.

The following issues will be addressed: Maximize the functional use of the campus; appearance; safety 1.1 MAXIMIZE THE FUNCTIONAL USE OF THE CAMPUS Overlap playing fields for multiple use to minimize turf areas. Use turf areas for outdoor sports or activities that require a turf-soft surface. Turf should be in functional use areas only. In non-turf areas utilize open soil areas and inert ground covers such as decomposed granite or gravels. Apply soil sterilants to inert areas in accordance with Arizona Structural Pest Control regulations. Plant trees to provide shade in high use, non-sport areas, and to reduce heat gain on buildings. Use tree or screens to block hot drying winds where appropriate. In general the non-functional use of shrubs and ground covers is discouraged in favor of the planting of trees. Plant shrubs to accent areas and direct pedestrian traffic. Limit access to areas which might be easily vandalized. Use low water-use ground covers in areas that have non-pedestrian traffic or non-access areas to control solar reflected heat on buildings. Limit use of vegetative, non-turf ground covers to key visual areas with little or no traffic as these are high maintenance and susceptible to damage. Use deciduous tree where appropriate near buildings to promote passive solar gain in the winter months and to prevent heat gain in the summer months. Stabilize granite in areas where there could be erosion (berms, swales, slopes). Rock boulders should be a minimum 3' x 3' x 2' in size to provide good stabilizing with 1/3 of boulder buried in ground. They shall be round, smooth, with no sharp edges. No river stone or riprap under 12" shall be used.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 34 of 49

DIVISION 2

Any extended grass areas shall be agreed upon by the Architectural firm and the District's Project Manager. 1.2 APPEARANCE Landscape plant materials should provide good visual access to signage on buildings and ground. Trees that are planted should be a minimum 15 gallon size (24" box preferred) to insure better growth and resist vandalism. All header curbs used to define planting areas or as mow strips should be made of concrete material with a minimum 4" width and 6" depth and not more than 3/4" height, difference between finish grades of ground and top of curb. Curb should have expansion joints every 20 lineal feet to prevent cracking. Header curbs shall be installed at all locations where lawn meets granite to provide a mowing strip. Plant Selection shall be drought tolerant as recommended by "SAWARA" with plantings grouped separate from turf areas for proper irrigation. Select plants only from SAWARA list unless prior special approval is given. The appearance of the school campus should be clean, natural, and easy to maintain. The appropriate plant spacing shall be maintained to prevent an overgrowth of vegetation which would have to be pruned frequently or removed. The appearance of a particular equipment item can have an effect on its degree of use and the degree of vandalism to that item. Equipment should look hefty and sturdy, almost indestructible, and yet have a clean, safe appearance. All lighted sports facilities shall have tree plantings around the perimeter to control lighting pollution to the surrounding neighborhood. 1.3 SAFETY Landscape plantings should be arranged and maintained to allow for good visual access of all areas from the street so that police can view the site easily during non-school hours. Landscape plantings should not block visual access to pedestrian or vehicular traffic. Area lighting should be provided, not only for sports activities but also in common areas and parking areas. All features installed in the campus landscape should be permanently attached so as to provide minimum loss to vandalism. Changes in height of pavement surfaces should be made gradually or at steps to minimize potential trip points. Bubblers' should not be visible above finish grade. See detail in Appendix "A", gravel filled sleeve. On trees 24" box and larger, trim branching to 7' height adjacent to pedestrian and vehicular areas to keep branching from poking someone. Where guy wiring is required, it shall be clearly marked with plastic tubing around guy wire that is painted with a bright color. Do not use poisonous plants. Limit the use of cactus to accents and in key areas, as these areas can be difficult to maintain. All paved surfaces shall have a textured surface to help prevent slippage when wet. Provide 6' chain-link fencing around all construction areas and construction warning signs to keep out. Fire (drill) access and staging areas should be reflected in the campus development plan. School bus and vehicular pick-up areas should be strategically placed to provide minimal safety conflicts in vehicular and pedestrian traffic. All emergency features should be marked with the appropriate bright colors.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 35 of 49

DIVISION 2

All playgrounds shall have a minimum 12" deep wood chip cover under all equipment or, when directed by Project Manager, a firm surface area for disabled access equipment per Federal Safety and ADA requirements. Playgrounds shall have a minimum 4" wide by 16" deep curb around areas where wood chips are used. Play equipment and playgrounds shall meet the U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission Guidelines for New and Existing Playgrounds. All site utilities shall be clearly marked on landscape, planting plans to reduce conflicts in design. The Contractor shall be required at the time of final payment request to provide a set of as-built Mylar drawings as specified and showing all field changes and the depths of any changed items. All field changes to drawings shall be drawn by the Landscape Architect who sealed the original plan. LANDSCAPE CONSTRUCTION SOIL TESTING

2.0 2.1

Prior to design or the preparation of a soil amendment specification, a soils test shall be conducted at each site by a qualified horticultural testing lab. The lab shall prepare recommendations for amending the existing site soil, which shall be used to unite the soil amendment specification. On projects where new finish grades will be more than three inches above or below existing grade, the soil shall be retested after establishment of final grade to determine if a change in amendment requirements is needed. Compaction testing shall be done to determine existing compaction percentage. Compaction shall not exceed approximately 85% minimum density. If significant compaction exists (95%+) in turf area, the soil must be ripped to a depth of 8" to 12" prior to amendment and planting bed preparation. There shall be a minimum of one soil sample taken per 1/2 acre of new turf area. Samples shall be taken at between 4" and 6" deep for turf, and samples shall be taken at depths of 12" and 36" for areas, which will have trees and shrubs. Approximately one pint of soil is required per sample. Soil analysis should include test for the following: pH Phosphorus 2.2 Soluble salts Potassium Sodium Iron Nitrogen Textural classification

WEED CONTROL The applicator of all weed control materials shall be licensed by the State of Arizona as a pest control operator for herbicide use and a pest control advisor in addition to holding any subcontractor licenses that are required. Prior to the installation of any weed control materials, the pest control advisor shall submit to the Owner or representative, labels of the weed control materials, rates of application and quantities per acre intended for use in controlling the weed types prevalent and expected on the site. The pest control advisor shall furnish data to demonstrate the compatibility of the weed control materials and methods with the intended planting and seeding varieties. Provide MSDS for approval prior to application. No material or method shall adversely affect the landscape installation and establishment. Times applied and product used must be scheduled and information provided to Owner for review. Materials and methods must conform to Federal, State, and Local regulations. Weed control shall be applied to all designated areas with adequate time to meet manufacturer's recommendations. If, after applications have been completed, more weeds or regrowth of existing weeds appear prior to planting, reapplications will be done per manufacturer's recommendations. Subsequent applications may need to be made after plant establishment is tolerant of herbicides. Any plant material damaged or killed during the process of the application of herbicides shall be replaced by the herbicide contractor.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 36 of 49

DIVISION 2

2.3

PLANT MATERIAL Specimen trees selected for salvage shall be protected from mechanical injury above and below ground during trenching operations. Pruning shall not be done prior to delivery except for specified written approval from the Owner or representative. After installation, selective pruning may be done with approval of the landscape architect. All dead or damaged branches or cross-over growth shall be removed. Pruned roots larger than 2" shall be sealed with an appropriate horticultural root sealer. All new trees should be double-staked according to plans for one (1) year or until tree is stable. Periodic adjustment must be done to prevent damages and promote good structure. Quality of all plants shall conform to the State of Arizona, Grading Code of Nursery Stock #1 Grade, and be full sized. They shall be vigorous, of normal growth, free of disease, insects and latent defects. Root bound plants will be rejected. Trees 15 gallons and larger shall conform to the standards of Container Size to Caliper Height and spread established and published by the Arizona Nursery Association Growers Committee or as noted on plan. Inspection of plant materials required by City, County, State, or Federal authorities shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, and he shall have secured permits or certificates prior to delivery of plants to site. Plants shall be subject to inspection and approval or rejection at the place of growth and on the project site at any time before or during progress of work for size, variety, condition, latent defects and injuries. Should any conflict arise as to the quality of any plant materials, the decision of the Owner or representative is final. Rejected plants shall be removed from the project site immediately. Plants shall be quality material having the habit of growth which is normal for the species; sound, vigorous, healthy, free from insects, plant diseases and injury. Can, ball, height and spread dimensions shall be measured according to specified standards and good practice. Container plants shall have been in the containers for sufficient length of time for the root system to hold the earth when taken from the container, but not long enough to become root bound, or cause "hardening-off." Held in stock or stock from cold storage is not acceptable. Plants cut back from larger sizes to meet specifications will not be acceptable. Plant names shall conform to those given in "Standardized Plant Names" latest edition, prepared by the American Committee on horticultural Nomenclature. Common names must be included to avoid conflict. Any discrepancy of plant materials delivered and specified will be rectified at no cost to the Owner. Select, dig, transport, protect and plant in accordance with the requirements of these specifications and Arizona standards in effect on date of invitation, and accepted good practice. Certificates shall accompany all shipments as proof of inspection and quality as may be required by Federal, State or other authorities. Each shipment shall be declared free of disease and insects of any kind. Label each plant or bundle and deliver bulk materials in sealed, labeled bags, testifying as to percent of purity of contents. All knolls and all down spouts should be considered for appropriate drainage systems for erosion control. Channel downspouts to underground leach pipes.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 37 of 49

DIVISION 2

2.4

INSTALLATION OF PLANT MATERIALS Stake plant locations and obtain approval from the Owner or representative before excavating pits, making necessary adjustments as directed. Plants not dimensioned as to precise locations shall be scaled from the drawings and the plant placed in the appropriate relationship indicated. Import soil shall match the native soils texture, density and particle size. Backfill mix shall be thoroughly blended at a controlled location on the site. For planting, all plant pits shall be two (2) times the diameter of the root ball and a minimum of 6" deeper with a root ball support soil mound in the bottom of planting hole. Soil walls and bottom of pit shall be scarified. Backfill shall be added around root ball of plant until the backfill is half way up the root ball, then the hole shall be watered sufficiently to settle the backfill around the root ball. More backfill shall be firmed sufficiently to eliminate air pockets. Immediately after planting, each plant shall be thoroughly watered. Care shall be exercised at all times to protect the plant after planting. Any damage to plants by trampling, or by other operations of the Contractor, shall be repaired immediately at no expense to the Owner. The plant shall be planted no deeper than the root crown including ground cover material. No boxed, balled or canned plants shall be planted if the ball is broken, cracked or root bound, whether before or during the process of planting. Any trees transplanted that die or have bark, branch or die-back injury during the warranty period, shall be replaced with equal trees approved by the Owner at no expense to the Owner.

2.5

DECOMPOSED GRANITE Note: Use of decomposed granite verses open-soil areas shall be closely examined for initial and future costs. Decomposed granite should be avoided at steep slopes, play surfaces and other locations where maintenance levels would be high.

Where adjacent to sidewalks, the decomposed granite shall be held 1" below top of sidewalk. Decomposed granite shall be of any granitoid igneous rock which has been weathered in-place and which has a principal constituents granular fragments of quartz and feldspar. It may also contain fragments of granite rock not yet broken down into component materials. This material shall remain stable when saturated in water. Particles larger than 3/8", which will not be broken in the process of rolling during construction, shall not be used. 2.6 FINISHED GRADING (See Appendix D, City of Tucson's Grading Requirements.) Imported topsoil fill may be required and shall meet the requirements for topsoil in Part 2 of this Section. SECTION 02910 - LANDSCAPE WORK PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 02910) Design and prepare planting plans and specifications. Planting plans shall address all work related to the installation of plant material and associated inert materials including but not necessarily limited to: Requirements for topsoil and planting mix and preparation of plant pits; Installation of gravels or decomposed granite; Staking of trees Specification of plant species
Rev. 01/01/2007

Specifications of plant sizes Location of all plant material


Site Work-2 Page 38 of 49

DIVISION 2

Maintenance of plant material

Specifications outlining installation procedures and required materials

PART 2 PRODUCTS (SECTION 02910) 2.1 PLANTING MATERIALS Specify plant locations and list plants by botanical and common names. Specify size, quantity and manner in which plants are to be furnished. 2.2 TOPSOIL Topsoil shall be screened, fertile, friable from well drained, non-agricultural sites. The soil shall be free of noxious weeds such as nutgrass, burr clover, toxic material and debris. Chemical Analysis shall follow these criteria: pH 6.0 to 7.8 Soluble salts less than 1000 ppm Calcium less than 80 ppm Sodium less than 180 ppm

Physical Analysis: Percent in Topsoil Min. Maxi 30 60 20 60 5 20

Material Sand Silt Clay

Size (mm) 0.075 - 2 0.002 - 0.075 0.002 or less

Not more than 3% by weight shall be retained on a 1/4 inch screen. Topsoil shall contain a minimum of 3% organic matter either natural or added. Topsoil shall be tested by a qualified horticultural testing laboratory and certification of compliance will be submitted. 2.3 PLANTING MIXTURE Planting mixture should be reflective of existing soil conditions on-site. Consultant shall have organic horticultural soil tests performed on soils to determine appropriate planting mix. Desert soils typically need significant additional organic matter from soil conditioner and other additives to adjust pH. See requirements for soils test under soil amendments section. PART 3 - EXECUTION (SECTION 02910) 3.1 SITE PREPARATION Finish grades of all planter areas shall be one to two inches below all adjacent walks and curbs. All finish grades in planted areas must drain positively away from all structures.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 39 of 49

DIVISION 2

PART 4 - PLANTING OPERATIONS - TREES AND SHRUBS (SECTION 02910) 4.1 DRAINAGE In the event that impervious caliche, rock or hardpan is encountered during digging operations, for tree pits or shrub pits, proper drainage must be assured. Minimum drainage requirements shall be the rate of 6" drop in water level per hour. All caliche, rock or hardpan shall be disposed of off the site. Topsoil planting mixture around the root balls shall be thoroughly compacted and watered. 4.2 STAKING A minimum of two stakes per tree must be used on trees under 2" caliper. Stakes should support the tree but allow two to three inches of movement to encourage caliper growth. Align stakes parallel to the direction of the prevailing winds. 4.3 DECOMPOSED GRANITE Areas to be covered with decomposed granite shall be treated with a soil sterilant such as Krovar or equivalent. Decomposed granite should be a minimum thickness of 1-1/2 inches, raked smooth and level, moistened and compacted with a roller. Roller requirements are 100 lb./ft. 4.4 STABILIZED DECOMPOSED GRANITE Stabilized decomposed granite shall be delivered pre-mixed to the site. Installation shall be as per the manufacturer's specifications. Minimum thickness shall be no less than 1 1/2". Pre-emerge sub-grade prior to placement of stabilized decomposed granite. SECTION 02920 - BALLFIELDS FOR HIGH SCHOOLS (INTERSCHOLASTICS) PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 02920) 1.1 DESCRIPTION Design of required athletic fields shall include the preparation of layout plans, grading plans, turf establishment plans, details and specifications required to construct the facility 1.2 BACKGROUND Meet with the Interscholastic director, athletic director, and specific coaches for each athletic facility to determine their specific needs and equipment preferences. The consultant shall meet with TUSD Maintenance personnel to determine maintenance requirements and equipment preferences. Final decisions shall rest with the interscholastic director. 1.3 ORIENTATION As much as reasonably possible, given site constraints, give considerations to field orientation and how sunlight may affect play. Consideration for sun angle in relation to the time of year the sport is played, as well as time of day, is important. The nature of the sport and the orientation of players relative to the sun should be considered. 1.4 SIZE OF AREA Allow adequate out of bounds areas beyond the actual field of play. For football and soccer in particular there should be a minimum of 15' clear area beyond the field of play.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 40 of 49

DIVISION 2

1.5

GRADING AND DRAINAGE (See Appendix D) Even, constant, positive drainage is imperative on athletic fields. A minimum constant slope, which will drain the field, is desired. The consideration of soil conditions and their percolation rates should also be considered. Contract must verify grades and slopes using laser level technology. The minimum acceptable slopes for athletic fields are as follows: Baseball Skinned Infield Infield Turf Outfield Turf Batting Area Football, Soccer, Field Hockey 1.- 1.25% 1. -1.25% 1.25 - 1.50% .5 - .8% 1.50 - 2.00% to sides

All ballfield designs shall conform to the standards and equipment called for in the rules books for each particular sport according to the latest editions published by The National Federation of State High School Associations 11724 Plaza Circle P.O. Box 20626 Kansas City, Missouri 64195 Phone: (816) 464-5400 PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND INSTALLATION (SECTION 02920) 2.1 INFIELD AND WARNING MATERIAL Soil sterilant such as Krovar or equivalent to be applied prior to addition of infield mix. Pitcher's mound, infield and warning tracks shall be one of two materials depending on site conditions and individual preference. 1. Special clay/sand soil mix, 1 - 2 mil, as supplied by: Triple A Fertilizer Company, Tucson, Arizona Phone: 574-0400, or approved equal. Stabilizer Red, 1/8" minus, infield mix as supplied by: Stabilizer, Inc. 4832 East Indian School Road, Phoenix, AZ. 85018 Phone: (800) 336-2468, or approved equal. EQUIPMENT BACKSTOPS Backstops shall be constructed of chain link fence material no less than 9 gauge. The back panel, up to 12 feet high, to be 6 gauge. Backstops shall be a minimum of 20'-0" tall for softball and 30'-0" for baseball. Individual site conditions and surrounding land use may dictate taller backstops and possibly overhead netting 2.2.2 BASES Bases for softball and baseball shall be strapless vinyl covered with 8" male post connected to the base, and matching 8" female steel tube permanently mounted in the ground as manufactured by Hollywood or approved equal.
Rev. 01/01/2007 Site Work-2 Page 41 of 49

2.2 2.2.1

DIVISION 2

2.2.3

HOME PLATE Shall be permanently installed with concrete base.

2.2.4

DUGOUTS Shall be covered, and lockable for security purposes.

2.2.5

WATER A water fountain shall be provided near all high school ballfields.

2.2.6

FOUL POLES Shall be permanent, removable or not required according to site requirements. To be reviewed with Athletic Director.

2.2.7

OUTFIELD FENCING Shall be permanent if program allows. If outfield fencing needs to be portable consult with maintenance personnel to match the mounting and installation hardware already existing, if any.

2.2.8

IRRIGATION Baseball with turf infield areas shall be zoned separately from outfield areas. Provide quick couplers at pitchers mound, first base, second base, and third base in small valve box even with finish grade. Turf zone spray head shall not spray onto infield areas. Any use of reclaimed water must be reviewed and approved by the Engineering Department.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (SECTION 02920) 3.1 BALLFIELD SOIL MIXES Special mixes used for the ballfield pitcher mounds, infields and warning tracks shall be placed following establishment of turf and just prior to final completion of the project. Soil mixes shall have compacted thickness of 2" to 3" for clay/sand and 1 to 1 1/2" for stabilizer and shall be placed in the following manner: Remove sub-grade as necessary and smooth to obtain correct elevations. Maintain uniform level. To be verified using laser level technology. Trim turf edges to configuration and dimensions shown on architectural layout plans and landscaped plans. Place first layer of soil mix to depth of approximately one inch. Level and roll with 150 pound lawn roller to obtain firmness. Lightly scarify surface. Place second layer of material to bring finish grade to proper elevations, being careful to work soil to turf edge. (For clay and sand procedure only.) Level and roll with 150 pound lawn roller. Work soil mix to obtain smooth level surface free of high spots and depressions. Finish grade of soil mix shall be level with turf to maximum 1/2" below turf. Level shall be consistent for entire soil area. Soil level shall not be higher than turf. Soil mix must be worked to provide smooth, uniform surface throughout, with no voids between soil and turf, with clean edges at fences and other materials or structures. Proper moisture content must be maintained in order to properly work soil mix.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 42 of 49

DIVISION 2

Final finish shall be loose surface (approximately 1/4" deep) produced by dragging soil areas with a chain-link fence drag or similar device. Clear all rocks from fields with a "drag mat" and remove.

SECTION 02930 - PLAYLOTS PART 1 - GENERAL (SECTION 02930) All play equipment used shall be in compliance with CPSC. No wood play structures will be permitted. Play lots shall have a soft wood chip surface throughout the area of any equipment, which is the appropriate depth for the type of equipment specified and extends horizontally for a safe distance. Design and specification of equipment and the associated surface shall meet the requirements and recommendations of the Federal Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) when published. Consideration should be given to vandalism, durability, maintenance, safety, and visual access in the design of any play lot. SECTION 02940 - PLAYCOURTS PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 02940) 1.1 DESCRIPTION Design of required outdoor play courts such as basketball, volleyball, and tennis, etc., which are hard surface play courts. shall include preparation of layout plans, grading plans, construction details, and specifications required to construct the facility and provide the required associated equipment. Court to be of 5" concrete with reinforcing bars (not wire mesh). Location of control joints to be reviewed with TUSD. 1.2 ORIENTATION Play courts shall be oriented north and south along the long axis. 1.3 SURFACE Shall be reinforced concrete with a medium broom surfacing applied. 1.4 SIZE OF AREA Allow adequate out of bounds, hard surface area beyond the actual court boundary line. For volleyball and basketball in particular, there should be a minimum of 10' clear area beyond the court boundary. 1.5 EQUIPMENT Any play court equipment, which cannot be removed for storage indoors, shall be extra heavy duty in design. SECTION 02950 - TURF ESTABLISHMENT PART 1 - GENERAL (SECTION 02950) 1.1 DESCRIPTION Preparation of plans and specifications to describe the work necessary for the establishment of new turf areas.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 43 of 49

DIVISION 2

1.2

REQUIREMENTS Provide grading plan indicating new grades and existing grades; show limits of turf; indicate type of turf; indication of turf type and method of establishment for stolons, or sod; provide specifications. Evaluation shall be given to the cost/benefits of sod considering construction time frames, establishment periods, and program needs of the school.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (SECTION 02950) 2.1 TURF TYPE Unless directed otherwise by the Owner, new turf areas shall be hybrid Bermuda (mid-iron variety). They shall be established from stolons or well knitted sod, free from weeds and netting material. 2.2 STOLONS Stolons shall be measured by the bushel. A bushel is defined as eight pounds of stolon material. 2.3 HYDROFIBER For hydrostolonization the mulch material shall be wood cellulose fiber produced from whole wood chips and processed to possess the following properties. PROPERTY Percent Moisture Content Percent Organic Content Percent Ash Content pH Water Holding Capacity (grams of water/100 gram fiber) 2.4 2.5 TOP SOIL (See Section 02910 Landscape Work) SOIL AMENDMENTS Required soil amendments and rates will vary with each site's soil conditions. Modify rates and composition as required by soil testing, see Section 02900. 2.6 FERTILIZER Fertilizer shall be uniform in composition, free-flowing, and suitable for application with approved equipment. Fertilizers shall be delivered to the site fully labeled according to applicable State Fertilizer Laws and shall bear the name, trade name or trade-mark, and warranty of the producer. 2.7 GYPSUM Commercially packaged, powdered free flowing granules, minimum 95% Calcium Sulfate by volume. 2.8 SULFUR Agricultural Sulfur, grained or powdered, containing 99.5% Sulfur and 0.5% inert ingredients. VALUES 10.0% 3% 99% 1% 1% or less 4.0 - 6.0 1000 min

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 44 of 49

DIVISION 2

2.9

ORGANIC SOIL CONDITIONER Well composted organic matter from sources such as fir and pine bark meeting the following requirements: Shall have a total organic matter content of greater than 90% by weight. Shall have a pH in the range of 4.5 - 7.5. Shall contain less than 1,000 ppm total soluble salts (TDS). Shall be free of sticks, stones, soil, and other debris. Shall not contain substances harmful to plant growth or material becoming harmful to plant growth upon decay. Shall be free of weed seed, or other parts of any plants detrimental to the variety of turf planted. Shall be free flowing and pass the following sieve analysis. Sieve Size (Inches) 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/16 Amount Passing by Weight (Minimum) 100% 80% 60% 40% 20%

PART 3 - EXECUTION (SECTION 02950) 3.1 PLANTING TIME Application of stolons shall occur no sooner than late spring or early summer after nighttime temperature is above 60 F in late April or early May, and no later than June 15. The intent for the June 15 planting deadline is to allow for 60 day establishment before the beginning of the school season. From a horticultural point of view stolons may safely be planted until August 1. The June 15 planting deadline may be extended at the discretion of the Project Manager and the Architect provided the following conditions are met. 1. 2. It is impractical through no fault of the Contractor to stolonize by the June 15 deadline. An establishment and maintenance plan must be submitted for approval by the Project Manager. This must include provisions for barrier protection of the stolons during establishment. Adequate alternative turf facilities must exist on-site for use of school in session.

3. 3.2

SITE PREPARATION Prior to any grading operations, coordinate work with Earthwork Contractor, and the site needs to be treated with a pre-emergent to kill the weed and common Bermuda seed present in the seedbed. Second, the existing viable Bermuda and other varieties of turf need to be killed before they are tilled under and buried. Site preparation shall occur when rough grades 2 inches have been established. The landscape contractor shall inspect the established rough grade prior to commencing work. If the landscape contractor proceeds prior to rough grade tolerances being meet, the landscape contractor shall assume the responsibility for establishing required finish grade. Site preparation work shall be performed only during periods when beneficial results can be obtained. When high winds, excessive moisture or other unsatisfactory conditions prevail, the work shall be stopped until satisfactory conditions occur.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 45 of 49

DIVISION 2

3.3

ORGANIC SOIL CONDITIONER Organic soil conditioner shall be spread uniformly over the soil to a minimum depth of 2" and thoroughly incorporated by tillage into the soil to a minimum depth of 6". (Amount of soil conditioner required may be more depending on site conditions.) The fertilizer, gypsum, and soil sulfur shall be applied at the appropriate rates for each site, and thoroughly incorporated into the soil to a minimum depth of 6" as part of the tillage operation. Provide Owner with weight and volume tickets or receipts for shipping on all amendments.

3.4

TILLAGE Soil shall be tilled to a minimum depth of six inches by plowing, disking, harrowing, rototilling or other method. Follow tillage with thorough rock removal of all stones or debris larger than 3/4" with a rock picker or rock hound within the top 4" of the soil profile. In order to prevent settlement following planting of the turf, soil shall be settled and compacted to approximately 85% maximum density. This shall be accomplished by water settling, rolling or other methods necessary to assure all voids are removed and soil has attained final settlement.

3.5

FINISHED GRADING Turf areas shall be filled as needed or have surplus soil removed to attain the proper finished grade. Contractor to assure that after final grading operations that there is still a minimum of 6" of prepared soil. Drainage patterns shall be maintained as designed. Turf areas compacted by construction operations shall be completely pulverized by tillage. Turf areas shall have debris and stone larger than 3/4" in any dimension removed from top 4" of soil profile. Finished graded areas shall be protected from damage by vehicular or pedestrian traffic and erosion. Finish grades shall be verified by blue top survey of area with elevations verified on a minimum 40' grid prior to any turfing operations.

3.6

CLEAN-UP Prior to hydromulching, the surface shall be cleared of all trash, debris and stones larger than 3/4" in diameter, and of all roots, brush, wire, grade stakes and other objects that would interfere with planting, maintenance operations or safety for users.

3.7

RATE OF PLANTING Stolons shall be planted at the rate of ten bushels per 1,000 square foot of area, unless otherwise agreed upon prior to installation.

3.8

MOISTENING THE SOIL After all unevenness in the soil has been corrected, the soil shall be lightly moistened immediately prior to the planting operation.

3.9

APPLYING THE STOLONS The stolons shall be applied at the specified rate in a water slurry with a minimum cap load of 50 pounds of a good grade commercially manufactured wood cellulose hydromulch fiber per 1,000 square feet. In the slurry also shall be sufficient fertilizer (water soluble) to apply 1-1/2 pounds of nitrogen and two pounds of phosphorous per 1,000 square foot of area as a minimum.

3.10

WATERING Watering is to be initiated immediately following application. This may necessitate watering a section or sections before the entire area is planted. The area shall then be kept continuously moist until rooting occurs.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 46 of 49

DIVISION 2

3.11

FERTILIZE All turf areas shall be fertilized 45 days AFTER installation of turf. The rate of nitrogen shall be approved by the Landscape Architect prior to application.

SECTION 02960 - MAINTENANCE 1.1 MAINTENANCE PERIOD A 90 day maintenance period is required on all lawn, inert ground cover areas, raked earth, or planting areas, and will begin when installation is completed, accepted by the Owner or representative in writing. The contractor shall continuously maintain all landscaped areas included in the contract during the progress of the work, and then for 90 days after acceptance. All existing trees shall be maintained by an automatic or manual irrigation system while project is under construction. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to protect and maintain existing trees. If any tree dies or is removed by mistake, the tree will be replaced with a tree of the same variety and size at no expense to the Owner, and the tree shall be guaranteed as if it were new installation. See Section 02900 and Section 02910. After all work indicated or specified and including that specified in other divisions, has been completed, inspected and approved, maintain all planted areas by means of continuous watering, weeding, rolling, mowing, reseeding, cultivating, spraying, mulching, trimming, edging, or other operations necessary for their care and upkeep for a period of not less than ninety (90) days except that the maintenance period shall be extended to include the time necessary to meet the requirements for completion per the plans and specifications and as hereinafter specified. 1.2 GRADE REPAIR Any low, settled or rutted areas shall be repaired to finished grade with a 50/50 sand and soil mix. 1.3 ADDITIONAL MOWINGS Establish a second and third mowing within ninety (90) days. All clippings shall be removed from turf area and site upon completion of each mowing. Turf shall be mowed as necessary to maintain at 3/4" to 1 1/2". 1.4 START OF MAINTENANCE When all landscape improvements have been installed in accordance with the plans and specifications, notify the Owner and request a "Start of Maintenance" inspection. If the Owner determines the work to be substantially complete and in conformance with the plans and specifications, the Contractor will be in conformance with the plans and specifications, the Contractor will be advised in writing that the basic maintenance period is started. In order to be substantially complete at least the following must have been finished: All fine grading, including elimination of low and specifically noted otherwise. All vehicular tracks removed from turf areas and beds. A complete and operable irrigation system, including adjustments in all devices and a complete and acceptable watering schedule. Installation of all plant material. high points that hold runoff unless

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 47 of 49

DIVISION 2

Stolons and 100% rooted coverage of all stolon areas with healthy growth through two mowings. In the event 100% coverage is not achieved by the scheduled start of maintenance, sod shall be placed to achieve 100% coverage. See Sod Specification. 1.5 MINOR Minor pick-up items may be completed during the basic maintenance such as: Replacement of damaged or non-conforming plant material. Re-staking or tying of trees. Removal of watering basins. Adjustment of sprinkler heads to grade after turf has established. Filling of settled areas caused by application of normal watering. Removal of new-grown weeds during establishment. 1.6 CONTINUED MAINTENANCE The Contractor shall maintain all landscaped areas on a continuous basis as they are completed during the course of work and until final project acceptance. Maintenance shall include keeping the landscape areas free of debris, chemical weed control, and cultivating the planted areas at intervals acceptable to the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide adequate personnel to accomplish the required maintenance. Pruning and restaking of plants shall be directed by the Owner. At the end of 90 days request a final inspection. Within seven days the Contractor will be advised by the Owner in writing that work is or is not satisfactory. If during the maintenance period the work is inspected by TUSD and found unacceptable, the Contractor will be notified and given five days to correct all deficiencies. At the end of the five day notice period, if the deficiencies are not eliminated no reduction of maintenance day will occur. When the required operations are performed the Contractor shall notify TUSD and upon approval the reduction of the required maintenance period will resume. If the work is satisfactory, the basic maintenance period will end. If the work is unsatisfactory, the basic maintenance period will continue at no additional expense to the Owner until the work has been completed, inspected, and approved by the Owner. 1.7 GUARANTEE All materials shall be guaranteed after approval by final inspection, one (1) year minimum. Guarantees as required by other sections of these specifications shall be in effect after final inspection and acceptance by the Owner. In order for the Contractor to insure his guarantee, the Contractor shall at least twice per month check the site for irregularities. If irregularities are found, he must in writing notify the Owner of the conditions. If no irregularities are found, a letter stating the conditions are acceptable shall be sent. If no letter is received, it will be assumed that there are no irregularities. 1.8 GUARANTEE ISSUES Staking and guying should be warranted for one (1) year. Trees and shrubs should be guaranteed up to one (1) year. Young ground cover and turf needs fertilization at three (3) month intervals. Make minor adjustments to irrigation system at one (1) month intervals or as needed.
Rev. 01/01/2007 Site Work-2 Page 48 of 49

DIVISION 2

1. Adjust controller program as required. 2. Adjust head arcs, radius and installation height and plumb as required. 3. Perform needed repairs under warranty. Erosion control and repair at two (2) month intervals. Where unsafe conditions exist due to erosion, repairs shall be made as soon as possible, but in no instance greater than 3 days. Walk-through with Grounds Supervisor, Crew Chief, Field Supervisor, and/or Contractor to be done at completion, end of establishment period, six (6) months, and one (l) year. 1.9 CLEAN-UP Any soil mulch or other material dropped onto paved areas, by hauling operations or otherwise, shall be removed promptly, keeping these areas clean at all times in a proper and legal manner. Upon completion of planting, all excess soil, stones and debris, not heretofore disposed of under this scope of work.

END OF SECTION

Rev. 01/01/2007

Site Work-2 Page 49 of 49

DIVISION 3

TUCSON UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT MANUAL OF STANDARDS AND PROCEDURES

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 03310

TITLE CONCRETE

Rev. 01/01/2007

Concrete - 3 Page 1 of 16

DIVISION 3

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE SECTION 03310 - CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 03310) 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Submittals shall be required on reinforcing steel for foundations, retaining walls, and structural elements of the building. C. Submittals requiring structural design shall be sealed by a professional structural engineer registered in the State of Arizona. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with fly ash. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials: F. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements; 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Cementitious materials and aggregates. Form materials and form-release agents. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. Admixtures. Curing materials: Vapor barrier and vapor retarder.

G. Submit information on saw-cutting systems to be used.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Concrete - 3 Page 2 of 16

DIVISION 3

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the same manufacturer. E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS Dl.4, "Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel" F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated: 1. 2. 1.6 ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete." ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS(SECTION 03310) FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal or other approved panel materials.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum. D. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Concrete - 3 Page 3 of 16

DIVISION 3

1.

Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of the exposed concrete surface. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive damp proofing or waterproofing.

2.

3.

2.2

STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A706/A706M, deformed. C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A82, galvanized. D. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

2.3 A.

REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2.4

CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II. B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C33, uniformly graded, and as follows: 1. 2. Class: Negligible weathering region, but not less than 1 N. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm).

C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C94. D. Fly ash shall not be used in the concrete mix design for exposed concrete of any kind.

2.5

ADMIXTURES A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260. C. Water-Reducing Admixture : ASTM C494, Type A. D. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type F.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Concrete - 3 Page 4 of 16

DIVISION 3

E. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494, Type E. F. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type D.

2.6

CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, - weighing approximately 9oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B. F. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Evaporation Retarder: a. Cimfilm; Axim Concrete Technologies. b. Finishing Aid Concentrate; Burke Group, LLC (The). c. Spray-Film; ChemMasters. d. Aquafilm; Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc. e. Sure Film; Dayton Superior Corporation. f. Eucobar;-Euclid-Chemical Co. g. Vapor Aid; Kaufman Products, Inc. h. Lambco Skin; Lambert Corporation. i. E-Con; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. j. Confilm; Master Builders, Inc. k. Waterhold; Metalcrete Industries. l. Rich Film; Richmond Screw Anchor Co. m. SikaFilm; Sika Corporation. n. Finishing Aid; Symons Corporation. o. Certi-Vex EnvioAssist; Vexcon Chemicals, Inc. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: a. AH Clear Cure; Anti-Hydro International, Inc. b. Spartan-Cote; Burke Group, LLC (The). c. Spray-Cure & Seal 15; ChemMasters. d. Conspec #1-15 percent solids; Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc. e. Day-Chem Cure and Seal; Dayton Superior Corporation. Diamond Clear; Euclid Chemical Co. f. g. Nitocure S; Fosroc. h. Cure & Seal 309; Kaufman Products Inc. i. Lambco 120; Lambert Corporation. J. L&M Dress & Seal 18; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. j. CS-309; W. R. Meadows, Inc. k. Seal N Kure; Metalcrete Industries. l. Rich Seal 14 percent UV; Richmond Screw Anchor Co. m. Kure-N-Seal; Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc. n. Flortec 14; Sternson Group.
Concrete - 3 Page 5 of 16

2.

Rev. 01/01/2007

DIVISION 3

o. p. q. r. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXES

Cure & Seal 14 percent; Symons Corporation. Clear Seal 150; Tamms Industries Co., Div. of LaPorte Construction Chemicals of North America, Inc. Acrylic Cure; Unitex. Certi-Vex AC 309; Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: 1. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301.

B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis. C. All Concrete: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): a. b. 2. 3. 3000 psi (20.7 MPA), minimum of 480 Ibs. Cement per cubic yard. 4000 psi (27.6 MPA), minimum of 570 Ibs. Cement per cubic yard.

Maximum Slump: 4 inches (100 mm). Maximum Slump for Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: 6 inches after admixture is added to concrete with 2- to 4-inch (50 to 100-mm) slump.

D. Do not air entrain concrete to trowel-finished interior floors and suspended slabs. Do not allow entrapped air content to exceed 3 percent. E. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. F. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (super plasticizer) in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

2.

2.8 A. 2.9 A.

FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT Fabricate steel-reinforcement-according to CRSl's "Manual of Standard Practice." CONCRETE MIXING Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C94 and ASTM C1116, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between- 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Concrete - 3 Page 6 of 16

DIVISION 3

2.10

VAPOR BARRIER/RETARDER A. Plastic Vapor Retarder/Barrier: ASTM E1745, Class B. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. 1. Products: a. b. 2 Fortifiber Corporation: Moistop Ultra. Stego Industries, LLC: Stego Wrap, 15 mils.

When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and deliver; time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 EXECUTION (SECTION 03310) FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. D. E. Class A, 1/8 inch (3 mm).

B.

C.

Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
Concrete - 3 Page 7 of 16

F.

G.

H. I.

J.

K.

Rev. 01/01/2007

DIVISION 3

L.

Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. EMBEDDED ITEMS

3.2

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. 2. 3.3 Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.

REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to 'not be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Leave formwork, for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following: 1. 2. 3. At least 80 percent of 28-day design compressive strength. 14-day minimum. Determine compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing representative field or laboratory cured test specimens according to AC1301. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.

4.

C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSl's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. B. C. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Shop- or field-weld reinforcement according to AWS 01.4, where indicated.

E. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Concrete - 3 Page 8 of 16

DIVISION 3

F. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms, or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to plans for keyway lengths. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

2.

3.

4.

5.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth as indicated per the project plan, as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate grooved tool marks on concrete surfaces. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamondrimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

2.

3.6 1.

VAPOR BARRIERS/RETARDERS Plastic Vapor Retarders/Barriers: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders/barriers according to ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

3.7

CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless approved by Architect. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mix.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Concrete - 3 Page 9 of 16

DIVISION 3

C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. D. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches (600 mm) and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold joints. Do not drop concrete into form over 60-inch height. 1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to segregate.

2.

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

2. 3. 4. 5.

F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen sub grade or on sub grade containing frozen materials. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.

2.

3.

G. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows, when hot weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Concrete - 3 Page 10 of 16

DIVISION 3

2.

Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and sub grade just before placing concrete. Keep sub grade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.

3.8

FINISHING FORMED-SURFACES: A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm) in height. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, damp proofing, veneer plaster, or painting. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth-formed finish.

2.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished concrete: 1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1 R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes. 1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, Portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor finishes.

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by hand or powerdriven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
Rev. 01/01/2007 Concrete - 3 Page 11 of 16

DIVISION 3

1.

Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system Finish slab-on-grade surfaces to the following tolerances, measured within 24 hours according to ASTM E1155/E1155M for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-grade.

2.

3.

Finish all suspended slab and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled freestanding 10-foot- (3.05-m-) long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed the following: a. b. 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Require Contractor to verify by survey instrument that base course elevation is constant and will provide floor slabs to be within 1/4" of specified thickness; tops of slabs shall have tolerance of 1/8", 10' maximum.

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.10

MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steeltroweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. D. Architect shall not utilize precast concrete or tilt-up concrete systems in the design without prior approval of the TUSD's Senior Engineering Staff.

3.11

CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly pIaced concrete from premature drying and excessive, cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 Ib/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply

Rev. 01/01/2007

Concrete - 3 Page 12 of 16

DIVISION 3

according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Curing formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing-period, continue curing by one or a combination of the following methods. D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. b. c. Water. Continuous water-fog spray. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2.

Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. b. c. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. Moisture cures or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. Cure concrete surfaces other than slabs-on-grade to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer recommends for use with floor coverings.

3.

Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

4.

3.12

CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. Contractor shall submit all repair methods and locations for Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part Portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.2-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Concrete - 3 Page 13 of 16

DIVISION 3

1.

Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

2.

3.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or-less in 'diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before 'bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

2. 3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Concrete - 3 Page 14 of 16

DIVISION 3

3.13

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent: testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article. B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mix, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2.

Slump: ASTM C143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. Air Content: ASTM C231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31/C31 M; cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. Sample shall be taken from point of discharge of the concrete. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39; test one laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days. a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

3.

4.

5.

6.

C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPA). D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28day tests. E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by
Rev. 01/01/2007 Concrete - 3 Page 15 of 16

DIVISION 3

Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42 or by other methods as directed by Architect. END OF SECTION

Rev. 01/01/2007

Concrete - 3 Page 16 of 16

DIVISION 4

TUCSON UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT MANUAL OF STANDARDS AND PROCEDURES

DIVISION 4 - MASONRY

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 04200

TITLE UNIT MASONRY

Rev. 01/01/2007

Masonry - 4 Page 1 of 13

DIVISION 4

DIVISION 4 - MASONRY SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 04200)

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Concrete masonry units (CMU). Face brick. Mortar and grout. Reinforcing steel. Masonry joint reinforcement. Ties and anchors. Embedded flashing. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. Division 7 Section "Water Repellents" for water repellents applied to unit masonry assemblies. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashing. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit masonry.

C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame, installed under Division 5 Section "Structural Steel"

D. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following: 1. Steel lintels and shelf angles for unit masonry, furnished under Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications. "

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths (f'm) at 28 days. B. Determine net-area compressive strength (f'm) of masonry from average net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Masonry - 4 Page 2 of 13

DIVISION 4

C. Determine net-area compressive strength (f'm) of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following: 1. 2. 3. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. Colored mortar. Weep holes/vents.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Pre-faced concrete masonry units. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. Special brick shapes. Pigmented mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of pigments used. Weep holes/vents. Accessories embedded in masonry.

5. 6.

E. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates. 1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing.

F. Qualification Data: For testing agency. G. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. Provide for each type and size of the following: 1. Masonry units. a. b. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. For bricks, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances. For exposed brick, include material test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67.

c. 2.
Rev. 01/01/2007

Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.


Masonry - 4 Page 3 of 13

DIVISION 4

3. 4.

Joint reinforcement. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

H. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. I. Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification.

Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold-weather requirements.

J.

K. Submittals requiring structural design or calculation shall be sealed by a professional structural engineer registered in the State of Arizona 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required. C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. D. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made from the Testing and Inspecting Allowance, as authorized by Change Orders. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 1. 2. Clay Masonry Unit Test For each type of unit required, per ASTM C 67. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, per ASTM C 780.

E. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 1. Build sample panels for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high. Clean one-half of exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing.

2. 3. 4.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Masonry - 4 Page 4 of 13

DIVISION 4

a.

Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless the Architect in writing specifically approves such deviations.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. 2. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place. Where 1 width of multi-width masonry walls is completed in advance of other widths, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed width and hold cover in place.

B.

Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

2. 3.

4.

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
Rev. 01/01/2007 Masonry - 4 Page 5 of 13

DIVISION 4

1.

Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 PRODUCTS (SECTION 04200) 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2.2 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry. 2.3 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.

2.

3.

4.

B.

Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade MW or SW. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 3000 psi. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced." Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) wide by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) high by 75/8 inches (194 mm) long.

2.

3. 4.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Masonry - 4 Page 6 of 13

DIVISION 4

2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S, no substitutions allowed. C. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. 1. Available Products: a. b. c. Bayer Corporation, Industrial Chemicals Div.; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments. Davis Colors; b. True Tone Mortar Color Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors.

D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.

E. Water: Potable. 2.5 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: (Grade 420). ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951. 1. 2. 3. Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.

C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Either ladder or truss type. D. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Veneers Anchored with Seismic Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Hot dip galvanized, steel continuous wires. 2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from materials that comply with eight subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: Class B-2 coating. ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M,

B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches (50 mm) parallel to face of veneer. C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. D. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors

Rev. 01/01/2007

Masonry - 4 Page 7 of 13

DIVISION 4

1.

General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing metal studs, and as follows: a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100 lbs (445N) load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch (1.3 mm).

2. 3.

Contractor's Option: Unless otherwise indicated, provide any of the following types of anchors: Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a metal anchor section. a. Anchor Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal plate with screw holes top and bottom, 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) wide by 3 inches (75 mm) high; with projecting tabs having slotted holes for inserting vertical legs of wire tie specially formed to fit anchor section. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.097inch (2.5-mm) thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication. Wire Ties: Rectangular wire ties fabricated from 0.188-inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. Available Products: 1) BLOK-LOK Limited; STUD-LOK. 2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; AA308.

b.

c.

d.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated. B. Postinstalled Anchors: Provide chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in solid or grouted unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild).

2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where indicated, complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual or Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim". 1. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snap lock receiver on exterior face where indicated to receive counterflashing.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A 1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane, or PVC. B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from PYC, complying with ASTM 0 2287, Type PVC65406 and designed to fit standard block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
Rev. 01/01/2007 Masonry - 4 Page 8 of 13

DIVISION 4

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). D. Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Wicking Material: Absorbent rope, made from cotton or UV-resistant synthetic fiber, 1/4 to 3/8 inch (6 to 10 mm) in diameter, in length required to produce 2-inch (50-mm) exposure on exterior and 18 inches (450 mm) in cavity between widths. Use only for weeps. Round Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Medium-density polyethylene, 3/8-inch (9-mm) 00 by 4 inches (100 mm) long. Rectangular Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches (9 by 38 by 89 mm) long. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm) less than depth of outer width, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.

2.

3.

4.

2.10 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1. a. b. c. Available Manufacturers: Diedrich Technologies, Inc. EaCo Chem, Inc. ProSoCo, Inc.

2.11 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to Portland cement and lime.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. D. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. 1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of Portland cement by weight.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Masonry - 4 Page 9 of 13

DIVISION 4

PART 3 EXECUTION (SECTION 04200)

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-width walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening. D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30-g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. G. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following: 1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). Do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm).

2.

3.

4.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Masonry - 4 Page 10 of 13

DIVISION 4

5.

For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thickness by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) from one masonry unit to the next.

6.

7.

3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thickness and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a width in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4-inches (100-mm). Bond and interlock each course of each width at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow brick as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Masonry - 4 Page 11 of 13

DIVISION 4

B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with masonry-veneer anchors as detailed. 1. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 16 inches o.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. (0.2 sq. m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches (203 mm), around perimeter.

3.6 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement. B. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows: 1. Form open joint full depth of brick width and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm) for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.7 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated 3.8 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENT A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. B. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches (200 mm); with upper edge tucked under building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches (100 mm). At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.

2.

3.

4.

C. Install single-width CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located below face shells and webs of CMU above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Masonry - 4 Page 12 of 13

DIVISION 4

D. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior widths of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. 2. 3. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. Space weep holes formed from plastic tubing 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections indicated below and prepare test reports: 1. 2. Payment for these services will be made by Owner. Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 67. C. Mortar properties will be tested per ASTM C780, annex A7. Mold one set of three molds and test one mold at seven days, two molds at 28 days. Testing frequency shall be first day it is used and averaging every third day material is used thereafter, but not less than one set for each 2,000 sq. ft. of wall. 3.10 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. Protect adjacent nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. Clean brick by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.11 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

END OF SECTION 04810


Rev. 01/01/2007 Masonry - 4 Page 13 of 13

DIVISION 5

TUCSON UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT MANUAL OF STANDARDS AND PROCEDURES

DIVISION 5 - METALS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 05120 05500

TITLE STRUCTURAL STEEL, JOISTS, DECKING METAL FABRICATIONS

Rev. 01/01/2007

Metals-5 Page 1 of 5

DIVISION 5 - METALS
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL, STEEL JOISTS, DECKING
PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 05120) Do not require submittals if drawings sufficiently describe products, unless special attention is deemed necessary by the Architect, Engineer, or Project Manager. Submittals requiring structural design or calculations shall be sealed by a professional structural engineer registered in the State of Arizona. Submittals shall be required for steel joists and steel decking including shop drawings, erection drawings, and structural calculations. Walkway canopies, railings, and similar work shall be designed to reflect their exposure to playground use for consideration in restricting climbing, loading, etc. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (SECTION 05120) NO COMMENTARY PART 3 EXECUTION (SECTION 05120) Special inspections of welding of steel decking to joists, of joists to bed plates, and of structural steel welding shall be required.

SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 1.3 A. Miscellaneous metal trim. Miscellaneous metal fabrications as indicated and as required.

SUBMITTALS Product Data: For the following: 1. B. Paint products.

Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.

C. D.

Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and
Metals-5 Page 2 of 5

Rev. 01/01/2007

addresses of Contracting Officers and Governments, and other information specified. 1.4 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. 2. 3. 1.5 A. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.

B.

PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. METALS, GENERAL Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. FERROUS METALS A. B. C. 2.3 A. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. PAINT Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section "Painting." Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead and chromate free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM 0 1187. FASTENERS A. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
Metals-5 Page 3 of 5

2.2

C. 2.4

Rev. 01/01/2007

B. C. D. E. F. G. H.

Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ASME B18.6.1. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME B18.22.1. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B18.21.1. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

I. 2.5 A.

Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as needed. FABRICATION, GENERAL Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

B. C. D.

E. F. G. H.

Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space-anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

I.

Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges.
Metals-5 Page 4 of 5

Rev. 01/01/2007

J. K.

Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. FINISHES, GENERAL

2.6 A. B. 2.7 A.

Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Meta! Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. STEEL AND IRON FINISHES Apply shop primer to prepared uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification NO.1," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

B.

C.

D.

3.2 A.

PAINTING Refer to Section 09900 for painting of steel assemblies.

END OF SECTION 05500

Rev. 01/01/2007

Metals-5 Page 5 of 5

DIVISION 6

TUCSON UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT MANUAL OF STANDARDS AND PROCEDURES

DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 06100 06402

TITLE ROUGH CARPENTRY ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

Rev. 01/01/2007

Wood and Plastics - 6 Page 1 of 14

DIVISION 6

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise indicated. B. Exposed Framing: Dimension lumber not concealed by other construction. C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment manufacturers written instructions for handling. Storing, installing and finishing treated material. NELMA Northeastern Lumber Manufactures Assoc. NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority. RIS Redwood Inspection Service. SPIB Southern Pine Lumber Inspection Bureau. WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WWPA Western Wood Products Assoc. Framing with dimension lumber. Framing with engineered wood products. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. Sheathing. Plywood backing panels.

Rev. 01/01/07

Wood and Plastics - 6 Page 2 of 14

DIVISION 6

2.

Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. C. Research Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Engineered wood products. Power-driven fasteners. Powder-actuated fasteners. Expansion anchors. Metal framing anchors.

D. Submittals requiring structural design or calculations shall be sealed by a professional structural engineer registered in Arizona. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Prefabricated Wood I-Joists: a. b. c. d. 2. Georgia-Pacific Corporation. Louisiana-Pacific Corp. Standard Structures Inc. Trus Joist MacMillan.

Metal Framing Anchors: a. b. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. United Steel Products Company, Inc.

2.2 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1.
Rev. 01/01/07

Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
Wood and Plastics - 6 Page 3 of 14

DIVISION 6

2.

For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.

3.

4. 5.

B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.

2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Rooftop equipment support curbs. Blocking. Cants. Nailers.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide NO.2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. Hem-fir or Hem-fir (north); NLGA, WCLIB or WWPA. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, WWPA. Eastern softwoods; NELMA. Northern species; NLGA Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.

C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades:
Rev. 01/01/07 Wood and Plastics - 6 Page 4 of 14

DIVISION 6

1. 2. 3.

Mixed southern pine, NO.2 grade; SPIB. Hem-fir or Hem-fir (north), # 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. Western woods, NO.2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.

2.5 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units complying with AP A PRI-400; depths and performance ratings not less than those indicated. 1. 2.6 SHEATHING A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: See drawings. 2.7 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME BI8.6.1. E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. F. Lag Bolts: ASME B 18.2.1. (ASME B 18.2.3.8M). G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. See drawings.

2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. General: Provide framing anchors made from metal indicated, of structural capacity, type, and size indicated and as follows: 1. Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated, with building code in effect for Project. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be
Wood and Plastics - 6 Page 5 of 14

2.

Rev. 01/01/07

DIVISION 6

determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, 060 (ZI80) coating designation. C. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- (50-mm-) long seat and 1-1/4-inch- (32-mm-) wide nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth. 1. See drawings for particular types as required.

D. Bridging: Rigid, V-section, nailless type, 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick, length to suit joist size and spacing. E. Joist Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying joists together over supports. 1. As indicated on the drawings.

2.9 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness. B. For Telecommunications use (includes all uses), grade A/B plywood to be used. The A side to face the interior of the room.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. C. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. 2. 3. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. Table 23-II-B-l, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-II-B-2, "Wood Structural Panel Roof Sheathing. Nailing Schedule," in the Uniform Building Code. Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in the BOCA National Building Code. Table 2306.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the Standard Building Code. Table 602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table 602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in the International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code.

4. 5. 6.

Rev. 01/01/07

Wood and Plastics - 6 Page 6 of 14

DIVISION 6

D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be ex-posed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required. E. Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates- to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement. 3.3 WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Do not splice structural members between supports. 3.4 TIMBER FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Install timber with crown edge up and provide not less than 4 inches (102 mm) of bearing on supports. Provide continuous members, unless otherwise indicated; tie together over supports if not continuous. B. Where beams or girders are framed into pockets of exterior concrete or masonry walls, provide l/2-inch (13mm) air space at sides and ends of wood members.

SECTION 06402 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. Plastic-laminate cabinets. Plastic-laminate countertops. Storage Room/Custodial shelving units.

B. Related Sections include the following:

Rev. 01/01/07

Wood and Plastics - 6 Page 7 of 14

DIVISION 6

1.

Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. B. Rough carriages for stairs are a part of interior architectural woodwork. Platform framing, headers, partition framing, and other rough framing associated with stair work are specified in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For medium-density fiberboard, high-pressure decorative laminate, thermoset decorative overlay, cabinet hardware and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. 2. Show details full size. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other items installed in architectural woodwork.

3.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated.

1. 2.

Plastic laminates. Thermoset decorative overlays.

D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of woodwork certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

Rev. 01/01/07

Wood and Plastics - 6 Page 8 of 14

DIVISION 6

C. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production and installation of interior architectural woodwork. D. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with A WI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. 1. Provide A WI Quality Certification Program labels indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division I Section "Project Meetings." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HV AC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

2.

1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the A WI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Hardboard: CS-25L

Rev. 01/01/07

Wood and Plastics - 6 Page 9 of 14

DIVISION 6

2.

Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.

C. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-3, or medium density fiberboard complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, with surface of thermally fused, melamine impregnated decorative paper complying with NEMA Test LD-3-1995. D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades (.028) and (.050) as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject10 compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering highpressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. Formica Corporation. Laminart. Nevarnar Corp. Pionite Corp. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.

E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: AE recommended by manufacturer. 2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets as called for at the end of this section. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking. Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide Premium grade interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Comply with A WI Section 400 and as follows: 1. All 3/4" thick particle board core cabinet top, bottom, end, vertical, horizontal, and rail components using confirmat system screws, a minimum of six (6) at each joint for 24" deep cabinets and a minimum of four (4) at each joint for 12" deep cabinets. Cabinet backs shall be 1/4" thick melamine, 3/4" for exposed back applications. 32 mm line-boring (approximately 1-1/4") centers to be provided on all end panels and vertical dividers to receive/mount adjustable shelf supports, hinges, drawer slides and pull out shelves, to maintain consistency in vertical alignment of components.

2. 3.

Rev. 01/01/07

Wood and Plastics - 6 Page 10 of 14

DIVISION 6

4.

All fixed base and tall cabinets shall have individual factory applied base, constructed of 3/4" thick, A.C. Grade plywood. Base to be 96 mm (nominal 4") high unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. All exposed and semi exposed edges of basic cabinet components shall be factory edged with 1 mm PVC banding, machine applied with waterproof hot melt adhesive. All edges of shelves to be 1 mm PVC, color to match shelving. Particleboard shelf core to be 3/4" up to 30" width, and 1" thick for shelves over 30". Open unit interior components to be finished with thermally fused melamine laminate. Closed unit interior components to be finished with thermally fused melamine laminate. Exposed ends to be faced with HPDL-GP28 (.028), and balanced on the interior with CL-20 high-pressure liner. Wall unit bottoms to be finished with HPDL-GP28. Top edge of wall and tall unit end panels to be factory edged with 1 mm PVC, machine applied with hot melt adhesive, top surfaced with thermally fused melamine laminate. Door/Drawer front to be 3/4" particleboard core, exterior face finished with HPDL-GP28, color as selected by Architect. Interior face to be CL-20 high-pressure cabinet liner. All cabinets in excess of 24" to have double doors. All edges to finished with 1 mm PVC or HPDL-GP28. Drawers shall incorporate "Blum" metabox system 320N, M, K, and H series. Back and bottom are 3/4" thermo fused melamine with top edge of back bonded with 1 mm matching PVC. File drawers include Pendaflex File suspension rails, color to match drawer box.

5.

6.

7. 8.

9. 10.

11.

12.

D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. E. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 2.5 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Comply with A WI Section 400 requirements for high-pressure decorative laminate countertops. B. Grade: Custom. C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HPDL-GP50 (.050"). D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes in the following categories: a. b. c. Solid colors. Wood grains. Patterns.

Rev. 01/01/07

Wood and Plastics - 6 Page 11 of 14

DIVISION 6

F. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts. G. Edge Treatment: As indicated. H. Core Material: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard. I. Core Material at Sinks: Particleboard made with exterior glue.

2.6 SCIENCE CLASSROOM 2.6.1 MIDDLE SCHOOL SCIENCE CLASSROOMS Prior to developing specifications, the architect shall review the school's science curriculum and with the Project Manager determine the quality of cabinetry required. Quality could range from that of regular classrooms to that required in high school Laboratories. 2.6.2 HIGH SCHOOL SCIENCE CLASSROOMS Science classroom cabinets shall be of a style specifically for that purpose. The specifications shall clearly define the required detailing and performance standards. 2.6.3 A. B. C. D. STORAGE ROOM/CUSTODIAL SHELVING UNITS Grade: Custom. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: As indicated. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Birch Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. Hardwood: AHA A135.4. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade MD, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required including removal of packing and backprirning. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with A WI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
Rev. 01/01/07 Wood and Plastics - 6 Page 12 of 14

DIVISION 6

C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to- anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No.10 wafer-head screws sized for I-inch (25-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking or hanging strips or No.10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.

2. 3.

F. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through comer blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Align adjacent solid-surf acing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

2.

3.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Cabinet and Drawer Pulls: Metal wire style, brass construction, dull chrome finish, 4" spacing on fasteners. Design compatible with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). B. Hinges: "Blum" Clip 125, inset mounting, fully adjustable, self closing, nickel plated hinge assembly or approved equal.

Rev. 01/01/07

Wood and Plastics - 6 Page 13 of 14

DIVISION 6

C. Shelf Supports: Heavy-duty locking shelf support, friction fit into cabinet end panels and vertical dividers readily adjustable on 32 mm centers. Each shelf support has two (2) integral support pins, 5 mm diameter, to fit predrilled holes and to prevent rotation of support. The supports to be supplied for 3/4" or 1" thick shelving and provide a non-tip feature. D. Cabinet Locks: National Lock #N8055-14, disc tumbler, cam style. 3" long chain bolts with 18" pull chain and angle strike to secure to inactive doors up to and including 72" height. E. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch (51-mm) OD, black, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. END OF SECTION

Rev. 01/01/07

Wood and Plastics - 6 Page 14 of 14

DIVISION 7

TUCSON UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT MANUAL OF STANDARDS AND PROCEDURES

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 07100 07210 07500 07550 07555

TITLE WATERPROOFING AND DAMP-PROOFING BUILDING INSULATION ROOFING FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION ROOFING FOR EXISTING CONSTRUCTION NOTICE OF ASBESTOS - CONTAINING ROOFING MATERIALS SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM ROOF ACCESSORIES SKYLIGHTS JOINT SEALANTS

07620 07700 07800 07920

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 1 of 29

DIVISION 7

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL Proper specification and detailing of thermal and moisture protection is critical to project success. The Architect shall design the building to meet or exceed the "U" values called out in this Manual, and shall consult with knowledgeable individuals in the design, detailing, and specifying of moisture protection. Where possible, avoid the use of below-grade spaces that require water or damp-proofing treatment. Roofs and roof crickets shall be designed and detailed with a positive slope to drain. Unless approved otherwise, roof and cricket slope shall be not less than 1/2" per foot, and roof drainage shall be spaced so cricket valley slope shall be not less than 1/8" per foot. Avoid interior roof drains and rain water leaders. Where unavoidable, provide separate parallel leader for overflow or provide a scupper through the adjacent parapet wall for overflow. Whenever possible place the drains, scuppers and overflows in a depressed lead pan in the roof deck, similar to the detail in Appendix B. Avoid installation of mechanical units, electrical work, piping and conduits on roof, unless approved by Project Manager. All roofing and waterproofing installation shall be done only after the Architect, Project Manager, Applicator, Contractor, and Manufacturer Representative jointly inspect the prepared substrate and approve it for application. SECTION 07100 - WATERPROOFING AND DAMP-PROOFING PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 07100) All below grade habitable areas shall be made waterproof from flowing water and damp-proof from incidental moisture. Every project shall be investigated for damp conditions and for high ground water levels or subterranean flowing water. If any of the above conditions are present, or if they are suspected to be present, they will be reported to the Engineering Department. Identify any unusual or otherwise special conditions, considerations or circumstances, which should be disclosed to the Owner, Contractor and/or Manufacturer. Make Manufacturer and Contractor aware of all special conditions peculiar to the project prior to the bidding of the project. Identify potential problem conditions of the site or project in consultation with the Owner and/or the Geotechnical Consultant. 1.1 GUARANTEES/WARRANTIES The work covered by this section is of the utmost importance to the District. Failure of the work done under this section can lead to substantial damage and cost. Evaluate the installation carefully. Systems selected shall be warranted for a period of not less than five (5) years. Longer warranty/guarantee periods may be required by the District based on specific installations. Warranties shall be for full value, to cover labor and materials without proration.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 2 of 29

DIVISION 7

1.2

TESTING/SUBMITTALS Require submittal of samples of all materials to be used shall be required. Testing data shall be submitted which supports claims made for the product.

PART 2 MATERIALS (SECTION 07100) Damp-proofing and waterproofing procedures and systems shall be of the best available for the identified problem. Estimates of probable costs and recommendations shall be submitted to the Owner for approval prior to start of construction documents. PART 3 EXECUTION (SECTION 07100) 3.1 UTILITIES Utilities which penetrate the moisture barrier shall be installed prior to installation of the final barrier. If final utilities cannot be installed prior to installation of the barrier, suitable stubs shall be provided, which will be permanently sealed by the barrier. Sleeves will not be allowed. All connections to utility stubs, which occur below grade and which could influence the integrity of the barrier, must be solidly sealed, watertight connections. Coordination of the installation of all utilities shall be required in the specifications. 3.2 PENETRATIONS Any objects requiring penetration of the barrier, other than utilities, shall be installed prior to installation of the final barrier. Require coordination of the installation of all penetrations in the specifications. 3.3 BACKFILLING All backfilling adjacent to the barrier shall be done with great care in order not to damage the barrier. A 1/2" minimum layer of termite-resistant rigid insulation shall be placed next to the barrier prior to backfilling as protection for the barrier. Backfilling procedures shall be done in accordance with the requirements of Division 2. 3.4 SITE SECURITY/SAFETY Require site to be secure and safe while work under this section is being done. All precautions shall be provided for the health and safety of the general public and the construction crews; and shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Require that the moisture barrier to be protected at all times during the construction process. 3.5 OTHER TRADES Architects shall attempt to by design considerations minimize and/or alleviate potentially at-risk situations, which will require intensive damp-proofing/waterproofing work. Specifically, planters above basement areas and heavily watered landscaping areas next to below-grade interior areas should be avoided. Locations, which have

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 3 of 29

DIVISION 7

high ground water or which potentially could have subterranean flowing water, should not have below-grade areas. Require building trades to cooperate and coordinate with each other in the installation of their various work. All trades shall protect the moisture barrier at all times. SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concealed building insulation. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for insulation installed as part of metal framed wall and partition assemblies. Division 13 Section "Metal Building Systems" for insulation installed as part of the engineered metal building.

2.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of insulation product specified. C. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance of insulation products with specified requirements including those for thermal resistance, fire-testresponse characteristics, water-vapor transmission, water absorption, and other properties, based on comprehensive testing of current products. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source with resources to provide products complying with requirements indicated without delaying the Work. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test- response characteristics indicated on Drawings or specified elsewhere in this Section as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 4 of 29

DIVISION 7

3.

Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: a. b. c. d. CertainTeed Corporation. Western Fiberglass Corp. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation. Johns Manville Corp.

2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths.

B. Faced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Thermal insulation combining glass fibers with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A (blankets with reflective vapor retarder membrane facing and flame spread of 25 or less); with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face. 1. Flanged Units: Provide blankets fabricated with facing incorporating 5-inch- wide flanges along edges for attachment to framing members. Thermal Resistance in locations indicated as follows: a. b. Walls/Furring: R-11. Under roof deck: R-30.

2.

C. Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I blankets without membrane facing; consisting of fibers (sound attenuating batt) manufactured from glass; with maximum flame spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 2.3 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 5 of 29

DIVISION 7

A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations including removing projections that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to ice and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Seal joints between closed-cell (non breathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for fire stopping. 1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.

D. Set reflective, foil-faced units with not less than O.75-inch air space in front of foil as indicated. E. Install glass fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill cavities formed by framing members. Where more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

2.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 6 of 29

DIVISION 7

3.5 PROTECTION A. General: Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

SECTION 07500 - ROOFING FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 07500) The Architect shall specify the roofing structure to meet or exceed the "U" values called out in this Manual, and he shall provide careful and thorough design, detailing and specifying of the roofing systems to complement those requirements, but he shall not compromise the basic requirements of a good roofing system in order to do so. Avoid the installation of mechanical units, piping, electrical work or conduit on the roof, unless approved by the Project Coordinator, and special provisions are included to allow reroofing and repair. Specify a complete roofing system. The system manufacturer shall have Unit Responsibility for the entire system. In new construction, the Architect's shall design so that the maximum deflection of the roof deck is less than the level allowed for the roofing system utilized, recognizing that this criterion is often more restrictive than that of other structural considerations. Gravel shall not be a part of any roofing system. 1.1 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be required of all roofing system materials and components. Warranties shall be submitted to the Architect by the manufacturer for prior approval. Submittal shall include any modifications to the standard form, which will bring it into conformance with the requirements and conditions of the project and the contract documents. 1.2 1.2.1 GUARANTEES/WARRANTIES CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE The roofing contractor shall provide a written guarantee, in addition to that of the manufacturers, that all roofing and flashing shall be maintained in a weather tight condition for a period of five years from date of Substantial Completion of the project. This date shall be determined by the Architect. Manufacturer's Guarantee will not be accepted in lieu of Contractor's Guarantee. 1.2.2 MANUFACTURER'S GUARANTEE If approved by the Project Manager specify Roofing Contractor must furnish a full-value Manufacturer's Guarantee providing complete coverage for both labor and materials for a ten year period from the date of Substantial Completion. This date shall be as determined by the Architect. Longer warranties may be required as an Owner option. This guarantee must be on the Manufacturer's form, modified as required. Extended warranties may be required for components of certain roofing systems.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 7 of 29

DIVISION 7

The entire roofing system must be covered by the same warranty. This means that the Roofing Manufacturer must have "Unit Responsibility" for the roofing installation, that systems comprised of products from separate manufacturers shall not be allowed except for the condition of one manufacturer accepting full liability for the performance of all products applied or otherwise utilized as a part of the system, including those products of other manufacturers that are built into the roofing system. Samples of the warranties, with modifications as required, shall be submitted for prior approval. Roof cuts for test purposes shall be coordinated with manufacturer for Guarantee coverage. PART 2 PRODUCTS (SECTION 07500) 2.1 BUILT-UP ROOFING (BUR) Minimum of 4 ply fiberglass, U.L. Class "A" rated. This roofing system can be applied in virtually all roofing situations. Lowest or first ply, to be heavy base sheet, such as a 45 lb. fiberglass ply. 2.2 SBS MODIFIED BITUMENS U.L. Class "A", rated. This roofing system can be applied in virtually all roofing situations. 2.3 COLD PROCESS SYSTEMS U.L. Class "A" rated, smooth finish. This system can be applied in virtually all roofing situations. 2.4 SINGLE PLY Single ply systems can be specified only in special situations when other systems are impractical, due to lack of access, unusual configurations, such as barrel roofs, or extremely high pitch roofs where adhesives would be hard to install. All single ply installations shall require prior approval from the Owner, and request for approval shall include a statement justifying the single ply installation. Single ply systems shall be U.L. Class "A" rated. Single ply roofing systems shall not be used where they may be exposed to unusual levels of chemicals, harmful toxic substances, or access by vandals. Installation should be fully adhered or mechanically fastened. 2.5 FIBERGLASS SHINGLES Minimum 25 years, self-sealing, fire resistant, 12" x 36", U.L. Class "A" rated. 2.6 CLAY TILE U.S. Manufactured, mission style, tapered pans and covers, non-fade integral colors. Wire-tied installation shall be standard unless otherwise approved by the District. Require bird closures. Concrete, slate and other clay tile shapes can be used only with prior approval from the District. 2.7 WOOD PLANK OR PLYWOOD DECKS If plywood is used as the roof deck material, exterior grade plywood of the proper thickness to satisfy nailing requirements and span should be used. The plywood panels should be spaced at least 1/16 inch to allow for expansion.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 8 of 29

DIVISION 7

If wood planks are to be used as the roof deck, boards should be minimum one inch by six inch (nominal) spanning a maximum of 24 inches between trusses or rafters. Spaced sheathing is not recommended. Lengths of lath should be nailed directly above the rafters through the felt underlayment Horizontal battens (stringers), spaced according to the type of tile to be used, should then be nailed across the lath. 2.8 NAILS The nails to be used in tile roofing should be 11 gauge rust-resistant aluminum, cooper, yellow metal, or stainless steel nails of sufficient length of penetrate either 3/4 inch into the sheathing or through the thickness of the sheathing, whichever is less. At overhangs where deck is exposed, nails length shall be limited so as to not be exposed. 2.9 ASPHALT SHINGLES-NAILS The nails used to apply all asphalt shingle materials to wood-plank or plywood roof decks should be 11 or 12 gauge, hot-dipped galvanized roofing nails (or the equivalent), having large heads (at least 3/8 inch in diameter) and shanks that are 7/8 inches to an inch long. Nails that are long enough to penetrate the roof sheathing or at least 3/4 inch into wood plank decks should be used over old roofing materials. At overhangs where deck is exposed, nails length shall be limited so as to not be exposed. 2.10 SURFACE FLASHING The concrete substrate and all other surfaces to which the waterproofing membrane will be attached, should be clean, smooth and free of loose particles, grease, oil and other foreign matter. Treated wood nailers and mechanical fasteners must be used to secure the top edge of flashing materials. Cast-in reglets are not recommended as a substitute for nailing, but should be raised above the expected water line of the finished surface. 2.11 PLUMBING VENT FLASHING Roll lead flashing 1" down into pipe. Modified Bitumen flashing strip. Modified Bitumen membrane with optional surfacing or coating. Set lead flange in mastic prime flange before stripping. 2.12 METAL ROOFING Standing seam, minimum 24 gauge, ASTM A-446, Grade "A" steel with protective coating. Manufacturer shall provide minimum twenty (20) year warranty for caulking, fading and film integrity. For unusual and unique roof designs, other roofing systems may be utilized with prior approval by the Project Manager. PART 3 EXECUTION (SECTION 07500) 3.1 PROJECT SECURITY

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 9 of 29

DIVISION 7

General Contractor and subcontractors shall ensure that the general public and other construction personnel are safeguarded and protected during the roofing operation. This will require temporary fencing, barricades, off-hour work, etc. 3.2 INSPECTIONS All work shall be inspected and approved by the manufacturer's representative for compliance with the manufacturer's requirements prior to Owner's acceptance review. Architect shall review the roofing installation periodically, appropriate to the stage of construction. Owner may provide full time inspections during critical stages of the work. 3.3 ACCEPTANCE Substrate shall be inspected by the manufacturer's representative and the roofing subcontractor prior to start of the roofing operation. Roofing operation shall not commence until substrate is acceptable in writing to both parties. Architect shall review other related construction, which is directly or indirectly related to the roofing operation prior to the start of the work. 3.4 DRAINAGE REQUIREMENTS No-slope roofs will not be allowed. Roof shall have positive drainage and shall meet the minimum requirements of the roofing manufacturer. Designer shall provide as much slope as is possible on low slope roofs. A minimum of 1/2" per foot on roof planes and 1/8" per foot in cricket valleys is desired. Large crickets shall be constructed of wood or steel framing. No plywood sheathing on crickets shall span more than 24" or be less than 5 ply, 5/8" structural I plywood. Crickets without sub-framing are not acceptable. Low rise diverter crickets on well draining roofs can be constructed of tapered insulation. Roof Drains shall be installed in a lead flashed depressed 24" x 24" pan. Pan shall be metal flashed to the roof deck. Drains shall be of cast iron or brass. PVC or other plastic drains and accessories are not acceptable. Roof drains shall be installed to provide positive drainage. Roof jacks shall be metal only. Jacks with rubberized or PVC fittings will not be acceptable. Interior drains shall be mechanically cleaned, full length, at completion of the roofing operation. Provide overflow drains as required by Uniform Building Code, either by means of scuppers or by independent leaders. 3.5 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT Mechanical equipment will not be located on the roofs, except for required roof mounted exhaust fans and ventilators. Coordinate with Division 15. 3.6 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CURBS/PLATFORMS Where it is absolutely required that equipment be located on the roof, equipment platforms or curbs shall be installed.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 10 of 29

DIVISION 7

Curbs and platforms shall be designed high enough to accept two piece flashing and to allow for future re-roofing without removal of equipment. State clearance in inches per width of equipment. Platforms are to be fully covered with galvanized sheet metal. 3.7 INSULATION Only insulation which is appropriate to the roofing system manufacturer, and for which the manufacturer will accept "Unit Responsibility", will be acceptable. Unit Responsibility must be certified to the Architect prior to installation. Installation of insulation shall meet factory mutual requirements for wind uplift resistance. 3.8 APPLICATION Cold application is preferred by the District. In new construction, however, hot applied systems will be acceptable if all other conditions are met. Cold-applied systems shall be given priority above hot-applied systems on District projects, based on safety and performance standards and practices. Cold application should not be used on slope exceeding manufacturer's specification Hot application shall be acceptable on new construction only, and in certain re-roofing applications during the summer vacation when schools are not in session. This requirement is based on safety and performance standards and practices. Only asphalt which is acceptable to the system manufacturer shall be acceptable. Prior to installation of roofing all mechanical air intake units shall be shut down regardless of whether installation is a hot or cold adhesion system. 3.9 OTHER TRADES All sheet metal work which is embedded in the roofing system, or which is part of the flashing system, shall be installed by the roofing subcontractor who will warranty the work. Any sheet metal work, which is fabricated and supplied by a contractor or supplier other than the roofing subcontractor, for installation as part of the roofing system, must be acceptable to the roofing subcontractor. All metal flashing shall be two piece type and shall be suitable for removal for reroofing. SECTION 07550 - ROOFING FOR EXISTING CONSTRUCTION PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 07550) The Architect shall verify if the existing roofing materials contains asbestos. The requirements under Section 07555, Notice of Asbestos - Containing Roofing Material shall be followed. The Architect shall specify the roofing structure to meet or exceed the "U" values called out in this Manual, and shall provide careful and thorough design, detailing and specifying of the roofing systems to compliment those requirements, but shall not compromise the basic requirements of a good roofing system in order to do so. Avoid the installation of mechanical units, piping, electrical work or conduit on the roof, unless approved by the Project Coordinator, and special provisions are included to allow reroofing and repair.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 11 of 29

DIVISION 7

Provide a complete roofing system. System manufacturer shall have "unit responsibility" of the entire system. The District shall make available to the Architect such existing documentation pertaining to the facility as may be available, such as record drawings and specifications. In existing construction, the Architect shall attempt to determine if the maximum deflection of the roof deck is less than the deflection allowed for the roofing system utilized. Should structural modifications be necessary in order to obtain the required warranties, the Project Manager shall be advised of the situation and, if necessary, shall authorize the modification to the scope of services. In circumstances where it is not feasible to obtain adequate positive drainage from all areas of the project, warranty provisions requiring positive drainage shall be modified by the manufacturer to be responsive to the requirements of the project and the existing conditions. Under no circumstances should a roofing warranty be sacrificed because of existing conditions. Roof cuts for test purposes shall be coordinated with manufacturer to protect guarantee coverage. 1.1 SUBSTRATES All substrate conditions should be identified, together with information regarding how to repair any anticipated damage to the substrate and what type(s) of fasteners or methods of attachment will be acceptable. 1.2 1.2.1 GUARANTEES/WARRANTIES CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE The Roofing Contractor shall provide a written guarantee, in addition to that of the manufacturer, that all roofing and flashing shall be maintained in a weather tight condition for a period of five years from the date of substantial completion of the project. This date shall be determined by the Architect. Manufacturer's guarantee will not be accepted in lieu of Contractor's guarantee. 1.2.2 MANUFACTURER'S GUARANTEE When requested by the Project Manager, specify that Roofing Contractor must provide a full-value Manufacturer's guarantee providing complete coverage for both labor and materials for a ten year period from date of substantial completion. This date shall be as determined by the Architect. Longer warranties may be required as an Owner option. This guarantee must be on the Manufacturer's form, modified as required. Extended warranties may be required for components of certain roofing systems. The entire roofing system must be covered by the same warranty. This means that the Roofing Manufacturer must have "Unit Responsibility" for the roofing installation, that systems comprised of products from separate manufacturers shall not be allowed except for the condition of one manufacturer accepting full liability for the performance of all products applied or otherwise utilized as a part of the system including the products of other manufacturers that are built into the roofing system. Samples of the warranties, with modifications as required, shall be submitted for prior approval. PART 2 PRODUCTS (SECTION 07550) 2.1 ROOFING SYSTEMS

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 12 of 29

DIVISION 7

Roofing systems should be compatible with other systems at the same school or facility. It is not appropriate from a maintenance standpoint to mix one roofing system with another. Each system requires different methods of maintenance and repair, and should therefore be chosen on a campus by campus basis, unless otherwise approved by the Project Manager. Built-up roofing shall be the preferred roofing system. The system shall be four ply, U.L. Class "A" with first ply to be a heavy base sheet. The roofing materials shall be a fiberglass ply system or an SBS modified system. Gravel or other loose aggregate shall not be used as part of the roofing system. Ballasted roof systems shall not be used on existing construction. Systems to be fully adhered or mechanically fastened. Single ply roofing systems may be utilized where appropriate, and if they are prior approved by the Project Manager. Flashing systems shall be approved and warranted by the roofing manufacturer. See requirements of Section 07500, Roofing for New Construction, for criteria and limitations of the various roofing systems. Existing specialty roofs shall be replaced with like roofs unless directed by the District to do otherwise, i.e., mission tile roofs will be replaced with mission tile roofs. 2.2 PRE-BID ACCEPTANCE Each manufacturer of a roofing system whose product shall be bid shall submit, for Architect's review and approval, its proposed system, components, warranty (modified as necessary), U.L. classification and a list of manufacturer approved applicators. 2.3 EXISTING DAMAGE Provisions shall be made in the specifications on the procedure to be followed if damage is discovered to the substrate after demolition has started, keeping in mind the need for the structure to remain protected from inclement weather at all times. PART 3 EXECUTION (SECTION 07550) 3.1 PROJECT SECURITY General Contractor and subcontractor shall ensure that the general public and other construction personnel are safeguarded and protected during the roofing operation. This will include fencing, barricades, off-hours work, or other methods. Areas of the reroofing project must be made secure and safe for the general public and students by use of a six foot high chain link fence. Areas within six feet of edge of roof must also be fenced off during operations in those areas. Fenced off areas must be kept closed in order to keep students out. Covers shall be provided over entrances. 3.2 INSPECTIONS

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 13 of 29

DIVISION 7

All work shall be inspected by the manufacturer's representative for compliance with the manufacturer's requirements. Architect shall review the roofing installation periodically, appropriate to the stage of construction. The Owner may provide full time inspections during critical stages of the work. 3.3 PHASED CONSTRUCTION Reroofing operations shall be conducted in "phased" sequence. That is, no more roof area than can be dried-in during the same day will be demolished. Edges of the phased area shall be sealed with a temporary closure at the end of each day. 3.4 PREPARATION Existing substrates shall be prepared for the reroofing operation per manufacturer's requirements. Any unknown conditions, which will require more extensive work, shall be brought to the attention of the Architect. Insulation shall be compatible with roofing system selected, and shall become part of the "Unit Responsibility" warranty of the manufacturer and the roofing contractor. Installation of insulation to meet Factory Mutual's requirements for wind uplift resistance. 3.5 DRAINAGE REQUIREMENTS All drains that do not drain through the parapet walls will be mechanically cleaned at the end of the reroofing operation, to provide a clear, free flowing drain. Drains shall be pressurized and checked for stability. If drains do not have a lead or metal flashing, one will be required as part of the reroofing. Drains shall be cleaned of all asphalt. All missing parts, such as strainers, shall be replaced. Roof jacks shall be metal only. Jacks with rubberized or PVC fittings will not be acceptable. Large crickets shall be constructed of wood or steel framing. No plywood sheathing on crickets shall span more than 24" or be less than 5 ply, 5/8" Structural I plywood. Crickets without sub-framing are not acceptable. Low rise diverter crickets on well draining roofs can be constructed of tapered insulation. 3.6 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT Any mechanical equipment on the roof, which is not installed on acceptable curbs or platforms, shall be removed, and new curbs or platforms shall be installed. 3.7 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CURBS/PLATFORMS Where it is absolutely required that new equipment be located on the roof, equipment platforms or curbs shall be installed. Curbs and platforms shall be designed high enough to accept two piece flashing and to allow for future reroofing without removal of equipment. State clearance in inches per width of equipment Platforms to be covered with galvanized sheet metal. 3.8 APPLICATION

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 14 of 29

DIVISION 7

Cold application is the only acceptable method of installation on existing roofs on schools which are in session or which may be in session when the reroofing application takes place. No mechanical attachment shall be allowed on concrete decks on which tests detect any moisture to be present. If mechanical attachment cannot be avoided, a non-resin epoxy method must be used. Stainless steel or cadmium coated anchors are not acceptable. 3.9 OTHER TRADES Sheet metal work which is embedded in the roofing system or which is part of the flashing system shall be installed by the roofing subcontractor who will warranty the work. Any sheet metal work, which is fabricated and supplied by a contractor or supplier other than the roofing subcontractor, for installation as part of the reroofing system, must be acceptable to the roofing subcontractor. All metal flashing shall be two piece type, suitable for removal for reroofing. On reroofing projects, the Architect shall examine the existing ceilings and wall below the roof. Any damage found shall be documented and reported to the Project Manager for consideration for repair and to establish a record of existing conditions prior to the roofing operation. SECTION 07555 - NOTICE OF ASBESTOS - CONTAINING ROOFING MATERIALS All bidders for this contract are hereby notified that this project involves the removal of asbestos-containing roofing materials (ACRMs). The Contractor shall comply with all applicable local, state, and federal codes and regulations governing work practices, work protection, notifications, and hauling/disposal of asbestos materials, including the OSHA Asbestos Rule for the Construction Industry and the National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP). Requirement for re-roofing projects, which involve asbestos containing material. PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 07555) The Contractor shall implement all measures as are necessary to protect persons and property and to comply with federal, state and local agency requirements. If the Contractor suspects the presence of other asbestos-containing materials on the job site, such as pipe insulation, mudded pipe elbows, cement-asbestos board or pipe, which may be disturbed by the roofing activities, the Contractor is directed to leave these materials undisturbed and contact the TUSD representative. TUSD will have the suspect materials sampled and tested. If the materials contain asbestos, TUSD will instruct the Contractor as to how to proceed. PART 2 PRODUCTS (SECTION 07555) - NO COMMENTARY PART 3 EXECUTION (SECTION 07555) The Contractor removing asbestos-containing roofing materials is required to comply with all applicable regulations as noted in Section 1.0. In an attempt to fully protect and insure the safety of workers and the general public, the Contractor is required to employ the following work practices in addition to others that may be required by federal, state and local regulations.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 15 of 29

DIVISION 7

Cutting of asbestos-containing roofing materials shall be done using hand tools. This allows the roofing materials to be considered non-regulated ACRMs under the NESHAP regulations The use of power cutting tools must be approved by TUSD. If approved and used, the tools must be equipped with a shrouded blade attached to a high efficiency particulate air (HEPA)-filtered vacuum line. In addition, ACRMs must be sprayed with TUSD approved encapsulant at least six inches along both sides of each cut before the ACRMs are pried up from the substrate. All asbestos-containing roofing materials must be constantly misted with water as they are cut, scraped, or otherwise removed from the substrate. Use hoses with fine spray nozzles and/or pump-up sprayers. The goal is to eliminate all visible dust. Removed asbestos-containing roofing materials will be transferred from the roof to a dumpster, roll-off container, or dump truck in such a manner as to minimize dust. A truck with a lift-up bed, a hoist, or a crane with a covered metal bucket or container may be used. Chutes may be used as long as the roofing materials remain damp from misting. Note: roofing material that is made friable (broken into small pieces) during the removal process must be placed into labeled bags and treated as friable (i.e., regulated) ACRMs for disposal purposes. The ACRMs must be double bagged and all labeling must comply with the NESHAP rule. All removed asbestos-containing roofing materials shall be placed in the disposal container by the end of each work day. Debris shall not be allowed to accumulate on the roof. The disposal container must be secured by fencing and locked gates. The Contractor shall transport asbestos-containing debris in a covered container/truck to disposal site (landfill) approved by TUSD. The Contractor will contact the landfill authority one day prior to the date of disposal of asbestos-containing roofing debris. All debris must be transported to the landfill within 24 hours of filling each container and within 48 hours of completing the roof removal portion of the re-roofing project. The Contractor will follow instructions from the landfill operator in disposing of the asbestos waste. SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories: 1. 2. 3. Roof drainage systems. Exposed trim. Metal flashing.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 16 of 29

DIVISION 7

1.

Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric sealants. Division 7 Roofing Sections for flashing and roofing accessories installed as integral part of roofingsystem work.

2. 3.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing. B. Fabricate and install flashings at roof edges to comply with recommendations of FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for the following wind zone: 1. Wind Zone 1: Wind pressures of 21 to 30 psf

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data including manufacturer's material and finish data, installation instructions, and general recommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product. C. Shop Drawings of each item specified showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and anchorage details. D. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed sheet metal flashing and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for-this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of materials and finishes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526, G 90, commercial quality, or ASTM A 527, G 90, lock-forming quality, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with 0.20 percent copper, mill phosphatized where indicated for painting; not less than 0.0396 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 17 of 29

DIVISION 7

B. No lead solder shall be used in any TUSD project, unless otherwise approved by the Project Manager. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Burning Rod for Lead: Same composition as lead sheet. B. Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, used with rosin flux. C. Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. D. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. E. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. F. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." G. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal. H. Paper Slip Sheet: 5-lb/square red rosin, sized building paper conforming to FS UU-B-790, Type I, Style 1b. I. Polyethylene Underlayment: ASTM D 4397, minimum 6-mil thick black polyethylene film, resistant to decay when tested according to ASTM E 154. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed; noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance.

J.

K. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. B. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. C. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. E. Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 18 of 29

DIVISION 7

F. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. G. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. H. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view. . I. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. 1. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but never less than thickness of metal being secured.

2.4 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. General: Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than that listed below for each application and metal. B. Exposed Trim: Fabricate from Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch thick. C. Base Flashing: Fabricate from Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch thick. D. Drip Edges and Wall Caps: Fabricate from Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch thick. E. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch thick. F. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. B. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 19 of 29

DIVISION 7

C. Roof-Edge Flashings: Secure metal flashings at roof edges according to FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone. D. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonettype expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). E. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except where pre-tinned surface would show in finished Work. 1. Do not solder the following metals: a. 2. Coil-coated galvanized steel sheet.

Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.

F. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant. 1. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered.

G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. H. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Underlayment: Where installing stainless steel or aluminum directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a slip-sheet of red-rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment. Bed flanges of Work in a thick coat of roofing cement where required for waterproof performance.

2. I.

Roof-Drainage System: Install drainage items fabricated from sheet metal, with straps, adhesives, and anchors recommended by SMACNA's Manual or the item manufacturer, to drain roof in the most efficient manner. Coordinate roof-drain flashing installation with roof-drainage system installation. Coordinate flashing and sheet metal items for steep-sloped roofs with roofing installation. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate equipment support flashing installation with roofing and equipment installation. Weld or seal flashing to equipment support member.

J.

K. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate roof-penetration flashing installation with roofing and installation of items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows: 1. 2. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing. Seal and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof, other than lead flashing on vent piping.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 20 of 29

DIVISION 7

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial Completion.

SECTION 07700 ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 07700) Provide for all roof accessories, which are not covered by other sections of this Division, and other Divisions of these Specifications and the drawings. Roof accessories include the following, and may be specified in different sections of final specifications. Roof hatches and related items. Ventilators (coordinate with Division 15). Prefabricated roof specialties. Fascias, parapet copings, and accessories. Antennas, communications access (Coordinate with Division 16). Other systems as may be required at various facilities. Require submittals consisting of literature and shop drawings of all specialty items, which will be installed on the roofs. See Section 07500. PART 2 PRODUCTS (SECTION 07700) All roof accessories shall be metal or fiberglass. No PVC or plastic will be allowed. Any connection to the interior of the building by electric or telecommunication hook-up will be installed in conduit through the roof, properly flashed, and no conduit shall be laid on the roof. PART 3 EXECUTION (SECTION 07700) All roof mounted equipment shall be mounted on curbs or platforms to conform with the requirements of Section 07500, unless self-curbed. Anchors for antennas shall be attached to the building structural system, and they shall be properly flashed per Sections 07500 and 07600. 3.1 SECURITY All roof accessories, which could allow entry into the building, if removed or tampered with shall include security devices to prevent access.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 21 of 29

DIVISION 7

If accessories cannot be made secure mechanically, an electronic security system shall be provided. 3.2 OTHER TRADES Other trades required to install, anchor, flash and/or connect accessories shall do so before final roofing coating is applied. SECTION 07800 - SKYLIGHTS PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 07800) Skylights shall not be used on any District project unless prior approved by the Project Manager. Without adequate provisions, skylights are easy targets of vandalism and/or unauthorized access. Where skylights are existing, the District may wish to remove them. However, this section is provided for those instances where existing skylights are to be replaced by new ones, or where approved for new construction, and provides security measures for new and existing skylights. Require submittals of skylight details including mounting, flashing, condensation drains, samples and literature regarding the glazing. PART 2 PRODUCTS (SECTION 07800) All skylights shall be curb mounted, self-flashing units. Security bars or grilles shall be installed at all skylights. Security bars or grilles shall be mounted so that fasteners, bolts, screws, etc., cannot be removed from the outside. All skylights shall be double domed, solar glazed with materials approved by the Project Manager. Curbs shall be a minimum of 8" high and mechanically anchored to the deck. All skylight metal shall be aluminum or steel. Large skylights shall be structurally reinforced as required. PART 3 EXECUTION (SECTION 07800) 3.1 OTHER TRADES Other trades providing work to install or finish the skylights shall coordinate with the General Contractor for dimensions and details. SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 22 of 29

DIVISION 7

A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section: B. This Section includes sealants for the following applications: 1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces: a. b. c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. Joints between metal panels. Joints between different materials listed above. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. Other joints as indicated.

2.

Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. Tile control and expansion joints, inside comers, and intersection with ceilings. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls and partitions. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. Other joints as indicated. .

3.

Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. b. Control and expansion joints in exposed cast-in-place concrete slabs. Other joints as indicated.

C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. All sealants to be compatible with the adjacent materials that they are intended to adhere to or otherwise come into contact with. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 23 of 29

DIVISION 7

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. When joint substrates are wet.

2.

B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products specified in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquidapplied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses. B. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. C. Room Temperature Vulcanizing: Use room temperature vulcanizing sealant at Kitchen, where fixed stainless steel is adjacent to wall, including at hand-wash sink, fixed metal counters in area of 3-compartment sink, and frame of coiling counter door. 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product of this description indicated in the Latex Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 24 of 29

DIVISION 7

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. 2. 3. 4. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin. Type 0: Open-cell material. . Type B: Bicellular material with a surface skin. Type: Any material indicated above.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in anyway, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following: a. Concrete.

2.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 25 of 29

DIVISION 7

b. c. 2. 3.

Masonry. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. a. b. c. d. Metal. Glass. Porcelain enamel. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. 2. 3. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints. E. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. 2. 3. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 26 of 29

DIVISION 7

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. 2. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. Provide flush joint configuration, per Figure 58 in ASTM C 1193, where indicated. Provide recessed joint configuration, per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193, of recess depth and at locations indicated. a. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances al1 from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such- protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. 3.6 ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products formulated with fungicide that are intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes, and that comply with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 2. 3. 4. 786 Mildew Resistant; Dow Corning. Sanitary 1700; GE Silicones. NuFlex 302; NUCO Industries, Inc. 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant; Pecora Corporation. PSI-611; Polymeric Systems, Inc. Tremsil 600 White; Tremco. Tremsil 200: Use where room temperature vulcanizing is required. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.

3. 4. 5.

Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). Class: 25. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 27 of 29

DIVISION 7

5.

Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Use 0 Joint Substrates: Galvanized steel and ceramic tile.

6.

Applications: Joints abutting plumbing fixtures, and countertops.

B. Multi-component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 2. 3. 4. 5. Chem-Calk 2641; Bostik Inc. Vulkem 227; Mameco International. Vulkem 922; Mameco International. Elasto-Thane 920 Gun Grade; Pacific Polymers, Inc. Dynatred; Pecora Corporation. PSI-270; Polymeric Systems, Inc. NP 2; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc.

Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag). Class: 25. Use Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic)]. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Use 0 Joint Substrates: Galvanized steel, ceramic tile, and wood.]

6.

Applications: Exterior vertical, horizontal, and overhead.

C. Multicomponent Pourable Urethane Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. 2. 3. Chern-Calk 550; Bostik Inc. Vulkem 245; Mameco International. Vulkem 255; Mameco International. Pourthane; W.R. Meadows, Inc. Elasto-Thane 920 Pourable; Pacific Polymers, Inc. NR-200 Urexpan; Pecora Corporation. NR-300 Urexpan, Type M; Pecora Corporation. PSI-270SL; Polymeric Systems, Inc. PSI-551/RC-2; Polymeric Systems, Inc. Sikaflex - 2c SL; Sika Corporation. SL 2; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc. THC-900; Tremco. THC-901; Tremco.

Type and Grade: M (multi-component) and P (pourable). Class: 25.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 28 of 29

DIVISION 7

4. 5.

Use Related to Exposure: T (traffic). Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Use 0 Joint Substrates: Galvanized steel.

6.

Applications: Exterior and interior traffic bearing substrates. Install over expansion material at all intersections of exterior walls and concrete walkways.

D. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. Vulkem 116; Mameco International. Vulkem 230; Mameco International. Sikaflex - 1 a; Sika Corporation. NP 1; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). Class: 25. Use Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic). Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Use 0 Joint Substrates: Galvanized steel.

6.

Applications: Interior vertical and overheads joints.

3.7 LATEX JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Latex Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 2. Chem-Calk 600; Bostik Inc. NuFlex 330; NUCO Industries, Inc. LC 160 All Purpose Acrylic Caulk; Ohio Sealants, Inc. AC-20; Pecora Corporation. PSI-701; Polymeric Systems, Inc. Sonolac; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. Tremflex 834; Tremco.

Applications: Hollow metal work joint at concrete masonry units.

END OF SECTION

Rev. 01/01/2007

Thermal & Moisture Protection-7 Page 29 of 29

DIVISION 8

TUCSON UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT MANUAL OF STANDARDS AND PROCEDURES

DIVISION 8 - DOORS & WINDOWS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 08110 08211 08305 08331 08520 08710 08800

TITLE STEEL DOORS, WINDOWS & FRAMES FLUSH WOOD DOORS ACCESS DOORS OVERHEAD COILING DOORS ALUMINUM WINDOWS FINISH HARDWARE GLAZING

Rev. 01/01/2007

Doors and Windows - 8 Page 1 of 32

DIVISION 8

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS WINOWS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 08110) 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes steel doors, doorframes and window frames. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for spot grouting frames in gypsum board partitions. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting primed doors and frames.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of steel doors, doorframes and window frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. D. Door Schedule: Submit schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Contract Drawings. E. Window Types: Submit schedule of windows indicating the type of glazing and the room orientation of the applied glazing stops. 1. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide doors and frames complying with ANSI/SDI 100 "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" and as specified. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per ASTM E 152, and are labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.

Temperature-Rise Rating: Where indicated, provide doors that have a temperature-rise rating of 450 deg F maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Doors and Windows - 8 Page 2 of 32

DIVISION 8

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames. B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Do not use non-vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If cardboard wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Doors and Frames: a. b. c. d. e. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial-quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel complying with ASTM A 526, commercial quality, or ASTM A 642, drawing quality, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 525, with A 60 or G 60 coating designation, mill phosphatized. D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating. E. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 16 gauge steel sheet. F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard 'units. Where items are to be built into exterior walls, hotdip galvanize complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. 2.3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. Steel Doors: Provide 1-3/4-inch thick doors of materials and comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 grades and models specified below, or as indicated on Drawings or schedules: 1. Interior Doors (Standard): Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 1, full flush design, minimum 18 gauge coldrolled steel sheet faces, without visible joints or seems on exposed faces.
Doors and Windows - 8 Page 3 of 32

Amweld Building Products, Inc. Ceco Door Products. Curries Co. Fenestra Corp. Republic Builders Products.

Rev. 01/01/2007

DIVISION 8

2.

Exterior Doors: Grade III, extra heavy-duty, Model 2 (Seamless), full flush design, minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel sheet faces.

B. Door Louvers: Provide louvers according to SDI 111C for interior doors where indicated, with blades or baffles formed of 0.0239-inch thick cold-rolled steel sheet set into minimum 0.0359-inch thick steel frame. 1. Sight-Proof Louvers: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted V-shaped or V-shaped blades.

C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. 2.4 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Provide metal frames for doors, sidelights, window and other openings, according to ANSI/SDI 100, and of types and styles as shown on Drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Fabricate standard interior frames of minimum 0.0598-inch thick cold-rolled steel sheet. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners without gaps. Fabricate frames for interior openings from 16 gauge steel sheet. Fabricate frames for exterior openings from 14 gauge galvanized steel sheet. Provide continuous 12 gauge reinforcing for continuous hinges at all exterior doors.

B. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-door frames. C. Plaster Guards: Provide minimum 0.0179-inch- thick steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. D. Grout: When required in masonry construction, as specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry." E. Bituminous Coating: Fibered asphalt emulsion. F. All hollow metal doorframes are to be reinforced for door closer attachment. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI 100 requirements. 1. Internal Construction: One of the following manufacturer's standard core materials according to SDI standards: a. b. c. d. e. Rigid polyurethane conforming to ASTM C 591. Rigid polystyrene conforming to ASTM C 578. Unitized steel grid with sound deadening at interior doors. Vertical steel stiffeners with sound deadening at interior doors. Rigid mineral fiber with internal sound deadener on inside of face sheets.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Doors and Windows - 8 Page 4 of 32

DIVISION 8

2.

Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch between non-firerated pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom. a. Fire Doors: Provide clearances according to NFPA 80.

B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of non-flush units, from only cold-rolled steel sheet. C. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames." D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. E. Galvanized Steel Doors, and Frames: For exterior locations, fabricate doors, panels, and frames from galvanized steel sheet according to SDI 112. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 14 gauge galvanized steel channels, with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. F. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. G. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to ASTM C 1363 on fully operable door assemblies. a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with R-value rating of not less than 6.0 deg. F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

H. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A205.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. a. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcing, and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable.

I.

Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8 and existing frame dimensions.

J.

2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NMMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. B. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No.1," for steel sheet finishes. C. Apply primers and organic finishes to doors and frames after fabrication. 2.7 GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with non-petroleum solvent so that surfaces are free of oil or other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating of the type suited to the organic coating applied over it.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Doors and Windows - 8 Page 5 of 32

DIVISION 8

Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A780. a. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21 035 or SSPC-Paint 20.

B. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, apply air-dried primer specified below immediately after cleaning and pretreatment. 1. Shop Primer: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer paint complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P641, Type II.

2.8 STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel to comply with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPCSP 8 (Pickling). B. Pretreatment: Immediately after surface preparation, apply a conversion coating of type suited to organic coating applied over it. C. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria, is compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and has capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats. Apply primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. PART3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturers written instructions.

B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. 2. Coat the interior each doorframe with bituminous coating prior to installation. Except at existing masonry or gypsum board assembly construction, place frames before constructing enclosing walls and ceilings. In masonry construction, install at least 4 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors. In metal-stud partitions, install at least 4 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In metal-stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws. At existing masonry construction and existing steel stud partitions, install at least 3 anchors per jamb-leg, using expansion anchors through frames, using manufacturer's recommended details. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Doors and Windows - 8 Page 6 of 32

DIVISION 8

C. Grouting Frames: Fully grout all exterior frames and frames in interior concrete masonry walls including heads, jambs, and sills. D. Hollow Metal Door: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. b. c. d. 2. Jambs and Head: 1/8-inch plus or minus 1/16-inch. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8-inch plus or minus 1/16-inch. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/4-inch. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finished Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch.

Fire-Rated Doors: Install with clearances specified in NFPA 80.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturers written instructions.

SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 08211) 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 2. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. Field fitting flush wood doors to frames and field machining for hardware.

B. Related Sections: 1. 2. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. Division 09 Sections "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for field finishing doors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
Rev. 01/01/2007 Doors and Windows - 8 Page 7 of 32

DIVISION 8

A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC accredited certification body. B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer. C. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated." 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings, using graphite pencils. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weather tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. 2. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span.

Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
Doors and Windows - 8 Page 8 of 32

3.
Rev. 01/01/2007

DIVISION 8

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. Buell Door Company Inc. Chappell Door Co. Eggers Industries. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company. Haley Brothers, Inc. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde. B. Particleboard-Core Doors: 1. 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.

C. Horizontal and vertical edges shall be matching hardwood. Doors shall be 1 inch thick.

2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Solid-Core Doors: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces). Species: Birch (Unless otherwise indicated). Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced). Exposed Vertical Edges: Same species as faces or a compatible species. Core: Particleboard. Construction: Seven plies. Stiles and rails shall be bonded to core, and then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. Faces shall be bonded to core using a hot press. Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or non-bonded construction. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.

2.4 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES A. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inchthick, coldrolled steel sheet; factory primed for paint finish.

2.5 FABRICATION

Rev. 01/01/2007

Doors and Windows - 8 Page 9 of 32

DIVISION 8

A. Fit doors to suit existing steel frame. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. B. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A 115-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.

2.6 SHOP PRIMING A. Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop prime doors with first coat of finish as specified in Division 09 Section "Staining and Transparent Finishing," Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with first coat of finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed doorframes before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. Reject doors with defects.

2.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." B. Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.

SECTION 08305 - ACCESS DOORS All access doors shall be metal and shall be rated where required. Provide access doors to attics, roofs, crawl spaces, tunnels and similar spaces where District personnel must have access for maintenance or repair. Provide key locks on all access doors in student areas. Fixed access ladders shall meet O.S.H.A. Standards including a safety cage for the ladders exceeding 24 feet.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Doors and Windows - 8 Page 10 of 32

DIVISION 8

SECTION 08331 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of electric-motor-operated overhead coiling doors: 1. Counter doors.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for lock cylinders and keying. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field-applied paint finish. Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for powered operators and accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Operation Cycle: One complete cycle of a door begins with the door in the closed position. The door is then moved to the open position and back to the closed position. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide overhead coiling doors capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of door components: B. Operation-Cycle Requirements: Design overhead coiling door components to operate for not less than 20,000 cycles. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. Include details of construction re1ative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. Provide roughing-in diagrams, operating instructions, and maintenance information. Include the following: 1. 2. Setting drawings, templates, and installation instructions for built-in or embedded anchor devices. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.

B. Samples for initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied finishes. C. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Doors and Windows - 8 Page 11 of 32

DIVISION 8

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the overhead coiling door manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B. Obtain overhead coiling doors through one source from a single Source Limitations: manufacturer. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc. Atlas Door Corp.; Div. of Clopay Building Products Co. The Cookson Company. Cornell Iron Works Inc. Dynamic Closures (1995) LTD. Mahon Door Corp. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc. Overhead Door Corporation. Pacific Rolling Door Co. Raynor Garage Doors. Roll-Lite Door Corp.; Div. of Clopay Building Products Co. Southwestern Steel Rolling Door Co. Wayne-Dalton Corp. Windsor Door; A United Dominion Company.

2.2 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of interlocking slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of material thickness recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows: 1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Structural-quality, cold-rolled galvanized steel sheets complying with ASTM A 653, with G90 (ASTM A 653M, with Z275) zinc coating. Inside Curtain Slat Face: To match material of outside metal curtain slat and as follows: a. Galvanized Steel Sheet Thickness: Not less than 0.028 inch (0.7 mm).

2.

B. Endlocks: Manufacturer's standard locks on not less than alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement. C. Bottom Bar: Consisting of 2 angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch (38 by 38 by 3 mm) thick, either galvanized or stainless-steel or aluminum extrusions to suit type of curtain slats. D. Curtain Jamb Guides: Fabricate curtain jamb guides of steel angles, or channels and angles, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Build up units with not less than 3/16-inch (5-mm) thick, galvanized steel sections complying with ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M), and

Rev. 01/01/2007

Doors and Windows - 8 Page 12 of 32

DIVISION 8

ASTM A 123. Slot boltholes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent over-travel of curtain and a continuous bar for holding wind-locks. 2.3 HOODS AND ACCESSORIES A. Hood: Form to entirely enclose coiled curtain at opening head and act as weather seal. Contour to suit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sag. 1. Fabricate steel hoods, for steel doors, of not less than 0.028-inch (0.7-mm) thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with G90 (Z275) zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653M). Shape: Square.

2.

B. Push/Pull Handles: For push-up-operated or emergency-operated doors, provide galvanized steel lifting handles on each side of door. 1. Provide pull-down straps or pole hooks for doors more than 84 inches (2130 mm) high.

C. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side. D. Fabricate locking device assembly with lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bar to engage through slots in tracks. 1. Locking Bars: Single-jamb side, operable from inside only.

2.4 FINISHES, GENERAL A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.5 STEEL AND GALVANIZED STEEL FINISHES A. Factory Primer for Field Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer, compatible with field-applied finish according to coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness.

2.6 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operation-cycle requirements specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid operated brake, clutch, remote control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. B. Comply with NFPA 70.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Doors and Windows - 8 Page 13 of 32

DIVISION 8

C. Disconnect Device: Provide hand-operated disconnect, or mechanism for automatically engaging chain and sprocket operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect and operator so they are accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. D. Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency auxiliary operator. E. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V, AC or DC. F. Door-Operator Type: Provide wall, hood, or bracket mounted, jackshaft-type door operator unit consisting of electric motor, drive, and chain and sprocket secondary drive. G. Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, continuous-duty, Class A insulated, electric motors complying with NEMA MG 1; with overload protection; sized to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at not less than 2/3 fps (0.2 m/s) and not more than 1 fps (0.3 m/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. 1. 2. 3. 4. Type: Polyphase, medium-induction type. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors with building electrical system. Provide open drip-proof type motor, and controller with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.

H. Remote-Control Station: Provide momentary-contact, three-button control station with push button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop. 1. Provide interior units, full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.

I.

Obstruction Detection Device: Provide each motorized door with indicated external automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of sensor immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. 1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in door opening without contact between door and obstruction. a. Self-Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with door operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensing device. When self-monitoring feature is activated, door closes only with sustained pressure on close button.

J.

Limit Switches: Provide adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
Rev. 01/01/2007 Doors and Windows - 8 Page 14 of 32

DIVISION 8

3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install door and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and as specified. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion and fitting weather-tight for entire perimeter. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup services and to train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below: 1. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, preventive maintenance, and procedures for testing and resetting release devices. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice.

3. 4. 5.

SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS All windows shall be natural or color anodized or organic coated aluminum set up for insulated, plate, or DSB glass as appropriate to the "U" value required for the wall, and of design appropriate to the building architecture. Aluminum is preferred because it is maintenance free (no painting). It is also, important to have applied stop type windows verses using putty. Coordinate light size limitations with the Engineering & Planning Service Department's ability to stock replacement glass. Due to high potential for vandalism, lights shall be of size to ease replacement. The following sizes in inches are appropriate, based on experience: 40 x 48, 16 x 48, 26 x 32, and 16 x 44. TUSD Maintenance stocks laminated clear, bronze and gray. Windows at food service areas and at toilets shall be screened. Other windows shall not be screened. Double glazed windows are preferred.

SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 08710)


Rev. 01/01/2007 Doors and Windows - 8 Page 15 of 32

DIVISION 8

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide finish hardware as herein specified. Finish Hardware supplier is responsible to supply all items of hardware necessary for a complete and properly functioning, secure and weatherproof installation, to suit door and frame conditions, including compliance with all applicable codes and regulations. B. Related Work Covered Elsewhere: 1. Wood blocking behind all wall stops: Section 06100.

1.3 PROJECT REQUIREMENT A. All work shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act and rulings of Agencies having jurisdiction. 1.4 PRODUCT UNIFORMITY A. Obtain each type of hardware. (latch & locksets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Sequence: IT IS IMPERATIVE THAT THE HARDWARE SCHEDULES AND PRODUCT DATA BE SUBMITTED AT THE EARLIEST POSSIBLE DATE TO ALLOW ADEQUATE LEAD TIME FOR REVIEW BY ARCHITECT AS WELL AS BY THE OWNER'S LOCKSMITH, AND WITH ALLOWANCE FOR RESUBMITTAL(S) AS MAY BE REQUIRED. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE SCHEDULING OF THESE SUBMITTALS WITH PARTICULAR ATTENTION TO WHERE ACCEPTANCE OF HARDWARE SCHEDULE MUST PRECEDE FABRICATION OF OTHER WORK (i.e. STEEL DOORS & FRAMES). B. Hardware Schedules: Submit detailed hardware schedules for review. Provide a complete glossary of abbreviations used, and their meanings. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function and finish of hardware. Based on-finish hardware scheduled on the drawings and specified herein, provide hardware schedule organized in hardware sets, with complete description of every item required for every door or opening. Include the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Type, style, function including BHMA no., size and finish of each hardware item. Manufacturer and complete model/part number for each item. Fastenings, mounting locations and other pertinent information. Location with cross-reference to door and frame designations used on the drawings. Door swing/hand, door and frame sizes and materials. Architect's door number designation following TUSD numbering system for doors.

C. Keying Schedules: All locking hardware must be verified as being compatible with the TUSD ASSA program.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Doors and Windows - 8 Page 16 of 32

DIVISION 8

D. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's complete technical data for each item of hardware including differentiations in type, style, function and/or size. Include installation and maintenance instructions, and all information necessary to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. E. Operation and Maintenance Materials: At completion of the project, submit operating and maintenance instructions, parts listings and warranties in compliance with Section 01700. Deliver to Owner all dogging keys, lock wrenches, closer wrenches and other adjusting tools furnished with hardware. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver items of hardware to job site in manufacturer's original unopened individual containers, complete with necessary appurtenances as required for installation, including screws, keys and installation instructions. Each individual container shall bear manufacturer's name and catalog number. Care shall be taken to prevent damage during delivery, storage and handling. B. General Contractor shall set aside a damp-free locked room with shelves for the sole purpose of the receipt and storage of finish hardware. At the time of delivery of the finish hardware, the General Contractor and the Hardware Supplier shall check the hardware against the approved finish hardware schedule, after which the General Contractor shall be responsible for said hardware against all losses; defacements, etc. A copy of the delivery receipt with the total lists signed by the General Contractor shall be submitted to Architect. 1.7 TEMPLATES A. Hardware Supplier shall furnish templates and all other information as may be required to the fabricators of the doors and frames. This data is required to assist the fabricators in making proper cutouts, mortises, reinforcements and other preparations as required to properly receive the hardware. The templates and/or physical hardware, as required, shall be shipped prepaid to the fabricators. 1.8 HARDWARE FOR LABELED DOOR OPENINGS A. Hardware for door openings, which have label requirements scheduled, shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories as acceptable for the class of opening scheduled and in compliance with NFPA 80. Such hardware shall be in strict accordance with all requirements of all governing authorities. The Hardware Supplier shall be responsible for coordinating the work of Section 08710 with the work of other Sections so as to obtain doorhardware combinations which are listed by UL B. Conflicts, omissions, or deviations from the intent defined in paragraph above, discovered in the Schedule of Hardware by the bidder during his review and examination, shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for clarification prior to bid opening. Lack of such notification shall constitute bidders acceptance of the responsibility to furnish hardware combination acceptable to all governing authorities, including such modifications to the schedule as may be required. 1.9 INTENT OF SCHEDULE A. The intent of the hardware schedules at the end of this specification is to provide design requirements for hardware, which will be aesthetically appropriate and suitable to the function of each door or applicable item. No warranty concerning the absolute completeness of the schedules is intended. Each bidder shall be responsible for complete review and interpretation of schedules, drawings, and balance of applicable contract documents. If ambiguities occur between narrative descriptions and manufacturer's model, code or part number, Architect reserves complete right of interpretation of intent. B. Inadequacies, conflicts, omissions, or deviations from the intent defined in paragraph above, discovered by the bidder during his review and examination, shall be brought to the Architect for clarification prior to bid opening. Lack of such notification shall constitute bidder's acceptance of full responsibility for providing all finish hardware necessary for this project, consistent in quality and performance throughout. Should any door be omitted
Rev. 01/01/2007 Doors and Windows - 8 Page 17 of 32

DIVISION 8

from the schedule, or any item omitted in the hardware schedule, the Hardware Supplier shall provide hardware similar to that scheduled for similar locations. The hardware supplier shall be responsible to provide hardware, which is suitable to the types of doors and frames into which it is to be installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Hardware shall be furnished complete, free from all blemishes and defects. Defective pieces shall be rejected, removed and replaced by new pieces of acceptable quality. B. Phillips head screws and bolts shall be furnished for all items of hardware. Overhead holders and closers shall be furnished with machine screws for attachment to reinforcing in doors and frames. C. Exit devices will be secured to doors with sex bolt applications. D. All thresholds shall be furnished with Ackerman Johnson "Star Type" anchors and machine screws. E. All hinges and pivots shall be furnished with self-cleaning machine screws for steel frames and doors. F. Self-tapping metal screws shall not be used in the anchorage of locks, closers and holders. G. Hardware items shall be secured to mineral-core labeled wood doors using through bolts and sex nuts. H. All existing hardware removed from a project shall be turned over to the TUSD locksmith. I. Hardware shall be furnished with all bolts, screws, fasteners, brackets, fittings, and accessories as required to permit proper installation and performance. All hardware shall have fasteners concealed from view when the door is closed, except where concealed fasteners are not possible.

J.

2.2 FINISHES A. Typically, hardware finishes shall be in accordance with the following, unless otherwise scheduled or noted, except that US32D may be substituted for any item scheduled for US26D; US26D for butts and pivot hinges; sprayed or powder coated aluminum finish for closers, overhead holders and overhead stops; US26D for locksets, latchsets, deadlocks, cylinders, flush bolts and surface bolts; US26D for exit devices with US32D touch bar; US32D for kickplates, armor plates and wall stops; US26D for pulls, pull plates, push plates, cast wall stops and floor stops; US28 clear anodized or mill finish aluminum removable mullions, thresholds, astragals, door bottoms, seals and weather stripping; and US26D at all other hardware items. 2.3 HINGES (BUTTS), GENERAL A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Listed under Category A in BNMAs Certified Product Directory. B. Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. Hager Companies Lawrence McKinney Stanley

C. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7

Rev. 01/01/2007

Doors and Windows - 8 Page 18 of 32

DIVISION 8

D. Hinge Base Metal: Stainless steel, with stainless steel pins. E. Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Antifriction-bearing hinges.

F. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90-inches (4 -inch). Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120-inches (4 -inch). For doors with heights more than 120-inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30-inches of door height greater than 120-inches (5-inch).

G. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61-90-inches (4 1/2 inch). Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91-120-inches (4 1/2 inch). For doors with heights more than 120-inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30-inches of door height greater than 120-inches (5-inch).

H. Hinge Option: Where indicated in door hardware sets or on Drawings: 1. Non Removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for all exterior doors and other out swinging doors, and other doors shall have non-rising pins. Tips shall be flat button with matching plug except where hospital tip (HT) is required.

I.

Fasteners: Comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. Screws: Phillips flat-head; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors and frames. Screws: Phillips flat-head; wood screws for wood doors and frames. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges.

2.4 CONTINUOUS HINGES A. General: Minimum 0.120-inch thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall width of 4-inches; fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations; with components finished after milling and drilling are complete. B. Continuous, Gear-Type Hinges: Extruded-aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves; joined by a continuous extruded-aluminum channel cap; self-lubricating thrust bearings. 1. Available Manufactures (or approved equal): a. Hager

2.5 LOCKING AND LATCHING DEVICES


Rev. 01/01/2007 Doors and Windows - 8 Page 19 of 32

DIVISION 8

A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with the American Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG). B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Latch shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge to operate. C. Lock Throw: 1. 2. 3. Bored Locks: Minimum -inch latch bolt throw. Mortise Locks: Minimum -inch latch bolt throw. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch bolt throw.

D. Backset: 2-3/4-inches, unless otherwise indicated. E. Strikes: Manufacturers standard strike with box for each latch bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set. F. Classroom locksets shall be designed to allow for the teacher from the interior of the classroom to lock (secure) the exterior side of the hardware. G. On projects that have major entry points, the Project Manager shall confirm if the entry point will be provided with an electronic security device. 2.6 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Equip locks with manufacturer's standard 6-pin tumbler cylinder (keyed alike), or as otherwise required to match TUSD's existing program (ASSA). Upon Substantial Completion, except in totally new construction, TUSD will schedule installation of ASSA cylinders by District forces. At sites of totally new construction, the contractor shall install TUSD supplied ASSA cylinders at Substantial Completion. From that point the Contractors access to the site for completion of the punch list must be arranged with the TUSD Project Manager or the Site Administrator. B. During the construction stage, the Contractor shall be responsible for installation of temporary cylinders in any locks needed to secure the site for security, storage or safety. C. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches. D. Manufactures: 1. ASSA, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (ASA).

2.7 EXIT DEVICES A. Exit devices as scheduled are products as manufactured by Von Duprin. Equivalent devices as manufactured by Sargent and Precision, complying with this specification are also acceptable. B. All devices shall be Von Duprin 99 series design. Functions (ANSI designations) shall be as scheduled with the following trims: 1. Function 03 - 99NL trim.

C. All devices used in labeled doors shall be fire exit devices, "F" Series. 2.8 CLOSERS
Rev. 01/01/2007 Doors and Windows - 8 Page 20 of 32

DIVISION 8

A. Overhead closers shall be 4041/EDA ADA compliant closers surface mounted, non-handed, non-sized closer for interior or exterior use. Equivalent products as manufactured by Norton and Sargent are also acceptable. All closers shall be warranted by the manufacturer for ten years agreeing to replace units, which fail due to defects in manufacture. B. Closers shall be hydraulically controlled with full rack and pinion operation and adjustable spring power feature. The closer body shall be of cast iron or cast aluminum. Each closer shall have a delayed action cylinder with adjustable spring power, general speed, latch speed. C. Provide arms where integral stop features are scheduled on closers. Equip closers to provide parallel arm mounting at all push-side applications. Equip closers to provide maximum available swing up to 180 deg. all doors. D. Closers shall be furnished with the necessary arms, brackets, and other accessories to suit the door and frame conditions. E. Closers shall be adjusted to comply with the requirements of the American with Disabilities Act (ADA). F. Closers shall be mounted on the inside of exterior doors, and on the room side of interior doors at corridors and other similar areas. Provide push-side mounting of closers wherever possible. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE A. Miscellaneous hardware shall be products as manufactured by Builders Brass Works, Door Controls, Glynn Johnson, Hager, Ives, National Guard, Quality, Rixson, Sargent, Stanley or Trimco. B. Miscellaneous items shall be provided by the manufacturer as noted or scheduled, or from any manufacturer listed above. Substitutions for these miscellaneous items which are not specifically approved by Architect prior to bidding may be rejected at time of hardware schedule review, if, in the Architect's opinion the substitute item is not equivalent to that scheduled. C. Armor plates and kickplates: Shall be of .050-inch stainless steel with square corners and beveled edges. Height shall be 10 inches for kickplates and 30 inches for armor plates. Width shall be 2 inches less than width of door. Pre-drill for countersunk screws 6 inches o.c., all edges. Verify and adjust height of armor plates to maintain minimum 1/2-inch space between top of kickplate and bottom of lockset/latchset rose or escutcheon. or push/pull plate as applicable. D. Door Stops: 1. 2. Doorstops shall be provided as required at all doors except where herein specified otherwise. Doorstops shall consist of wall stops, floor stops or overhead stops as required to prevent doors from striking the building components or equipment.

E. Wall stops equivalent to BBW #WC9X shall be used at walls where scheduled and at unscheduled locations where a door will strike a wall surface in a full-open position. F. Floor stops equivalent to BBW #F8061X, F8063X & F8065X will be permitted for use only in storage, mechanical equipment, electrical equipment, and other similar rooms. Provide base and overall height suitable for door undercut above finish floor. Provide risers only at locations where standard base heights are not adequate for door undercut; BBW #R-3. G. Drip flashing to be installed on the head of exterior doorframes. Provide National Guard #17, aluminum drip or equal.
Rev. 01/01/2007 Doors and Windows - 8 Page 21 of 32

DIVISION 8

2.10 WEATHERSTRIPPING, THRESHOLDS, AND SEALS A. Weather stripping, thresholds, and seals as herein specified are based on products as manufactured by Pemko Manufacturing Co. Equivalent products as manufactured by Reese Enterprises, Inc., National Guard and Zero International are also acceptable. B. Weather stripping, door bottoms or sweeps, and thresholds shall be provided at all exterior doors unless noted otherwise. C. Exterior doors shall be provided with jamb and head weather stripping with silicone rubber insert in a 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch extruded aluminum casing for use with a closer bracket; Pemko 290AS. D. All exterior door openings, unless noted otherwise, shall be provided with a grooved, extruded aluminum threshold, 5 inch depth x 1/4 inch height and one piece full width of opening; Pemko 271 A. E. All exterior doors, unless noted or scheduled otherwise, shall be provided with a door bottom shoe with ribbed vinyl insert in an extruded aluminum casing; Pemko 217AV. F. Meeting stiles of all exterior pairs of doors, except at removable mullion locations, shall be provided with astragals with a silicone rubber insert in a 1-3/8 inch x 1/4 inch extruded aluminum casing; Pemko 355CS. G. Smoke seals shall be Pemko #S88D dark bronze color, self-adhesive, silicone rubber weather stripping. 2.11 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Bored Locks: BHMA A150.2; Series 4000. Listed under Category F in BHMAs Certified Product Directory. B. Mortise Locks: Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; BHMA A156.13, Grade 1; Series 1000. Listed under Category F in BHMAs Certified Product Directory. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Finish hardware shall be installed by the General Contractor using personnel fully experienced and qualified to install finish hardware properly. Installation instructions given in this Section are for purposes of coordination. B. Templates and installations shall be furnished by Hardware Supplier and will be required for all hardware items. C. Hardware Supplier shall make an Architectural Hardware Consultant (A.H.C.) available to the General Contractor prior to and during the period of hardware installation to assist in solving all installation problems and to assure proper installation. D. Install surface mounted hardware items after finishes have been completed on the substrate. E. Install closers on wood and metal doors with sex bolts matching door finish as closely as possible. F. Install drip flashing in bed of sealant with the bottom of drip even with the bottom of doorframe head. G. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. Drill and countersink units, which are not factory, prepared for anchorage fasteners.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Doors and Windows - 8 Page 22 of 32

DIVISION 8

H. Adjust and check each item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation and function of every unit. Replace units, which cannot be made to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to occupancy, re-adjust and make final check of all hardware items in that space or area one week prior to acceptance or occupancy. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware. 3.2 HARDWARE LOCATIONS AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Butts: 5 inches from inside head of frame down to top of top butt; 10 inches from finished floor up to bottom of bottom butt; and other butts equally spaced between. B. Butt Backset: 5/16 inch on frame from stop to edge of butt mortise; 1/4 inch on door from back face of door to edge of butt mortise (full mortise only). C. Lever locksets and latchsets: 40 inches from finished floor to centerline of lever. D. Exit Devices: Installed in such a manner that the cross bar will be 36 inches from bottom of door to the centerline of bar. E. Door Pulls: Centerline of grip at 42 inches above finished floor. Center between door edge and glazed opening or centerline of pull at 5 inches from door edge if door is not glazed. F. Push Plates: Centerline 45 inches above finished floor. Center plate between door edge and glazed opening or 2 inches from edge of plate to edge of door if door is not glazed. G. Back-to-Back Push and Pull: Centerline 42 inches above finished floor. H. Armor Plates: 1/8 inch from bottom edge and centered on door; mount on push-side of door. I. J. Kickplates: 1/8 inch from bottom edge and centered on door; mount on push-side of door. Door Closers: Installed for maximum degree of 180 degrees whenever possible or to adjoining wall. Mount closers on push side of doors with parallel arm wherever possible. Degree of openings is to be indicated on Hardware Schedules submitted by Contractor. Adjust closers to properly close doors in compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) accessibility requirements and to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.

K. Wall Stops: Locate on adjacent wall in order to contact lever or pull. If conditions do not allow installation as such, install stop on door to bump column, wall, etc. All wall stop locations in hollow walls shall have 2 x 6 solid wood blocking installed behind wall finish material (i.e. gypsum wallboard or plaster). L. Floor Stops: Install on floor to permit maximum swing of door and to prevent lever from hitting wall, column, equipment, etc. Place within 3-inches from latch edge of door. M. Overhead Holders/Stops: Install accurately in accord with manufacturer's template. Degree of openings is to be indicated on final hardware schedules. N. Weather stripping and Thresholds: 1. Weather stripping shall be installed to make door installation weather tight without impairing operation of doors. All side and head pieces shall be properly coped to provide a snug fit at corners. Thresholds shall be anchored with stainless steel screws and with interior and exterior toe set in a continuous bead of sealant. Cope thresholds to fit jambs, seal exposed open ends. Where thresholds bridge moving building joints, fasten to one side of joint only and allow for unfastened side to slip.
Doors and Windows - 8 Page 23 of 32

2.

Rev. 01/01/2007

DIVISION 8

3.3 MANUFACTURERS THAT ARE APPROVED FOR USE IN DISTRICT FACILITIES A. Locks, Latch Sets: Series: Sargent (10 Line); Schlage (D series Rhodes) or approved equal (ASSA ABLOY (C-R); Owner standard). Schlage (L9000); Corbin (L9500); Sargent (8200) or approved equal (ASSA ABLOY (C-R); Owner standard). Provided and installed by owner (unless otherwise indicated). Hager, McKinney, Lawrence, Stanley or approved equal. Von Duprin (Series 99); Precision or approved equal. No exposed or concealed vertical rod devices to be used except as required by code. All exit devices shall be installed with pull type trim. No handles shall be used except where required by code. Baldwin, Builders Brassworks, Quality, Trimco or approved equal. Builders Brassworks, Ives, Russwin, Sargent, Stanley or approved equal. LCN 1461 (interior), LCN 4041 (exterior) or approved equal. Baldwin, Builders Brassworks, Corbin, Glynn-Johnson, Ives, Quality, Stanley or approved equal. National Guard, Pemko, Reese, Zero or approved equal. National D800 series cam locks. Keying per T.U.S.D. Locksmith. L. Removable Mullions: Sargent, Von Duprin or approved equal.

B. Mortise Lock, Latch Sets:

C. Cylinders: D. Butts: E. Exit Devices:

F. Push-Pull Units: G. Door Bolts: H. Overhead Closers: I. Bumpers:

J. Weather stripping & Thresholds: K. Cam Locks/Millwork:

SECTION 08800 - GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 08800) A. Glass is a major maintenance problem for the District due to breakage from vandalism. The Designer shall use lite sizes, which are easily stocked by the District, and shall avoid the use of Glass Block, Tempered Glass, Polycarbonate Glass, and unusual color or patterned glass. B. Mirror glass shall be framed in stainless steel and shall have a backing. Mirror size, 18 x 36. 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
Rev. 01/01/2007 Doors and Windows - 8 Page 24 of 32

DIVISION 8

1. 2. 3.

Windows. Doors. Interior borrowed lites.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames." Division 8 Section "Steel Windows."

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas. C. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects included edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated glass standard. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements: a. Specified Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.4.2, "Analytic Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. 1) c. Load Duration: 60 seconds or less.

b.

Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all four edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch, whichever is less. 1) 2) 3) For monolithic-glass lites heat-treated to resist wind loads. For insulating glass. For laminated-glass lites.

d.
Rev. 01/01/2007

Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than -inch (6 mm).
Doors and Windows - 8 Page 25 of 32

DIVISION 8

e.

Thickness of Tinted and Heat-Absorbing Glass: Provide the same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: 1. 2. 3. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites -inch (6 mm) thick. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units with lites -inch (6 mm) thick and a nominal 1/2inch- wide interspace. Center-of-Glass U-Values: NFRC 100 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program, expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F. Center-of-Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.

4.

5.

6.

1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Doors and Windows - 8 Page 26 of 32

DIVISION 8

1.8 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Written warranty, made out to Owner and signed by laminated-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for laminated glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3. B. Glass shall be float, insulated, laminated, or DSB where allowed. Where Code requires, glass may be wire type. 2.2 TINTED GLASS A. Tinted Glass: All exterior glass shall be tinted. Tinted glass in the types of glass indicated shall be PPG "Bronze Light Tint" or other approved by the Architect, and meeting or exceeding the following requirements for % inch thickness: 1. 2. 3. 4. Visible light Transmittance: 67% maximum. Visible Light Reflectance: 6% maximum. UV Transmittance: 16% maximum. Shading Co-efficient 0.60% maximum.

B. Tinted Glass Color: All tinted glass shall be the same color as selected by the Architect for the final color scheme of the building. 2.3 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3. 2.4 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS A. Fabrication Process: By vertical (tong-held) or horizontal (roller-hearth) process, at manufacturer's option, except provide horizontal process where indicated as tong less or free of tong marks. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing select); class, kind, and condition as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3. 2.5 LAMINATED GLASS A. Laminated Glass: Comply with ASTM C 1172 for kinds of laminated glass indicated and other requirements specified, including those in the Laminated-Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Doors and Windows - 8 Page 27 of 32

DIVISION 8

B. Interlayer: Interlayer material as indicated below, clear or in colors, and of thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation. 1. 2. 3. Interlayer Material: Polyvinyl butyral sheets. Interlayer Material: Cured resin. Interlayer Material: Polyvinyl butyral sheets or cured resin.

C. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets as follows: 1. Laminate lites with polyvinyl butyral interlayer in autoclave with heat plus pressure.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type 0 (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire-resistance rating.

2.7 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1.
Rev. 01/01/2007

Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.
Doors and Windows - 8 Page 28 of 32

DIVISION 8

2. 3. 4.

Presence and functioning of weep system. Minimum required face or edge clearances. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damage glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealantsubstrate testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

2.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. J. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Doors and Windows - 8 Page 29 of 32

DIVISION 8

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Where framing joints is vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Where framing joints is horizontal, cover these joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer.
Rev. 01/01/2007 Doors and Windows - 8 Page 30 of 32

DIVISION 8

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. 3.7 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Uncoated Clear Float Glass: Where glass as designated below is indicated, provide Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear) glass lites complying with the following: 1. Uncoated Clear Annealed Float Glass: Annealed or Kind HS (heat strengthened), Condition A (uncoated surfaces) where heat strengthening is required to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with performance requirements. Uncoated Clear Fully Tempered Float Glass: Kind FT (fully tempered).

2.

3.8 LAMINATED-GLASS SCHEDULE A. Laminated Safety Glass: Where glass of this designation is indicated, provide glass lites complying with the following: 1. Kind L T, consisting of two lites of fully tempered float glass. a. b. c. 2. Class 1 (clear). Kind FT (fully tempered). Thickness: -inch (6 mm).

Plastic Interlayer: 0.030 inch thick. a. Interlayer Color: Clear

3.9 GLAZING SEALANT AND TAPE SCHEDULE A. Interior Glazing: One part acrylic polymer sealant and glazing tape compatible with sealant: 1. Sealant Products: Available products include the following: a. b. c. 2. Mono; Tremco. Acrylic Polymeric Sealant; DAP. 60 Unicrylic; Pecora Corporation.

Glazing Tape Products: Available products include the following: a. 440 Tape; Tremco.

B. Exterior Glazing: One part polysolfide and glazing tape compatible with sealant. 1. Sealant Products: Available products include the following: a. b. Chem-Calk 100; Bostik Construction Products Division. Synthacalk GC-9; Pecora Corporation.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Doors and Windows - 8 Page 31 of 32

DIVISION 8

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Type and Grade: NS (nonsag). Class: 25. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, A. Glazing Tape Products: Available products include the following: a. b. c. d. Chem-Tape 40; Bostik Construction Products Division. Extr-Seal; Pecora Corporation. PTI 303; Protective Treatments Inc. 440 Tape; Tremco.

C. Laminated Glass Sealant: One part polysulfide or silicone 100% solids, containing no solvents fully compatible with laminated glass and approved in writing by the laminated glass manufacture; glazing tape to be fully compatible with sealant and laminated glass. END OF SECTION

Rev. 01/01/2007

Doors and Windows - 8 Page 32 of 32

DIVISION 9

TUCSON UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT MANUAL OF STANDARDS AND PROCEDURES

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 09200 09250 09260 09300 09511 09550 09650 09680 09900

TITLE LATH & PLASTER GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES TILE ACOUSTIC CEILING WOOD FLOORING RESILIENT FLOORING CARPETING PAINTING

Rev. 01/01/2007

Finishes - 9 Page 1 of 29

DIVISION 9

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES SECTION 09200 - LATH AND PLASTER PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 09200) Lath and plaster work shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the following: "Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco) Manual" published by the Portland Cement Association. "Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring" published by the Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association, a division of the NAAMM. "Plaster/Metal Framing Systems/Lath Manual" distributed by the Plastering Information Bureau of California. Lath and plaster installations shall be detailed on the drawings, to the extent not sufficiently established by industry standards, to avoid misunderstandings. Pay particular attention to substrates, intersections, joints, expansion and contraction conditions. Require a field constructed mockup for verification of texture, assembly, and details. The mockup shall be maintained at the job site until the end of the project. PART 2 PRODUCTS (SECTION 09200) 2.1 COORDINATE SPECIFICATION Coordinate specification for metal studs and suspension systems with details on the drawings. Expanded metal lath shall be self-furring, 3.4 lb, diamond mesh, galvanized steel sheet for exterior, painted for interior use. Plaster on masonry and on wood or steel frame shall be three coat work. Mix design shall be verified before plastering operations begin, and shall include alkaline resistant glass or polypropylene fiber reinforcement strands. Plaster accessories shall be metal. Small-nose corner beads shall be fabricated of zinc alloy and have expanded flanges of large mesh diamond lath for plaster embedment. Casing beads shall be square-edge type. Expansion joints shall be one piece type in "M" shaped configuration, with expanded metal flanges, except 2piece type may be used where required. Avoid integral color plaster due to inconsistencies of color mixing. Apply plaster in standard grey color and finish with paint to seal and provide desired color. PART 3 EXECUTION (SECTION 09200) 3.1 PROVIDE EXPANSION PROVISION Provide expansion provision in exterior and interior plaster installations. Locate expansion joints where recommended by standards, but not more than ten feet on center nor defining panels greater than 100 square feet. Re-entrant corners shall have expansion joints provided. Moist-cure portland cement plaster in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C926, including "Annex A2 Design Considerations"

Rev. 01/01/2007

Finishes - 9 Page 2 of 29

DIVISION 9

SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. Interior gypsum sheathing wallboard. Exterior gypsum sheathing wallboard. Weather-resistance barrier panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology Standard: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum sheathing board construction not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, or other causes; Stack sheathing flat on leveled supports off the ground, under cover, and fully protected from weather. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufactures: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufactures offerings products incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. b. c. d. American Gypsum Co. Georgia-Pacific Corp. National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division. United States Gypsum Co. that may be

2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Type: Type X (Fire Resistance Rating according to ASTM E 119). Type: Sag-resistance type for ceiling surfaces and soffits. Edges: Tapered Thickness: 5/8-inch.

B. Moisture- and Mold-Resistance Gypsum Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M and as follows:
Rev. 01/01/2007 Finishes - 9 Page 3 of 29

DIVISION 9

1. 2. 3. 4.

Type: Regular, unless otherwise indicated. Type: Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and where indicated. Edges: Tapered. Thickness: 5/8-inch.

C. Abuse-Resistance (high-impact) Sheathing Board: ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M and as follows: 1. 2. 3. Type: Type X, plastic film laminated to back side for greater resistance to through-penetration (impact resistance). Edges: Tapered. Thickness: 5/8-inch.

2.3 EXTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 931/C 931M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufactures standard edges and as follows: 1. 2. Type: Type X Thickness: 5/8-inch

B. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M and as follows: 1. 2. Type: Type X. Thickness: 5/8-inch

2.4 WEATHER-RESISTANCE BARRIER BOARD A. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt-saturated organic felt), unperforated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GYPSUM SHEATHING/ABUSE-RESISTANCE BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Cut boards at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch setback where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. Install boards with a 1/4-inch setback where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

C. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed exterior wall assembly. D. Apply fasteners so screw heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing. E. Do not bridge building expansion joints with sheathing; cut and space edges to match spacing of structural support elements. F. Horizontal Installation: Abut ends of boards over centers of stud flanges, and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing. Screw-attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud.
Rev. 01/01/2007 Finishes - 9 Page 4 of 29

DIVISION 9

1.

Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed.

2.

G. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over flanges of steel studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Screw-attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed.

2.

3.2 WEATHER-RESISTANT BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Cover sheathing with weather-resistant barrier as follows: 1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control-joint locations. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap, unless otherwise indicated.

2.

B. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch overlap and a 6-inch end lap; fasten to sheathing with corrosionresistant staples. 3.3 PROTECTION Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing: Protect sheathing that will be exposed to weather for more than 30 days by covering exposed exterior surface of sheathing with a securely fastened weather-resistant barrier. Apply covering immediately after sheathing is installed.

SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Nonload-bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Finishes - 9 Page 5 of 29

DIVISION 9

2. 3.

Gypsum board assemblies attached to steel framing. Cementitious backer units installed with gypsum board assemblies.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 4. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for available manufacturers of glass-fiber insulation to be used as sound-attenuation blankets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA-505 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of product specified C. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of gypsum board assembly components certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. D. Sample Panel: Submit samples of textured finish to demonstrate quality of workmanship. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. B. Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel products from a single manufacturer. C. Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. D. Samples: Sample panels as referenced in Submittals to demonstrate aesthetic effects of finishes as well as qualities of materials and execution. 1. Construct samples for each of the following applications: a. 2. Surfaces indicated to receive textured paint finishes.

Build Samples to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. a. b. c. Minimum size of 2 feet by 2 feet or as directed by Architect. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. Obtain Architect's approval of sample before start of final unit of Work.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Finishes - 9 Page 6 of 29

DIVISION 9

d.

Retain and maintain sample panel during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacture for supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F for 48 hours before application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F when using temporary heat sources. C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. b. c. d. e. 2. American Studco. CEMCO. Dietrich Industries, Inc. National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division. Western Metal Lath Co.

Grid Suspension Assemblies: a. b. c. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Chicago Metallic Corp. USG Interiors, Inc.

3.

Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. b. c. d. Georgia-Pacific Corp. James Hardie Building Products, Inc. National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division. United States Gypsum Co.
Finishes - 9 Page 7 of 29

Rev. 01/01/2007

DIVISION 9

2.2 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS A. General: Provide components complying with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. B. Wire Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, and 0.062-inch thick. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, and 0.162-inch diameter. D. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, manufacturer's standard direct -hung grid suspension system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock to form a modular supporting network.

2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. General: Provide steel framing members complying with the following requirements: 1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 40 hot-dip galvanized coating.

B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16-inch- wide minimum lip (return), and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth: 1. Stud Sizes and Gauges: As follows unless indicated otherwise on drawings, a. b. c. d. Wall heights to 10 feet: 3-5/8 inches wide, 20 gauge. Walls from 10 feet to 16 feet: 3-5/8 inches wide, 20 gauge. Walls heights over 16 feet: 6 inches wide, 20 gauge. Wall openings such as door and window frames: 20 gauge, both sides of jamb and over- head studs at 16 inches o.c.

C. Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16-inch wide minimum lip (return), and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth: 1. 2. 3. Thickness: 0.0329 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Depth: 3-5/8 inches, unless otherwise indicated. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 40 hot-dip galvanized coating.

D. Furring Brackets: Serrated-arm type, adjustable, fabricated from corrosion-resistant steel sheet complying with ASTM C 645, minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of 0.0329 inch, designed for screw attachment to steel studs and steel rigid furring channels used for furring. E. Deflection Track: Manufacturer's top runner complying with the requirements of ASTM C 645 and with 2-inch deep flanges. F. Steel Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing complying with ASTM A 653 or ASTM A 568, length and width as indicated, and with a minimum base metal (uncoated) thickness as follows: 1. Thickness: 0.027 inch where indicated.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Finishes - 9 Page 8 of 29

DIVISION 9

G. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated.

2.4 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available that will minimize end-to-end butt joints in each area indicated to receive gypsum board application. 1. Widths: Provide gypsum board in widths of 48 inches.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Type: Type X for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Type: Sag-resistant type for ceiling surfaces. Edges: Tapered. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

2.5 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS A. Provide cementitious backer units complying with ANSI A 118.9, of thickness and width indicated below, and in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. 1. 2. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 7/16 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Width: Manufacturer's standard width, but not less than 32 inches.

B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cementitious backer units that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. The Original Wonderboard; Custom Building Products. DomCrete Cementitious Tile-Backer Board; Georgia-Pacific. DUROCK Cement Board; United States Gypsum Co.

2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below: 1. Material: Formed metal or plastic, with metal complying with the following requirement: a. 2. Steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip process or rolled zinc.

Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047: a. b. Cornerbead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. LC-bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use LC-beads for edge trim, unless otherwise indicated.
Finishes - 9 Page 9 of 29

Rev. 01/01/2007

DIVISION 9

c.

L-bead with face flange only; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use L-bead where indicated. U-bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left without application of joint compound. Use U-bead where indicated. One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening.

d.

e.

B. Accessories for Exterior Installations: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints formed from steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip process or rolled zinc complying with ASTM C 1047, in shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047. 1. Edge trim complying with shape LC-bead per Fig. 1, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Aluminum Accessories: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum accessories of profile indicated complying with the following requirements: 1. Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of finish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability properties of aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B 221 for alloy and temper 6063-T5. Primed Finish: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering aluminum accessories that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. Fry Reglet Corp. Gordon, Inc. MM Systems, Inc. Pittcon Industries, Inc.

2.

3.

2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated. B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper-reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. C. Joint Tape for Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by cementitious backer unit manufacturer. D. Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged vinyl-based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. 1. Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product. a. All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds.

E. Joint Compound for Cementitious Backer Units: Material recommended by cementitious backer unit manufacturer. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

Rev. 01/01/2007

Finishes - 9 Page 10 of 29

DIVISION 9

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. B. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting-type joint compound recommended for spot-grouting hollow metal door frames. C. Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Special adhesive recommended for laminating gypsum panels to steel framing. D. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications: 1. Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.033-inch thick.

E. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. F. Steel drill screws of size and type recommended by unit manufacturer for fastening cementitious backer units. G. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. H. Foam Gaskets: Closed-cell vinyl foam adhesive-backed strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit metal stud size indicated. I. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced glass-fiber blanket insulation produced by combining glass fibers thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing), 3-1/2 inches thick fully concealed within walls and Type III laid on ceiling 6 inches thick with exposed upper surface foil faced with flame spread of 25 or less.

2.9 TEXTURE FINISH PRODUCTS A. Primer: Of type recommended by texture finish manufacturer. B. Non-aggregate Finish: Factory-packaged proprietary product formulated without aggregate for spray application to produce Orange Peel texture. C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, texture finishes that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. Pertect Spray EM; National Gypsum Co. G-P Wall Texture; Georgia-Pacific Corp. USG Spray Texture Finish; United States Gypsum Co.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal frames, cast-inanchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Finishes - 9 Page 11 of 29

DIVISION 9

3.2 PREPARATION A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structural assemblies to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to support ceilings. 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer or, if none available, with United States Gypsum Co.'s "Gypsum Construction Handbook." C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. Comply with details shown on Drawings. 1. 2. Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling. Where partition framing and wall furring abut structure, except at floor. a. Provide slip- or cushioned-type joints as detailed to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading. Install deflection track top runner to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading. Install deflection and fire stop track top runner at fire-resistance-rated assemblies where indicated. 1) Attach jamb studs at openings to tracks using manufacturer's standard stud clip. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members as indicated. 3.4 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards.

b. c.

2.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Finishes - 9 Page 12 of 29

DIVISION 9

3.

Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. Secure flat, angle, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure as well as for type of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

4.

5.

B. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support. C. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated, but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing installation standard. 1. 2. 3. Wire Hangers: 48 inches o.c. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c.

D. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so that cross-furring or grid suspension members are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet as measured both lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. E. Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated. F. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. G. For exterior soffits, install cross-bracing and additional framing to resist wind uplift according to details on Drawings. 3.5 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board stud assemblies abut other construction. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt-felt strips or foam gaskets between studs and wall.

B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surfaces do not vary more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1. 2. Cut studs 1/2 inch short of full height to provide perimeter relief. For STC-rated and fire-resistance-rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid structural surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed, to support gypsum board closures needed to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Finishes - 9 Page 13 of 29

DIVISION 9

D. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated. E. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated. F. Single-Layer Construction: Space studs 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. G. Cementitious Backer Unit Construction: Space studs 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. H. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each gypsum board panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. Frame door openings to comply with GA-219, and with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. Install 2 studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.

J.

K. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. L. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or, if none indicated, as required for door openings. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 3.6 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216. B. Install sound-attenuation blankets, where indicated, prior to installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. E. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings where possible. F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. H. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid-core wood doors, hollow metal doors, and doors over 32 inches wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and immediately insert gypsum panels into frames. I. Form control and expansion joints at locations indicated and as detailed, with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels, as well as supporting framing behind gypsum panels.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Finishes - 9 Page 14 of 29

DIVISION 9

J.

Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases that are braced internally. 1. Except where concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. Where partitions intersect open structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4 to 3/8-inch wide joints to install sealant.

2. 3.

K. Isolate perimeter of nonload-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors, as detailed. Provide 1/4 to 1/2-inch wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. L. Where STC-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of the partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturers recommendations for location of edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. M. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. N. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c. 3.7 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless parallel application is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies. Use maximum-length panels to minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board.

2.

B. Wall Tile Substrates: For substrates indicated to receive thin-set ceramic tile and similar rigid applied wall finishes, comply with the following: 1. Install cementitious backer units to comply with ANSI A 108.11 at locations indicated to receive wall tile.

C. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows: 1. Fasten with screws.

3.8 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners.
Rev. 01/01/2007 Finishes - 9 Page 15 of 29

DIVISION 9

B. Install cornerbead at external corners. C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound, except where other types are indicated. 1. Install LC-bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate. Install L-bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed. Install U-bead where indicated. Install aluminum trim and other accessories where indicated.

2. 3. 4.

D. Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's recommendations and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

3.9 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, flanges of cornerbead, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting-type joint compound. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints and to flanges of trim accessories as recommended by trim accessory manufacturer. D. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per GA 214. 1. 2. Level 2 where panels form substrates for tile and where indicated. Level 4 for gypsum board surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Use the following joint compound combination as applicable to the finish levels specified: 1. 2. 3. Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or taping compound. Fill (Second) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping compound. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping compound.

F. For Level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill (second), and finish (third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects and ready for decoration. G. Where Level 2 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound and apply first coat of joint compound. H. Finish cementitious backer units to comply with unit manufacturer's directions. 3.10 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES

Rev. 01/01/2007

Finishes - 9 Page 16 of 29

DIVISION 9

A. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish to gypsum panels and other surfaces indicated to receive texture finish according to texture finish manufacturer's directions. Using powered spray equipment, produce a uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. B. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray as recommended by texture finish manufacturer to prevent damage. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL E. Above-Ceiling Observation: Architect will conduct an above-ceiling observation prior to installation of gypsum board ceilings and report any deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have been corrected. 1. Notify Architect one week in advance of the date and the time when the Project, or part of the Project, will be ready for an above-ceiling observation. Prior to notifying Architect, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum board ceilings: a. b. c. d. e. f. Installation of 80 percent of lighting fixtures, powered for operation. Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping systems. Installation of air duct systems. Installation of air devices. Installation of mechanical system control air tubing. Installation of ceiling support framing.

2.

3.12 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure gypsum board assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

SECTION 09300 - TILE PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 09300) 1.1 TILE WORK Tile work shall be designed and specified in accordance with the current edition of the "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" of the Tile Council of American (TCA). Indicate extent and any patterns of tile work on the drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS (SECTION 09300) 2.1 MISCELLANEOUS Products shall comply with ANSI Standard A137.1, "American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile"; Tile shall be "Standard Grade". Unglazed ceramic mosaic tile shall be porcelain type, plain face with cushion edge, factory mounted, 1/4" thick nominal.
Rev. 01/01/2007 Finishes - 9 Page 17 of 29

DIVISION 9

Glazed wall tile shall be bright or matte face, 5/16" thick, flat plain face with cushion edge. Unglazed quarry tile shall be 3/8" to 1/2" thick, matte finish, flat face, cushion edge. Non-slip surface is required in wet areas such as kitchens and showers. Trim units shall match characteristics of field tile. Bases shall be straight type; edges shall be bullnose. Setting materials and sealants shall be appropriate for the installation method. PART 3 EXECUTION (SECTION 09300) 3.1 SETTING METHOD FOR EACH TYPE TILE AND LOCATION Specify setting method for each type tile and location by reference to TCA standards. Coordinate expansion joints with building details. Tile shall be placed with metal grid template. Do not use spacer buttons on tile edges. Tile joints shall be 1/8 inch in width, joint at floor and wall tile shall be caulked, not grouted. TUSD maintenance personnel will apply sealants and finishes to tile work after Substantial Completion. SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTIC CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 09511) 1.1 SELECTION AND SPECIFICATION The selection and specification of acoustic ceiling systems should be based on a careful analysis of functional, esthetic, and cost criteria. Fire resistance, sound absorption, noise reduction, durability, and appearance, considerations will combine to narrow selection choices to a range of a few acceptable alternatives, so that cost may serve as a final determinant to list two or three acceptable products for bid. Ideally the specification should be performance-based, but it is in the Owner's best interest in acoustical ceilings to inform bidders through semi-proprietary specifications which describe essential characteristics and name a selection of 3 or more products by different manufacturers which the Architect has determined meet his functional and esthetic requirements. Acoustic ceiling material specifications should list required type, form, pattern, noise reduction coefficient or articulation class, ceiling sound transmission class, light reduction coefficient, flame spread, fire resistance classification, and sanitation on projects with unique requirements, such as performing theaters or auditoriums, a special acoustic consultant should be considered to assist and advise the Architect in the design of the space as well as the acoustic materials of the spaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS (SECTION 09511) 2.1 REVIEW Review proposed acoustic ceiling systems and products with the Project Manager for acceptability prior to final specification. In general, square-edged lay-in panels in heavy duty white grids are preferred for suspended ceilings. V-groove, tongue and groove tiles are preferred for adhesive application. Pattern selected should not be excessively sculpted or textured. Lay-in grid to be 24"x48" Technical characteristics should comply with the following:

Rev. 01/01/2007

Finishes - 9 Page 18 of 29

DIVISION 9

Color/Light Reflectance Noise Reduction Coefficient Ceiling Sound Transmission Class

Min. - White /LR.75 Min. - NRC - 50 Min. - CSTC 25

PART 3 EXECUTION (SECTION 09511) 3.1 ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS Acoustical ceiling systems shall be installed to comply with the following per manufacturer's instructions, and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook." ASTM C 636 3.2 LAYOUT Balance ceiling borders on opposite sides, using more-than-half-width acoustical units. 3.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEM Secure to building structure, with hangers spaced 4'-0" along supported members and as required for seismic. 3.4 EDGE MOLDINGS Secure to substrate with screw anchors spaced 16 inches o.c. Miter corner joints. Cope exposed edges of interesting exposed suspension members to produce flush intersections. SECTION 09550 - WOOD FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 09550) Wood flooring shall be used only in gymnasium floors. Flooring shall be a system of an established manufacturer with at least 5 years and 50 similar installations in experience. Installer shall be certified by the manufacturer for the installation of the specified system, shall have at least 5 years successful experience in at least 25 similar installations. Wood flooring shall comply with the recommendations of the Maple Flooring Manufacturer's Association (MFMA). Submittals shall include a copy of the manufacturer's standard warranty, product data, installation and maintenance instructions, samples of floor, finish, and base, and shop drawings verifying details of installation and showing all game lines and logo, if any. Manufacturer and Installer shall provide a Certificate at time of Substantial Completion attesting that the finish installation meets all requirements of the specifications, the MFMA, and the manufacturer of the wood flooring and of the finishing materials. Average moisture content of the wood products at time of installation shall not exceed 8%. Wood shall be conditioned in the space for at least 7 days prior to installation. 1.1 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY Require two year warranty signed by manufacturer, installer, and contractor, agreeing to repair or replace wood flooring which buckles, shrinks, warps, cracks, or otherwise deteriorates excessively, or which breaks its anchorage or bond with substrate or otherwise fails to perform as required, all due to failures of materials and/or
Rev. 01/01/2007 Finishes - 9 Page 19 of 29

ASTM E 580

DIVISION 9

workmanship rather than to unusual exposure to moisture or other abusive forces or elements not anticipated for application. PART 2 PRODUCTS (SECTION 09550) Wood athletic flooring shall be equal of the following construction: 2.1 WOOD Kiln-dried, tongue and groove, end-matched, Northern Hard Maple, First Grade, 33/32 inch thickness by 2.25 inch width, of varied lengths. Each bundle shall bear the MFMA grade stamp and each strip shall be marked on the underside with the MFMA trademark. 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT Minimum 5/8" thick closed cell, flexible, polyethylene plastic foam sheet. 2.3 LAMINATED NAILERS Minimum 3/8" thick solid hard maple or hardwood plywood strips laminated with not less than 30 gauge steel on top and not less than 16 gauge steel on bottom, glue-laminated to the wood core, or encased with 22 gauge steel. Nailers of differing types may be considered but require prior approval. 2.4 2.4.1 ACCESSORY MATERIALS FOR WOOD FLOORING BASE Detail a 3" x 4" x 1/4" x LLV steel angle bolted to the wall, as a base. Provide for expansion of the angle. 2.4.2 ASPHALT SATURATED FELT NON ASBESTOS 15 lb. type, ASTM D 226. 2.4.3 VAPOR BARRIER An appropriate vapor barrier system shall be specified. 2.4.4 FASTENERS To fasten laminated nailers, approved power driven concrete nails, sized to provide minimum 1" penetration into concrete floor slab. To fasten wood floor strips to the laminated nailers, use power driven flat nails recommended by the manufacturer into the laminated nailer strip through the tongue of the wood flooring, using a properly adjusted drive gun to develop a positive connection. 2.4.5 FINISH MATERIALS Polyurethane sealers and finish, water-based, EPA-approved, and compatible cleaners. Paints for game lines and logos shall be of type compatible with the finish manufacturer, colors as required. Require two coats of seal, allow proper curing, apply first coat of sealant, game lines, and then three coats of additional finish. Architect and Project Manager shall check all delivered materials and used containers to calculate and verify coverage of finish material. PART 3 EXECUTION (SECTION 09550) 3.1 INSPECTION
Finishes - 9 Page 20 of 29

Rev. 01/01/2007

DIVISION 9

Installer must examine substrates on which wood flooring will be installed and conditions under which work will be performed and must notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion and maintenance of wood flooring. Do not proceed with work until satisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 PREPARATION Test for dryness before proceeding with installation. Test with 3% solution of phenolphthalein in grain alcohol. Sprinkle a few drops on concrete at several locations. If drops turn red, do not proceed with flooring work until substrate is dry and subsequent test verifies this. 3.3 INSTALLATION Comply with flooring manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, but not less than recommended by MFMA and as required by the manufacturer of the flooring system. 3.4 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Contractor shall provide the Owner with two copies of a bound Maintenance Manual, and shall instruct the Owner in proper maintenance procedures. The Manual shall contain, as a minimum, a copy of the manufacturer's floor specification, copies of manufacturer's literature on all paint and sealer products used, and preprinted or typed instructions detailing the care and maintenance requirements of the floor, including a recommended time schedule for resealing and/or other operations. SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 09650) Require 2 copies of manufacturer's maintenance instruction for each type resilient flooring and accessory. PART 2 PRODUCTS (SECTION 09650) 2.1 WALL BASE Wall base shall be rubber cove type, 4" high. 2.2 FLOORING Flooring products including adhesives shall be free of asbestos, and environmentally safe. Flame Spread Smoke Developed Smoke Density 2.3 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE (VCT) FS SS-T-312, 12"x12"x1/8", composition 1, asbestos free. For maintenance stock, provide tile flooring; not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, for each type, color, pattern and size installed. 2.4 RESILIENT VINYL Less than 75 (ASTM E 84) Less than 450 (ASTM E84) Less than 450 (ASTM E84)

Rev. 01/01/2007

Finishes - 9 Page 21 of 29

DIVISION 9

FS L-F475, Type II, Grade A, 125 psi minimum static load limit, 0.080" thick minimum, 6'-0" wide filled, without backing 2.5 LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING Material to be 0.080" minimum total thickness. Backing: Jute Surfaces: Wear surface homogenous. Minimum roll width to be 6'-0". Installation to meet or exceed, LLL-F-1238A specifications. 2.6 ADHESIVE Free of asbestos. PART 3 EXECUTION (SECTION 09650) Install resilient flooring and accessories in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, including bond and moisture tests of substrate. Provide 6" high integral flash cove base on sheet vinyl floors, with metal trim and corner shoes. 3.1 TILE FLOORING CLEANING AND FINISH REQUIREMENTS During the course of construction the new floors shall be protected to minimize the amount of cleaning required prior to finishing. New floors shall be broom swept and wet mopped by the contractor. The contractor shall not use any harsh chemical cleaning agents. TUSD maintenance personnel will do final cleaning and waxing. SECTION 09680 - CARPETING PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 09680) Indicate scope of carpet on the drawings. Submittals shall include seam diagram, product data, flame resistance data, samples for selection and verification purposes, and certified test reports. PART 2 PRODUCTS (SECTION 09680) 2.1 CARPET The carpet specification as presented below shall be used in all areas where carpet is called for. This carpet may also be used for installation over vinyl-asbestos floor tile when a pressure sensitive release adhesive is used for installation. Two manufacturers of these adhesives are W. F. Taylor and Envirotech. Carpet shall meet or exceed the following minimum specifications: Construction: Pile Surface Appearance: Tufted. Level.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Finishes - 9 Page 22 of 29

DIVISION 9

Pile Fiber:

Dye Method: Yarn Ply: Pile weight: Density: Gauge: Stitches Per Inch: Tuft Bind: Primary Backing: Secondary Backing:

Coloration: Anti-static Warranty: Width: Flammability: Smoke: Warranty:

Continuous filament solution dyed nylon fiber shall include a catonic polymer, anti-microbial and soil inhibitors and have lifetime anti-static properties built in. Solution dyed. Minimum 2ply. Minimum. 26 oz. sq./yd. Minimum 5500 Minimum 1/8. Minimum 8. Minimum 20 lbs. wet or dry (ASTMD 1335). Woven or non-woven polypropylene (Unitary) Polyurethane laminate or equal (Enhancer 111+) 20 lb tuft bind wet or dry Lifetime warranty against delamination Lifetime warranty against edge ravel. Multi colored loops. Lifetime of Carpet. 12 feet. Minimum Class 1, Radiant Panel. 450 or less. 10 years wear.

2.2 2.2.1

ACCESSORIES CARPET EDGE GUARD Provide metal edge guard in color selected by Architect.

2.2.2

RESILIENT BASE Provide molded rubber 4" high self-cove base, in color selected by Architect.

2.2.3

INSTALLATION ADHESIVE Water-resistant, non-staining as recommended by carpet manufacturer, which complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet.

PART 3 EXECUTION (SECTION 09680) Carpet installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, including seam gluing. Installer shall follow approved seaming diagram. 3.1 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Require manufacturer's printed instructions for maintenance of installed work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated traffic and use conditions, with precautions against materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and performance. 3.2 REPLACEMENT MATERIALS After completion of work, require not less than 2% of each type, color, and pattern of carpeting, exclusive of accessory components as required. In addition, a one sq. yd. section shall be submitted for testing purposes. 3.3 WARRANTY REVIEW
Finishes - 9 Page 23 of 29

Rev. 01/01/2007

DIVISION 9

Require installer to return to installation at three months after substantial completion. Review installation and repair seaming faults, if any, by replacing sections of carpet including entire rooms if judged necessary by the Architect, and make other necessary repairs. Except as they may be required due to Owner damage or misuse, repairs shall be at no expense to the Owner.

SECTION 09900 - PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 09900) Specify surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces. 1.1 NEW CONSTRUCTION Paint all new surfaces, except prefinished surfaces. 1.2 EXISTING CONSTRUCTION Paint exterior stucco, ferrous and galvanized metal, trim on existing Buildings. Paint interior plaster and drywall, metal doors and frames, etc., of existing buildings where affected by alterations and additions construction; extend painting of these items to entire surface of wall, ceiling, or object where deemed necessary by Architect to achieve color or finish uniformity. If authorized by Project Manager, entire interior and exterior of existing building may be painted. Painting includes field painting exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and switchgear, distribution cabinets and transformers exposed on the exterior of the building. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels, or on electrical, mechanical, or plumbing items concealed in equipment rooms, or on concrete steps and ramps including sidewalls. Prefinished items not to be painted include the following factory-finished components: Metal or plastic toilet enclosures, Acoustic materials, Finished mechanical and electrical equipment, Light fixtures, and similar items. Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include: Anodized aluminum, Stainless steel, Chromium plate, Finish Hardware. 1.3 1.3.1 SUBMITTALS PRODUCT DATA Manufacturer's technical information, label analysis, and application instructions for each material proposed for use. List of each material and cross-reference of the specific coating and finish system and application. 1.3.2 FIELD SAMPLES On actual surfaces, require finishes of prepared samples, with full-coat finish samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of surface until required sheen, color and texture are obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of inplace work. Final acceptance of colors will be from job-applied samples.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Finishes - 9 Page 24 of 29

DIVISION 9

1.4

It is the preference at TUSD, to paint all metal doors, frames, handrails and exposed metal surfaces subject to vandalism, with Alkyd or Epoxy type paint, which will facilitate ease of removal of graffiti. Coordinate with TUSD Paint Shop Manager.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (SECTION 09900) 2.1 MATERIAL QUALITY Require the manufacturer's first quality, top of the line material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 2.2 FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS Federal Specifications, in conjunction with example manufactured products, shall be used to establish a minimum quality level for paint materials. Require written certification from the manufacturer that materials provided meet or exceed these criteria. Products that comply with qualitative requirements of applicable Federal Specifications, yet differ in quantitative requirements, may be considered for use when acceptable to the Architect. Furnish material data and manufacturer's certificate of performance to Architect for proposed substitutions. PART 3 EXECUTION (SECTION 09900) Indicate building surfaces to receive each type paint finish, by note or schedule. Include a schedule of exterior and interior paint systems in the specifications, using product description and Federal Specification numbers, of the following type: 3.1 AVAILABLE MANUFACTURERS For the purpose of establishing a level of quality Dunn Edwards is used as a standard. Subject to compliance with requirements, other manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following: Southwest Sherwin-Williams Pioneer Paints Verify all paint requirements, including manufacturer, type and color with TUSD Paint Shop Manager. 3.2 3.2.1 PRIMERS INTERIOR PIGMENTED LATEX SEALER Flat sealer used as a primer over concrete and masonry under Latex flat and semigloss enamel, and epoxy coatings: TT-P-650 DE - Vinylastic W101V 3.2.2 INTERIOR FLAT EPOXY/POLYESTER SEALER Flat sealer used as a primer on plastic under flat, semigloss, and full gloss Latex finishes:. DE W715 Ultra-grip 3.2.3 LATEX BASED INTERIOR WHITE PRIMER
Finishes - 9 Page 25 of 29

Frazee ICI

Rev. 01/01/2007

DIVISION 9

Latex-based primer coating used on interior gypsum drywall under a flat latex paint or an Latex semigloss Enamel: TT-P-650 DE - Vinylastic W101V 3.2.4 INTERIOR ENAMEL UNDERCOAT Ready mixed latex enamel for use as an undercoat over wood and hardboard under semigloss enamel or full gloss enamel: DE - Unikote, W707V

3.2.5

INTERIOR LATEX BLOCK FILLER Acrylic based block filler for filling all voids on CMU: A-A-1500. DE - BlocFil Heavy Bodied Smooth Latex Block Filler W305 Block fillers must be applied to fill all voids.

3.2.6

SYNTHETIC, LATEX METAL PRIMER Quick-drying, rust-inhibiting primer for priming ferrous and non-ferrous metal on the exterior under flat latex paint , latex semigloss or latex gloss enamels: DE W715 Ultra-grip

3.2.7

GALVANIZED METAL PRIMER Primer used to prime exterior zinc-coated (galvanized) metal surfaces: DE W715 Ultra-grip

3.3

INTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL

3.3.1

INTERIOR SEMIGLOSS ODORLESS LATEX ENAMEL Low-odor, semigloss, latex enamel for use over a primer on concrete, masonry (including filled concrete masonry block), plaster, wood, and hardboard and both ferrous and zinc-coated (galvanized) metal surfaces and over a primer on gypsum drywall: TT-P-1511. DE - Decoglo W450V

3.3.2

INTERIOR SEMI-GLOSS EPOXY ENAMEL Semi-gloss epoxy/polyester enamel for use over a primer on concrete, masonry (including filled concrete masonry concrete block) plaster, wood, and hardboard and both ferrous and zinc-coated (galvanized) metal and over a primer on gypsum drywall: TT-C-535 Internatuional Paint (waterborne) Intergard 740 or Intergard 735 H20

3.4

MISCELLANEOUS WOOD FINISHING MATERIALS


Finishes - 9 Page 26 of 29

Rev. 01/01/2007

DIVISION 9

3.4.1

OIL-TYPE INTERIOR WOOD STAIN Slow penetrating oil type wood stain for general use on wood surfaces under varnishes or wax finishes: DE - Stainseal Penetrating Oil Stain V109

3.4.2

PASTE WOOD FILLER Solvent based, air drying, paste type wood filler for use on open grain wood on interior wood surfaces: Jasco Paste Wood Filler

3.4.3

INTERIOR LACQUER SANDING SEALER High solids lacquer sanding sealer for use either over a stained or natural wood surface as a sealer coat for lacquer: TT-S-190 Valspar V-NRF1009

3.4.4

INTERIOR EGGSHELL LACQUER High solids lacquer low sheen for use as a finish on sealed wood surfaces either stained or natural: TT-L-58 Valspar V-NRF1012

3.4.5

POLYURETHANE VARNISH

(For use in wet areas.)

Clear, polyurethane varnish for use on interior stained or natural-finished woodwork: McCloskey MC80-6722 3.5 3.5.1 EXTERIOR PAINT MATERIALS EXTERIOR GLOSS ENAMEL Exterior Gloss enamel for use over a primer and undercoat on exterior wood, hardboard, ferrous and zinc-coated metal surfaces: DE - Permagloss Acrylic Gloss W960 3.5.2 EXTERIOR ACRYLIC LATEX FLAT 100% Acrylic Latex flat for use on primed concrete, masonry (including filled concrete masonry block) and plaster: TT-P-19C DE - Evershield W701V 3.5.3 EXTERIOR WATER REPELLANT Acrylic micro emulsions and siloxane based water sealant and repellant containing not less than 10% solids for use as a sealer either clear or pigmented over concrete masonry units or other masonry: SS-W-1102. DE - OKON W2
Rev. 01/01/2007 Finishes - 9 Page 27 of 29

DIVISION 9

(All water repellants and water stains must be applied in such a manner as to meet manufacturer's five year written warranty requirements.) 3.6 3.6.1 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE PLASTER (STUCCO) New plaster shall be primed first with EFF-Stop W709 Acrylic latex flat two coats Two coats, TT-P-19C acrylic latex flat

3.6.2

CMU (CLEAR WATER SEALER) Clear acrylic water sealant and repellant, provide 5 year written warranty. Two flood coats, SS-W-110C Clear Water Repellant

3.6.3

FERROUS METAL TT-E-4898 enamel gloss, 2 coats over primer Syn-Lustro 10 Series One coat, TT-P-645A rust inhibitive primer Bloc-Rust 43-4 or Galv-Alum 43-7

3.6.4

ZINC-COATED METAL TT-E-4898 enamel gloss 2 coats over primer Syn-Lustro 10 Series One coat, TT-P-645A galvanized metal primer Galv-Alum 43-7

3.7 3.7.1

INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE GENERAL Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated.

3.7.2

CMU Acrylic latex eggshell 2 coats over primer and filler One coat - A-A-1500 Acrylic block filler Blocfil W305 Smooth One coat - TT-P-650 pigmented latex sealer Vinylastic W101 Two coats - TT-P-2119 Acrylic eggshell Permashell W940

3.7.3

GYPSUM DRYWALL (WET AREAS) Epoxy/polyester semi-gloss 2 coats over primer One coat - TT-P-650 pigmented latex wall sealer W101V Vinylastic Two coats - TT-C-535 epoxy/polyester semi-gloss S50 Sierra Performance Industrial Epoxy

3.7.4

GYPSUM DRYWALL Acrylic latex eggshell, 2 coats over primer One coat - TT-P-650, pigmented latex sealer W101V Vinylastic Two coats - TT-P-2119 acrylic eggshell W440V Decosheen

3.7.5

FERROUS METAL
Finishes - 9 Page 28 of 29

Rev. 01/01/2007

DIVISION 9

Two coats Oil Base Marine Enamel TT-E-506K 10 Series Syn-Lustro One coat, rust inhibitive primer TT-P-645A 43-7 Galv-Alum 3.7.6 ZINC-COATED METAL Two coats Acrylic Oil Based Marine Enamel TT-E-506K 10 Series Syn-Lustro One coat - galvanized metal primer TT-P-645A 43-7 Galv-Alum 3.7.7 MILLWORK (PAINTED) Two coats Oil Based Marine Enamel 10 Series Syn-Lustro One coat, W707 Latex enamel undercoat 3.7.8 MILLWORK (NATURAL FINISH) Lacquer finish eggshell, two coats over sealer One-coat - TT-S-190 lacquer sanding sealer Valspar V-NRC1009 Two coats - TT-L-58 eggshell lacquer Valspar V-NRF1012 3.7.9 MILLWORK (NATURAL FINISH) WET AREAS Three coats Polyurethane Semi-Gloss McCloskey MC80-6722 When surfaces or finishes are not mentioned in the above schedule, such as gloss enamel or catalytic epoxy finishes, Architect shall specify the appropriate products.

END OF SECTION

Rev. 01/01/2007

Finishes - 9 Page 29 of 29

DIVISION 10

TUCSON UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT MANUAL OF STANDARDS AND PROCEDURES

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 10160 10350 10425 10500 10520 10650 10801

TITLE TOILET PARTITIONS FLAGPOLES SIGNS LOCKERS FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES FOLDING PARTITIONS TOILET ACCESSORIES

Rev. 01/01/2007

Specialities 10 Page 1 of 14

DIVISION 10

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES SECTION 10160 - TOILET PARTITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 TOILET PARTITIONS Toilet Partitions shall be floor supported overhead braced type, 1" solid plastic or water resistant, solid phenolic core in high and middle schools. Elementary schools shall be same type 1" solid plastic or water resistant, solid phenolic core. 12. PRODUCT DATA Require manufacturer's detailed technical data for materials, fabrication, and installation, including catalog cuts of anchors, hardware, fastenings, and accessories. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS Require shop drawings for fabrication and erection of toilet partition assemblies not fully described by product drawings, templates, and instructions for installation of anchorage devices built into other work. PART 2 PRODUCTS - (No Commentary) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 OVERHEAD-BRACED PARTITIONS Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten installation with devices furnished. Secure anti-grip type overhead-brace to each pilaster with not less than two fasteners. Hang doors with an aluminum continuous hinge 54" and adjust so that tops of doors are parallel with overhead-brace when doors are in closed position. 3.2 SCREENS Attach with aluminum continuous 54" wall brackets to wall and with concealed anchoring devices to front posts which are anchored at floor and ceiling. Set units to provide support and to resist lateral impact. SECTION 10350 - FLAGPOLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 NEW SCHOOLS The flagpole shall be located in an appropriately and respectfully visible location. 1.2 EXISTING SCHOOL Existing flagpoles shall be inspected for needed structural and functional repairs. Review proposed repairs with the Project Manager.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Specialities 10 Page 2 of 14

DIVISION 10

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TAPERED ALUMINUM FLAG POLES New flagpoles shall be tapered aluminum poles. The pole shall be 35' to 40' high sized for a 5' x 8'' flag. Halyard shall be metal chain and shall accommodate two flags. Pole shall be provided complete with foundation sleeve assembly and grounding rod. Halyard shall run exterior of pole and be provided with an anti-vandal cleat cover. 2.2 BASE DETAIL Pole base shall be detailed in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. 2.3 NONFOULING TRUCK ASSEMBLY Truck assembly shall have an aluminum body, stainless steel ball bearings and cast nylon sleeves. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS Entire flagpole assembly shall be installed in a workmanlike manner and in complete compliance with manufacturer's requirements

SECTION 10425 - SIGNS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of signs: 1. 2. Cast metal plaques. One piece photo-etched metal signs with raised tactile lettering.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. 2. 3. 4. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities" for temporary project identification signs. Division 15 for labels, tags, and nameplates for mechanical equipment. Division 16 Section for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment. Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for illuminated exit signs.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Specialities 10 Page 3 of 14

DIVISION 10

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, layout, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details. 1. 2. Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale details of wording and lettering layout. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed as a unit of Work in other Sections. Templates: Furnish full-size spacing templates for individually mounted dimensional letters and numbers. Furnish full-size rubbings for metal plaques.

3. 4.

D. Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of color, pattern and surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated. 1. Samples for initial selection of color, pattern and texture for each type of sign.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the Work. B. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide lighting fixtures and electrical components for illuminated signs that are labeled and listed by UL and comply with applicable NEMA standards. C. Single-Source Responsibility: For each separate sign type required, obtain signs from one source of a single manufacturer. D. Design Concept: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of signs and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Sign units by other manufacturers may be considered provided deviations in dimensions and profiles do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

Rev. 01/01/2007

Specialities 10 Page 4 of 14

DIVISION 10

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Manufacturers of Cast Plaques and photo-etched signs. a. b. c. d. e. f. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Castings: Provide aluminum castings of alloy and temper recommended by the sign manufacturer for the casting process used and for the use and finish indicated. B. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are not corrosive to the sign material and mounting surface. C. Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-inplace anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. Best Manufacturing Company. Matthews International Corp. Metal Arts. Metallic Arts, Inc. The Southwell Company.

2.3 CAST METAL PLAQUES A. Plaques: Castings shall be free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. Comply with requirements specified for metal, border style, background texture, and finish and with requirements shown for thickness, size, shape, and copy. Hand-tool and buff borders and raised copy to produce the manufacturer's standard satin polished finish. Refer to the "Finishes" Article for other finish requirements. 1. 2. 3. 4. Metal: Aluminum. Border Style: As indicated. Background Texture: Manufacturer's standard stipple finish. Background Finish: Provide dark statuary finish to comply with the requirement specified for bronze finishes, except provide background texture specified above in lieu of mechanical finish indicated.

2.4 PHOTO-ETCHED SIGNS A. Provide ADA compliant signs with 1/32 inch raised tactile lettering and grade 2 Braille. Sign construction to be one piece solid zinc or aluminum alloy photo-etched to create raised copy in a natural metal finish and a textured, regressed colored background. International symbol of accessibility will be provided at all accessible individual or group toilet rooms. 2.5 FINISHES A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide color matches indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standards.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Specialities 10 Page 5 of 14

DIVISION 10

B. Metal Finishes: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and applications recommendations. C. Aluminum Finishes: Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 1. Class II Clear Anodized Fine Satin Finish: AA-M31 C21A31 (Mechanical Finish: Fine satin directional textured; Chemical Finish: Fine matte etched finish; Anodic Coating: Class II Architectural, clear film thicker than 0.4 mil).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install signs revel, plumb and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance.

B. Cast Metal Plaques: Mount plaques using the standard method recommended by the manufacturer for the type of wall surface indicated. 1. Concealed Mounting: Mount the plaques by inserting threaded studs into tapped lugs on the back of the plaque. Set in predrilled holes filled with quick-setting cement.

C. Photo-Etched Signs: Surface mounted at ADA compliant heights and locations, with finish quality mechanical fasteners, as recommended by the sign manufacturer. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner.

SECTION 10500 - LOCKERS Currently, TUSD does not have a standardized requirement for lockers; however, the need is for locker specifications to call for a highly durable unit with low maintenance qualities. The Architects shall submit locker specifications to TUSD Engineering & Planning Services for review.

SECTION 10520 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Specialities 10 Page 6 of 14

DIVISION 10

1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. 2. Portable fire extinguishers. Fire-protection cabinets for the following: a. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection specialties. 1. 2. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Portable fire extinguishers.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer. B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers." C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Portable Fire Extinguishers: a. b. c. d. e. f. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: Carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366/A 366M; commercial quality, stretcher leveled, temper rolled. 2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS J.L.lndustries, Inc. Kidde: Walter Kidde, The Fire Extinguisher Co. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. Potter-Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc. Samson Products, Inc. Watrous; Div. of American Specialties, lnc.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Specialities 10 Page 7 of 14

DIVISION 10

A. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each cabinet and other locations indicated. B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 4-A:60:B:C, 10-Ibs. nominal capacity, in enameled steel container. 2.4 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS A. Cabinet Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. 1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Listed and labeled to meet requirements of ASTM E 814 for fire resistance rating of wall where it is installed. a. Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0478-inch thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum S/8-inch- thick, fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

b. 2.

Cabinet Metal: Stainless-steel sheet.

B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for the following: 1. Fire extinguisher.

C. Cabinet Mounting: Suitable for the following mounting conditions: 1. Semi-recessed: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit style of trim indicated.

D. Cabinet Trim Style: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 1. Exposed Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). a. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth.

E. Cabinet Trim Material: Manufacturer's standard, as follows: 1. Stainless steel sheet.

F. Door Material: Manufacturer's standard, as follows: 1. Stainless steel sheet.

G. Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design, as follows: 1. Solid with pull handle

H. Door Construction: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, of materials indicated, and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Provide minimum 1/2-inch- thick door frames, fabricated with tubular stiles and rails, and hollow metal design.

I.

Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle with cam-action latch, or exposed or
Specialities 10 Page 8 of 14

Rev. 01/01/2007

DIVISION 10

concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous-type hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure extinguisher, of sizes required for types and capacities of extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 1. Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets.

B. Identification: Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to door. a. b. c. Application Process: Silk-screened. Lettering Color: Red. Orientation: Vertical.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semi-recessed cabinets are to be installed. B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing fire-protection specialties. B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fasten mounting brackets to structure square and plumb.

3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adjust cabinet doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Refinish or replace cabinets and doors damaged during installation. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that cabinets and doors are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Specialities 10 Page 9 of 14

DIVISION 10

SECTION 10650 - FOLDING PARTITIONS Folding partitions may be either fabric covered, accordion type or folding panel type. Type to be used will be based on overall height, width, weight, stacking space and STC requirements.

1.1

SUBMITTALS Require manufactures detailed technical data for materials, fabrication, mounting requirements, anchors, hardware, structural supporting system, fasteners and accessories.

1.2

SHOP DRAWINGS Require shop drawings for fabrication and erection of folding partitions including instruction for installation of anchorage devices built into other work.

SECTION 10801 - TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. 2. Toilet accessories. Custodial accessories.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 10 Section "Metal Toilet Compartments" for compartments and screens.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions, profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for each type of accessory specified. B. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Provide lists of replacement parts and service recommendations.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Rev. 01/01/2007

Specialities 10 Page 10 of 14

DIVISION 10

A. Source Limitations: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise approved by Architect. B. Product Options: specific products indicated in the Toilet Accessory Schedule establish accessory requirements, including those for materials, finishes, dimensions, capacities, and performance. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.6 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturer's Mirror Warranty: Written warranty, executed by mirror manufacture agreeing to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within minimum warranty period indicated. 1. Minimum Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Toilet Accessories: a. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. b. American Specialties, Inc. c. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. d. Bradley Corporation. e. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO). 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in the Toilet Accessory Schedule at the end of Part 3.

2.2 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No.4 finish, in 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366, cold rolled, commercial quality, O.0359-inch minimum nominal thickness; surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish. C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653M, G60. D. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service), nickel plus chromium electrodeposited on base metal.
Rev. 01/01/2007 Specialities 10 Page 11 of 14

DIVISION 10

E. Baked-Enamel Finish: Factory-applied, gloss-white, baked-acrylic-enamel coating. F. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. G. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: One, maximum 1-1/2-inch- diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of accessories. On interior surface not exposed to view or back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number. B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with continuous stainless-steel hinge. Provide concealed anchorage where possible. C. Mirror-Unit Hangers: Provide mirror unit mounting system that permits rigid, tamper and theft resistant installation, as follows: 1. Heavy-duty wall brackets of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove.

D. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper resistant manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units level, plumb, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 Ibs. when tested according to method in ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.3 TOILET AND CUSTODIAL ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
Rev. 01/01/2007 Specialities 10 Page 12 of 14

DIVISION 10

A. Paper Towel Dispenser/Disposer (TDWR): Recessed mounted. 1. Products: Provide one of the following: a. A&J Washroom Accessories, U600. b. American Specialties Inc., 0460. c. Bobrick, B-360P. d. Bradley, 225. e. McKinney-Parker, 860. B. Mirror Unit (M): Where this designation is indicated, followed by a width and height, provide mirror unit complying with the following and of the width and height indicated on the drawings: 1. Products: a. Model B-165 1836, Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 2. Stainless Steel, Angle-Framed Mirror: Fabricate frame from minimum nominal O.05-inch thick stainless steel angles, with square corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.

C. Grab Bars (GB): 1-1/2 inch diameter bar with concealed mounting and snap-on cover. 1. Products: Provide one of the following: a. A&J Washroom Accessories, UG3. b. American Specialties Inc., 3800 Series. c. Bobrick, 86806. d. Bradley, 812. e. McKinney-Parker, 9504. D. Toilet Paper Holders (PHS-1): Surface mounted, spring locking spindle, single, 1500 single ply sheet roll capacity. 1. Products: Provide one of the following: a. A&J Washroom Accessories, U811. b. American Specialties Inc., 0710. c. Bradley, 5054. d. McKinney-Parker, 1032. E. Mop and Broom Holder: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf. 1. 2. 3. 4. Length: 36 inches. Hooks: Three. Mop/Broom Holders: Four, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, NO.4 finish (satin). a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch thick stainless steel. b. Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch-diameter stainless steel. 5.
Rev. 01/01/2007

Products: Provide one of the following:


Specialities 10 Page 13 of 14

DIVISION 10

a. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. b. American Specialties Inc. c. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. d. Bradley Corporation. e. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO).

Rev. 01/01/2007

Specialities 10 Page 14 of 14

DIVISION 11

TUCSON UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT MANUAL OF STANDARDS AND PROCEDURES

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 11010 11020 11050 11060 11070 11120 11130 11150 11160 11400 11460 11480

TITLE MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT SECURITY AND VAULT EQUIPMENT LIBRARY EQUIPMENT THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT INSTRUMENTAL EQUIPMENT VENDING EQUIPMENT AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT UNIT KITCHENS ATHLETIC, RECREATIONAL, AND THERAPEUTIC EQUIPMENT OFFICE EQUIPMENT MEDICAL EQUIPMENT

11680 11700

Rev. 01/01/2007

EQUIPMENT-11 Page 1 of 1

DIVISION 12

TUCSON UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT MANUAL OF STANDARDS AND PROCEDURES

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 12050 12100 12300 12400 12500 12600 12700 12761

TITLE FABRICS ART MANUFACTURED CASEWORK FURNISHINGS AND ACCESSORIES FURNITURE MULTIPLE SEATING SYSTEMS FURNITURE TELESCOPIC BLEACHERS

TELESCOPIC BLEACHERS
Rev. 01/01/2007 Furnishings-12 Page 1 of 9

DIVISION 12

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Furnish and install Telescopic Bleachers as shown on Drawings and as specified herein.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System Operation: 1. The bleacher system shall be comprised of multiple tiered, closed deck seating rows operating on the telescopic principle, and stacking vertically in minimal floor area when not in use. 2. The first moving row shall be secured with both friction and mechanical locks. Other rows shall be mechanically locked, operable only upon unlocking and cycling of first row. 3. Each bleacher row shall be comprised of risers, seat and deck components and a complete set of supportive columns and braces. 4. The operative system shall incorporate a locking system permitting the discretionary securement of one, several or all rows in use or stacked position. Design Requirements: 1. Telescopic bleachers shall be designed to support and resist, in addition to their own weight, a force of: a. Seatboards and footboards shall each be designed to resist a live load of 120 lbs. Per linear foot. b. 100 lbs. Per square foot of live load. c. Side sway load of 24 lbs. Per linear foot of row. d. Front to rear sway load of 10 lbs. Per linear foot of row. 2. Railings, posts, and sockets designed to withstand following horizontal forces applied separately: a. Concentrated load of 200 lbs. Applied at any point and in any direction. b. Uniform load of 50 lbs. Per foot applied in any direction. Uniform load of 50 lbs. Per foot applied horizontally at top rail and a simultaneous uniform load of 100 lbs. Per foot applied vertically downward.

B.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. B. General: Submittals requirements are specified in Section 01300 Submittals. Product Data: Manufacturers installation instructions. Manufacturers descriptive literature. Furnish a list and clarification of deviations from these specifications. Listing shall be specific to each paragraph of the specifications. Approved deviations shall be incorporated in the project at no cost to the Owner separately: 1. 2. Concentrated load of 200 lbs. applied at any point and in any direction along top rail. Uniform load of 50 lbs. per foot applied horizontally at top rail and a simultaneous uniform load of 100 lbs. per foot applied vertically downward.

C.

Section Cross-Reference: Required submittals in accordance with "Conditions of the Contract" and Division 1 General Requirements sections of this "Project Manual."
Furnishings-12 Page 2 of 9

Rev. 01/01/2007

DIVISION 12

D.

Project Data: Manufacturer's product data for each system. Include the following: 1. 2. Project list: Ten (10) seating projects of similar size, complexity and in service for at least five (5) years. Deviations: List of deviations from these project specifications, if any.

E.

Shop Drawings: Indicate Telescoping Gym Seat assembly layout. Show seat heights, row spacing and rise, aisle widths and locations, assembly dimensions, anchorage to supporting structure, material types and finishes. 1. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Indicate electrical wiring and connections. Graphics Layout Drawings: Indicate pattern of contrasting or matching seat colors

F.

Samples: Seat materials and color finish as selected by Architect from manufacturers offered color finishes. Manufacturer Qualifications: Certification of insurance coverage and manufacturing experience of manufacturer, and copy of a telescopic load test observed by a qualified independent testing laboratory, and certified by a registered professional structural engineer verifying the integrity of the manufacturer's geometry design and base structural assumptions. Installer Qualifications: Installer qualifications indicating capability, experience, and manufacturer acceptance. Engineer Qualifications: Certification by a professional engineer registered in the state of manufacturer that the equipment to be supplied meets or exceeds the design criteria of this specification. Operating/Maintenance Manuals: Provide to Owner (2) maintenance manuals. Demonstrate operating procedures, recommended maintenance and inspection program. Warranty: Manufacturers standard five year warranty documents.

G.

H.

I.

J.

K.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Seating Layout: Comply with current NFPA 102 Standard for Assembly seating, Tents, and Membrane Structures, and specifically with Folding and Telescopic Seating, except where additional requirements are indicated or imposed by authorities having jurisdiction. Welding Standards & Qualification: Comply with AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel and AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. Insurance Qualifications: Mandatory that each bidder submit with his bid an insurance certificate from the manufacturer evidencing the following insurance coverage: 1. Workers Compensation - including Employers Liability with the following limits: $500,000.00 Each Accident $500,000.00 Disease - Policy Limit $500,000.00 Disease - Each Employee Commercial General Liability - including premises/ operations, independent contractors and products completed operations liability. Limits of liability shall not be less than $5,000,000.00

B.

C.

2.

D.
Rev. 01/01/2007

Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer who has a minimum of twenty years of experience manufacturing telescoping gym seats.
Furnishings-12 Page 3 of 9

DIVISION 12

E.

Installer Qualifications: Engage experienced Installer who has specialized in installation of telescoping gym seat types similar to types required for this project and who is acceptable to, or certified by, telescoping gym seat manufacturer. Engineer Qualifications: Engage licensed professional engineer experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated that have resulted in the successful installation of telescoping bleachers similar in material, design, fabrication, and extent to those types indicated for this project.

F.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver telescopic gym seats in manufacturers packaging clearly labeled with manufacturer name and content. Handle seating equipment in a manner to prevent damage. Deliver the seating at a scheduled time for installation that will not interfere with other trades operating in the building.

B. C.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Coordinate actual dimensions of construction affecting telescoping bleachers installation by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.

1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard five year warranty form for telescoping bleachers. This warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents. 1. 2. 3. Warranty Period: Five years from Date of Acceptance. Beneficiary: Issue warranty in legal name of project Owner. Warranty Acceptance: Owner is sole authority who will determine acceptance of warranty documents.

1.8 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION A. Instructions: Both operation and maintenance shall be transmitted to the Owner by the manufacturer of the seating or his representative. Service: Maintenance and operation of the seating system shall be the responsibility of the Owner or his duly authorized representative, and shall include the following: 1. 2. 3. Operation of the Seating System shall be supervised by responsible personnel who will assure that the operation is in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Only attachments specifically approved by the manufacturer for the specific installation shall be attached to the seating. An annual inspection and required maintenance of each seating system shall be performed to assure safe conditions. At least biannually the inspection shall be performed by a professional engineer or factory qualified service personnel.

B.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Furnishings-12 Page 4 of 9

DIVISION 12

PART 2

PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturer and System Description A. Telescopic bleachers as manufactured by Hussey Seating Company of North Berwick, Maine. Other acceptable manufacturers will be considered for prior approval if in compliance with these specifications. Request for prior approval must be accompanied by complete shop drawings identifying deviations from specified bleacher. Prior approval will not be granted to any manufacturer whose product deviates from the major specified features, which include net and gross seat count, row spacing, frame and drive wheel sizes, powered frame, transverse decking, and flexible front row. Those bidders not submitting a list of deviations will be presumed to have bid as specified Model: Maxam Series Telescopic Gym Seats complete with flexible front row that allows for full use of seating by able bodied people when the ADA wheel chair spaces are not in use. When bleachers are in stored position, entire first row shall be available for auxiliary seating. ADA locations shall not require rails that obscure viewing at the second row. Type: Wall attached as shown on the drawings Quantity: 1. Banks Number of banks as shown on the drawings. a. Banks to be 62 3 long and 4 tiers high or as shown on the drawings.

B.

C. D.

E.

Dimensions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Rise 9 5/8. Row spacing a. 22 as shown on the drawings Overall Height: a. 3- 9 15/16 Or as shown on the drawings Closed Dimension: a. 3- 3 13/16r as shown on the drawings Open Dimension: a.7 10 13/16 Or as shown on the drawings Gross Seating Capacity: a. 160 total for each bank or as shown on the drawings. Net Seating Capacity for Main Gym: a. 266 total for all banks, when flexible first row is fully extended; 12 ADA wheelchair spaces shall be available when flexible front row units are pushed in or provide quantities as shown on the drawings.

2.2 MATERIALS A. B. C. D.
Rev. 01/01/2007

Lumber: ANSI/Voluntary Product 20, B & B Southern Pine Plywood: ANSI/Voluntary Product PS1, APA A-C Exterior Grade. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36. Uncoated Steel Strip (Non-Structural Components): ASTM A569, Commercial Quality, Hot-Rolled Strip.
Furnishings-12 Page 5 of 9

DIVISION 12

E.

Uncoated Steel Strip (Structural Components): ASTM A570 Grade 33, 40, 45, or 50, Structural Quality, Hot-Rolled Strip. Uncoated Steel Strip (Structural Components): ASTM A607 Grade 45 or 50, High-Strength, Low Alloy, Hot-Rolled Strip. Galvanized Steel Strip: ASTM A653 Grade 40, zinc coated by the hot-dip process, structural quality. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500 Grade B, cold-formed. Polyethylene Plastic: ASTM D 1248, Type III, Class B; molded, color-pigmented, textured, impactresistant, structural formulation; in color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Fasteners: Vibration-proof, of size and material standard with manufacturer.

F.

G. H. I.

J.

2.3 UNDERSTRUCTURE FABRICATION A. Frame System: 1. Wheels: Not less than 5" diameter by 1 1/4" with non-marring soft rubber face to protect wood and synthetic floor surfaces, with molded-in sintered iron oil impregnated bushings to fit 3/8" diameter axles secured with E-type snap rings. Lower Track: Continuous Positive Interglide System interlocks each adjacent CPI unit using an integral, continuous, anti-drift feature and through-bolted guide at front to prevent separation and misalignment. Each CPI unit shall contain a Low Profile Posi-Lock LX to lock each row in open position and allow unlocking automatically. Provide adjustable stops to allow field adjustment of row spacing. Slant Columns: High tensile steel, tubular shape. Sway Bracing: High tensile steel members through-bolted to columns. Deck Stabilizer: High tensile steel member through-bolted to nose and riser at three locations per section. Interlocks with adjacent stabilizer on upper tier using low-friction nylon roller to prevent separation and misalignment. Incorporates multiple stops to allow field adjustment of row spacings. Deck Support: Securely captures front and rear edge of decking at rear edge of nose beam and lower edge of riser beam for entire length of section.

2.

4. 5. 6.

7.

B.

Deck System: 1. 2. Section Lengths: Each bank shall contain sections not to exceed 25-6 in length with a minimum of two supporting frames per row, each section. Nose beam and Rear Riser beam: Nose beam shall be continuously roll-formed closed tubular shape of ASTM A653 grade 40. Riser beam shall be continuously roll-formed of ASTM A653 grade 40. Nose and Riser beam shall be designed with no steel edges exposed to spectator after product assembly. Attachment: Through-Bolted fore/aft to deck guides, and frame cantilevers. Decking: 5/8" [16], AC grade clear-top-coated tongue and groove Southern Yellow Pine; or BC grade polyethylene-top-coated tongue and groove Douglas Fir plywood; both of interior type with exterior glue, 5-ply, all plies with plugged crossbands, produced in accordance with National Bureau of Standards PS-1-97. Plywood shall be cut and installed with top, center and bottom ply grain-oriented from front of deck to rear of deck (nose beam to riser beam). Adjacent pieces shall be locked together with tongue and groove joint from front to rear of deck. Longest unsupported span: MAXAM 26, 21 [546]; Deck End Overhang: Not to exceed frame support by more than 5'-7".
Furnishings-12 Page 6 of 9

3. 4.

5.
Rev. 01/01/2007

DIVISION 12

2.4 SEATING FABRICATION A. Seat System: 1. Seat Modules: 18" long assembled, injection-molded, high density polyethylene modules in mono or two-tone colors providing scuff resistant textured 10" wide seat surface with minimum interlock on seat and face. Unit structural tested to 360 lbs occupant load. Designed with anatomically contoured seat surface using multiple internal reinforcement ribs that allow form-fit deflection. Cantilevered to the rear to provide not less than 3" smooth toe space beneath the seat. Seat Support: Each plastic seat module shall be supported by internal steel structural members secured against fore/aft movement by 3/8 grade 5 steel fasteners creating a steel-to-steel connection, tying the seat structure firmly to the steel nose beam. Integrally molded end caps at aisle end locations with indents for logos. Integrally molded recess pockets to accept seat number and row letters.

2.

3.

4. 5.

2.5 SHOP FINISHES A. Understructure: For rust resistance, steel understructure shall be finished on all surfaces with black "Dura-Coat enamel. Understructure finish shall contain a silicone additive to improve scratch resistance of finish. Wear Surfaces: Surface subject to normal wear by spectators shall have a finish that does not wear to show different color underneath: 1. Steel nosing and rear risers shall be pre-galvanized with a minimum spangle of G-60 zinc plating. Decking shall have use-surfaces to receive both a sealer coat and wear-resistant high gloss clear urethane finish. Optional decking to have 0.030 laminated polyethylene wear surface.

C.

2.

2.6 FASTENINGS A. B. Welds: Performed by welders certified by AWS standards for the process employed. Structural Connections: Secured by structural bolts with prevailing torque lock nuts or Free-spinning nuts in combination with lock washers.

2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Operating Handles for manual bleachers: Provide and install manual operating handles constructed of [19] OD steel tubing. Handles to engage pull-bar installed at the first tier. Flex-Row: Provide first row modular recoverable seating units to be utilized by persons in wheelchairs and able-bodied persons. Each Flex-Row unit shall have an unlock handle for easy deployment if wheelchair or team seating access is needed. Unlock handle shall lock the bleacher seats into position when fully opened. 1. 2. 3.
Rev. 01/01/2007

B.

Provide a black full-surround steel skirting with no more than floor clearance for safety and improved aesthetics. Provide a black injection molded end cap for the nose beam for safety and improved aesthetics. Provide a mechanical positive lock when the Flex-Row system is in the open and used position.
Furnishings-12 Page 7 of 9

DIVISION 12

4.

Flex-Row modular units are designed to achieve multi-use front row seating to accommodate team seating, ADA requirements and facility specific requirements. Flex-Row units are available in modular units from 2 to 7 seats wide as well as full section widths.

C.

Front Aisle Steps: Provide at each vertical aisle location front aisle step. Front steps shall engage with front row to prevent accidental separation or movement. Steps shall be fitted with four non-skid rubber feet each 1/2" [13] in diameter. Blow molded end caps shall have full radius on all four edges. Quantity and location as indicated. Non-Slip Tread: Provide at front edge of each aisle location an adhesive-backed abrasive non-slip tread surface. Foot Level Aisles: Provide deck level full width vertical aisles located as indicated. Intermediate Aisle Steps: Intermediate aisle steps shall be of boxed fully enclosed type construction. Blow molded end caps shall have full radius on all four edges. Step shall have adhesive-backed abrasive non-slip tread surface. Quantity and location as indicated. Intermediate Aisle Handrails: Provide single pedestal mount handrails 34 [864] high with terminating mid rail. Handrails shall be attached to the socket and shall pivot and rotate 90 for easy storage in socket. Self Storing End Rails: Provide steel self-storing 42" [1066] high above seat, end rail with tubular supports and intermediate members designed with 4" [102] sphere passage requirements. Scorer's Table: Provide one 8' [2438] x 15" [4572] scorer's table. Tabletop shall be tan high pressure laminate on 5/8" [16] balance veneer core with edge molding. Integral perimeter frame to include tubular folding steel legs permanently attached to top with screws. Courtside Custom Logo: Provide logo produced as approx. 4.7"(h) x 3.5"(w) full-color, CMYK vector art output on Fujiflex crystal archive printing material. Logo shall be laminated with a 5-mil Hard Guard Matte laminate, and bonded to a Flex-Con Flex-Mount L-606 laminating adhesive layer. The logo shall be trimmed to a precise custom cut shape and two mounting holes drilled using a CnC router.

D.

E. F.

G.

H.

I.

J.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify area to receive telescoping gym seats are free of impediments interfering with installation and condition of installation substrates are acceptable to receive telescoping gym seats in accordance with telescoping gym seats manufacturer's recommendations. Do not commence installation until conditions are satisfactory.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Comply with telescoping gym seats manufacturer's recommendations for product installation requirements. General: Install telescoping gym seats in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and final shop drawings. Provide accessories, anchors, fasteners, inserts and other items for installation of telescoping gym seats and for permanent attachment to adjoining construction.

B.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Furnishings-12 Page 8 of 9

DIVISION 12

3.3 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING AND DEMONSTRATION A. Adjustment: After installation completion, test and adjust each telescoping gym seats assembly to operate in compliance with manufacturer's operations manual. Cleaning: Clean installed telescoping gym seats on both exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch-up finishes to restore damage or soiled surfaces. Manufacturers representative shall demonstrate bleacher operation to Architect and Owner

B.

C.

3.4 PROTECTION A. General: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer to ensure telescoping gym seats are without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.

END OF SECTION

Rev. 01/01/2007

Furnishings-12 Page 9 of 9

DIVISION 13

TUCSON UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT MANUAL OF STANDARDS AND PROCEDURES

DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 13080

TITLE SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL PRE-ENGINEERED STRUCTURES SWIMMING POOLS STORAGE TANKS SOLAR AND WIND ENERGY EQUIPMENT SECURITY ACCESS AND SURVEILLANCE DETECTION AND ALARM FIRE SUPPRESSION

13120 13150 13200 13600 13700 13850 13900

Rev. 01/01/2007

SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION-13 Page 1 of 1

DIVISION 14

TUCSON UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT MANUAL OF STANDARDS AND PROCEDURES

DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 14200 14400 14500 14800

TITLE ELEVATORS LIFTS MATERIAL HANDLING SCAFFOLDING

Rev. 01/01/2007

CONVEYING SYSTEMS-14 Page 1 of 1

DIVISION 15

TUCSON UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT MANUAL OF STANDARDS AND PROCEDURES

DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 15050 15051 15060 15100 15141 15170 15190 15200 15250 15341 15350 15380 15400 15401 15405 15421 15423 15424 15451 15455 15460 15500 15501 15600 15622 15671 15710 15761 15770 TITLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL COMMON ITEMS PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS VALVES CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES PIPE AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION NOISE AND VIBRATION INSULATION ACID WASTE DRAINAGE SYSTEM NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM BACKFLOW PREVENTION PLUMBING DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM SOIL AND WASTE PIPING SYSTEM DRAINS CLEANOUTS DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM DRINKING FOUNTAINS GREASE TRAPS FIRE PROTECTION WET AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM HEATING, COOLING, AND VENTILATION BOILER CHILLER HEATING AND COOLING WATER SPECIALTIES FAN COIL UNITS PACKAGE HEATING AND COOLING UNITS

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 1 of 33

DIVISION 15

TUCSON UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT MANUAL OF STANDARDS AND PROCEDURES

DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 15774 15805 15809 15821 15841 15864 15870 15879 15880 15900 15990 TITLE AIR HANDLING UNITS EVAPORATIVE COOLERS MAKE-UP AIR UNITS CENTRIFUGAL FANS LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK FIRE DAMPERS GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS LOUVERS FILTERS ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) BALANCING AND TESTING

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 2 of 33

DIVISION 15

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15050 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS These specifications include items and conditions deemed to be of importance to the efficient operation of the TUSD facilities. Where a particular system or condition is not covered the designers shall use their best judgment. All work shall comply with the following quality control standards as a bare minimum. TUSD expects buildings to be designed above these minimum standards where it will be beneficial in length of service, maintenance frequency, maintenance costs, functional service and conserve on utility costs. All work shall comply with uniform plumbing codes, Uniform Building Codes, Uniform Mechanical Codes and the Arizona Title 34". Bid price shall include factory training for one TUSD Facilities Management staff for all major equipment supplied (i.e., chillers, power boilers, etc.), when applicable. Cost shall include travel and accommodations. Contractor is to provide a complete set of as-built record drawings, with pipes below grade or floor located horizontally and vertically. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be required. SECTION 15051 - MECHANICAL COMMON ITEMS All equipment controllable shall be BacNet capable such that hook up is limited to making appropriate wiring termination. Submittals shall include a Protocol-implementation-conformance statement (PICS) list with BACnetinteroperability-building-block (BIBB) and Local-area-network (LAN) features it supports. 1.1 MOTORS Motors shall be high efficiency type, have all copper windings, and be products manufactured by Reliance, General Electric, Baldor, Century, Marathon, or approved equal. Motors shall be three phase whenever possible. Fractional horsepower motors shall be permanent split capacitance, shaded pole motors are disallowed. Cooler motors should be Arvin Gold Series or equal. Motor speeds shall be limited to 1800 RPM. Two speed separate winding motors shall be utilized whenever practical in lieu of variable speed drives. If required for large air handler applications variable frequency drives shall be limited to Toshiba/Houston or General Electric or approved equal with 4 to 20 MA control. All motors shall have a 1.15 service factor. All three-phase equipment shall include phase protection. Larger motors shall have the following efficiencies per NEMA standard MG1: HORSE POWER 1.0 1.5 2.0 & 3.0 5.0 & 7.5 10.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 NOMINAL EFF. 81.5 81.5 84.0 84.0 86.5 8.5 86.5 88.5 88.5 90.2 MIN. EFF. 78.5 78.5 81.5 81.5 84.0 86.5 84.0 86.5 86.5 88.5 RPM 1800 & 1200 1800 1200 1800 & 1200 1800 & 1200 1800 1200 1800 & 1200 1800 1200

25 HP and over shall be the highest available efficiency.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 3 of 33

DIVISION 15

1.2

STARTERS The documents shall be explicitly clear as to the trade that shall be responsible for providing the starters.

1.3

PULLEYS, BELTS Belts shall be rated for 150% of motor horsepower, and furnished in matched sets. Pulleys shall be cast iron, adjustable on motors on 15 horsepower and below.

1.4

ACCESS DOORS Access Doors shall be provided to all concealed equipment including valves. Verify proper fire rating if any.

1.5

PAINT Paint inside ducts and other surfaces visible through grilles and diffusers. Paint pipes with stenciled letter codes, on pipes or insulation to indicate type and direction of flow. (See Section 15190)

1.6

OPERATING SYSTEMS Contractor shall start and operate all systems, and instruct TUSD maintenance personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment.

1.7

OPERATING SCHEDULE All TUSD facilities operate from 06:00 am to 18:00 (6:00 pm), Monday through Friday. Occupied setpoint to be 720 F, with a two-degree deadband. Unoccupied set points 550 F heating, and 850 F cooling. Contractor to program all thermostats to this schedule. All programmable thermostats shall include clear plastic locking covers, all keys to be turned over to the Project Manager before close-out of the project.

1.8

WARRANTEE All installed equipment shall have a Manaufacturers / Contractor - two year minimum warrantee from date of acceptatnce by the owner.

SECTION 15060 - PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 1.1 SEWER SYSTEM Sewer System inside the building and to 5'-0" outside shall be copper or no-hub cast iron in sizes' 1.5" diameter and smaller, and shall be no-hub cast iron with stainless steel bands in 2" diameter and larger. 1.2 DOMESTIC WATER All domestic water piping from the meter to within thirty-six inches (36") of the building slab may be schedule 40 PVC or Type L hard drawn copper. All piping subsequent to that location shall be Type L hard drawn copper with no-lead (95-5), silver soldered joints, or "Silverbrite 100" lead free solder. Lead solder shall not be used. When lead solder is discovered in older buildings the engineer shall review and recommend course of action. 1.3 HEATING AND COOLING WATER SYSTEM PIPING Heating and cooling water system piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel welded where existing. Specify dielectric couplings or flanges between all ferrous components and copper or brass.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 4 of 33

DIVISION 15

Above 2 1/2" use black steel, below 2 1/2" copper tubing. . (Specifications should include language concerning thorough cleaning. An example would be flushing with Tri-Sodium Phosphate, and/or running pigs in 4 inch and larger.)

1.4

FIRE PROTECTION Fire protection piping shall be specified in accordance with Section 79.700 of the Uniform Fire Code. Division VII Piping Valves and Fittings. 2 1/2" and larger pipe is to be Schedule 10 with welded outlets and roll grooved ends. 1" to 2" pipe to be either XL pipe, threaded or Schedule 10 pipe with welded outlets and roll grooved ends. 1" drops and other miscellaneous pieces of 1" pipe are to be Schedule 40 threaded.

1.5

GAS PIPE Gas pipe shall be Schedule 40 black steel. Provide independent gas shut-off on each gas-fired appliance. No District owned gas lines shall be installed underground. At science classrooms with science stations, all stations shall be provided with gas connection with an emergency shut-off valve located convenient to the teacher's stations

1.6

NIPPLES Nipples used for plumbing fixtures to waste or sewer piping shall be pipe sized brass or DWV Copper. Plumbing fixtures - use brass instead of galvanized pipe.

1.7

ALL PIPE All new construction pipe shall be installed concealed, if possible. Obtain permission from TUSD for deviations from this practice. Do not install in masonry walls, but in furring outside the masonry. Clean inside and outside pipe.

1.8

UNIONS Unions shall be provided so all equipment, strainers, valves and relief valves may be removed. All unions are to be accessible and shall have removable/replaceable insulation.

1.9

STRAINERS Valved blow down piped to floor drain.

SECTION 15100 - VALVES Valves shall be screwed or flanged. No triple duty valves may be used. Individual Positive shut off, only (balancing and check valves must be used). All valves smaller than 3" shall be full port ball valves. SECTION 15141 - CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 1.1 PUMPS-IN-LINE Pumps-in-line shall be used only for plumbing system, all bronze, and controlled from aquastat. 1.2 BASE-MOUNTED PUMPS Base-mounted pumps shall be used for heating and cooling system, base mounted on concrete base with a mechanical seal, and be manufactured by Bell & Gossett, ITT, Allis Chalmers, Peerless, Aurora, PACO, or approved equal. Horizontal split case pumps shall be used.
Rev. 01/01/2007 Mechanical - 15 Page 5 of 33

DIVISION 15

SECTION 15170 - THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES 1.1 THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES Thermometers and gauges shall be readable from floor level, have separable socket for thermometers and stop cocks for gauges. Provide impulse dampers where necessary for gauges. Provide Trerice B8560 series, bi-metal thermometer, 5" diameter dial, back connection, adjustable angle, 1% accuracy or equal. Provide with hermetically sealed 304 stainless steel case and stem assembly, tempered crystal glass face, friction pointer, zero adjustment and 304 stainless steel connection nut. Install in separable socket. Install each thermometer in a 304 stainless steel separable socket of proper depth for the service intended. Provide extension necks for insulated piping. Operating ranges shall be selected to assure nominal temperature readings at the midpoint thereof. Provide Trerice 450 LFSS series liquid filled pressure, compound or vacuum gauge, bottom connection, 1/2% accuracy or equal. Provide with cast aluminum case, chrome plated ring, glass face, phosphor bronze bourbon tube and friction pointer. Operating ranges shall be selected to assure nominal readings at the midpoint thereof. Provide snubber, coil siphon and T-handle gauge cock for each gauge. SECTION 15190 - PIPE AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 1.1 STANDARDS ANSI A13.1 - 1981, Scheme for the identification of Piping Systems. ANSI Z53.1, Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards. 1.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Products of Brady, Seton or equal are acceptable. 1.3 PIPE IDENTIFICATION AND PLUMBING SIGNAGE Pipe identification markers and arrow flow markers shall be provided on all piping systems. Marking shall be painted. Do not use color bands. Pipe identification shall be suitable for all temperatures anticipated. Identification shall be outdoor grade marine enamel paint and stencils. All stencils shall be professionally cut and applied. Each marker shall indicate direction of flow with an arrow pointing away from the marker. The marker shall comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI Z53.1 for Scheme and color codes. All water shut off valves shall be signed with sign reading "water s.o.v. " and indicate what will be shut off. 1.4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 6 of 33

DIVISION 15

Valve identification tags shall identify the function and use of the valve per notations on the drawings and schedules. Stenciled high gloss painted lettering shall be used for all tanks with minimum three-inch high lettering over a contrasting color field painted background of suitable size for the lettering. Lettering shall be bold, easy to read.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 7 of 33

DIVISION 15

SECTION 15200 - NOISE AND VIBRATION 1.1 NOISE CONTROL/SOUND LEVELS TYPE OF SPACE Auditoriums, theaters, music practice rooms, audio-visual facilities, executive offices Classrooms, offices, libraries laboratories, nurse's area Portable Classrooms Reception areas, cafeterias, Gymnasiums, education shops rooms, maintenance shops Lobbies, corridors, drafting Kitchens, laundries Rooms not listed above Fan coil units at outlet select for MAX. NOISE CRITERIA

NC 30 Maximum NC 35 Maximum NC 35 Maximum NC 40 Maximum NC 45 Maximum NC 55 Maximum NC 35 Maximum NC 40 Maximum

SOUND CRITERIA

MAX DUCT VELOCITY up stream of terminal (Typical room) SUPPLY RETURN 500 FPM 650 FPM 750 FPM 775 FPM 950 FPM

NC-30 NC-35 NC-40 NC-45 NC-55

450 FPM 550 FPM 650 FPM 700 FPM 900 FPM

Return air paths generally provide the greatest acoustical challenge. Particular attention should be given to the return path. Branch dampers are to be used at all branches. Terminal OBD's are not to be used for trim balancing. In no case shall the total static pressure across the system fan exceed four inches of water pressure for central air handlers. Fan coil units shall not exceed 1/2 inch static pressure. Supply fan should deliver 1 1/2" w.g., grills, .6" w.g. max.; coils .5" wg. 1.2 VIBRATION Vibration shall be minimized into the structure. Set air handlers on spring isolators, set other equipment on necessary isolators to meet sound criteria and vibration elimination. Isolate pipe to prevent vibration into structure. Spring isolators are preferred to rubber.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 8 of 33

DIVISION 15

SECTION 15250 - INSULATION Insulate all cold surfaces to prevent condensation. Insulate all other hot and cold surfaces. Insulation shall meet the requirements of ASHRAE Standard 90. Provide sufficient insulation to prevent pipe freezing or locate pipe in heated area. Insulation shall maintain its full thickness at supports and be removable for maintenance of equipment. SECTION 15341 - ACID WASTE DRAINAGE SYSTEM 1.1 ACID WASTE SYSTEM Neutralization system must meet Waste Water Management requirements. Piping system must be suitable for the materials put into the system. Piping under counters shall be GSR, Fuseal or equal. All neutralization tanks shall be located outside the building in an area accessible to pump trucks with all sinks piped to them. Where possible, a single adequately sized tank shall be used for multiple sink applications. SECTION 15350 - NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM 1.1 GAS PIPING SYSTEM Valve all gas to equipment. Laboratory gas shall have one shut-off valve for each room in a supervised, locked compartment, secured from students. Gas pipe may be in a ventilated trench below the floor. Trench must have openings to allow air to circulate in accordance with all governing codes and standards. Provide independent AGA approved shut-off valve on each piece of gas-fired equipment. SECTION 15380 - BACKFLOW PREVENTION Minimum requirements for backflow protection of the potable water supply are stated in the Arizona Department of Environmental Quality Regulations dated 1991, the Uniform Plumbing Code, Section 1003, 1988 & 1991 Edition and the Manual of Cross-Connection, 8th Edition. The latter two are included by reference in the ADEQ Regulations. All district sites must use a reduced pressure principle assembly (RPA) for protection on the potable water lines. This includes fire sprinkler lines connected to the purveyor's water system. A wye strainer with isolation valve shall be installed immediately upstream of all backflow preventers.

Internal protection must be provided in accordance with the most current applicable codes and regulations. This includes make-up water lines to boilers, chillers, science laboratories, carbonated beverage dispensers, and locations where contamination or pollution can occur through cross-connection. 1.1 ANTI-SIPHON EQUIPMENT Anti-siphon equipment shall meet Water Department code and be a maximum size of 2". Provide anti-siphon device on all equipment where required by Pima County Health Code and/or by the Water Department. 1.2 ASSEMBLY CRITERIA Double check value assemblies, and reduced pressure principle assemblies. Acceptable manufacturers are Watts and Febco. The assembly shall be approved by the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research of the University of Southern California. (FCCCHR-USC)
Rev. 01/01/2007 Mechanical - 15 Page 9 of 33

DIVISION 15

The assembly shall have replaceable seats. The assembly shall have bolted flanges or unions on each end of the assembly. Exposed non-metallic piping and lines shall be protected from ultra-violet radiation and vandalism. Assemblies used exclusively on fire sprinkler lines shall be equipped with outside stem and yoke valves (OS&Y). 1.3 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS The contractor shall obtain an installation permit for all backflow assemblies. The contractor shall provide a compliance test report prepared by a certified backflow tester. A copy shall be sent to Tucson Water and the TUSD Project Manager. Backflow assemblies shall be installed as close to the meter as possible using a minimum of two assemblies installed in parallel for each meter. No external assemblies for potable water are to be larger than two inches. If greater flow rates are required, multiple two inch assemblies shall be installed in a parallel manifold downstream of a single meter. If new lines are installed, they shall have separate meters or be connected downstream of the service protection. SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 15400) Plumbing general information is for the guidance of the designer. This covers items that are critical to the design and operation of the TUSD buildings. The designers shall use their best judgment when the sections are silent on a subject. Water heaters shall have space for maintenance and replacement. Maximum water heater size 199,900 BTU with gravity type burners with electronic ignition and flue dampers. Provide State or equal water heaters. Use two or more if necessary. Minimum clear space of 2'-0" in front of hand hole. Design adequate space for removal of water heaters from the building. Water pipes shall be located to prevent freezing. Water and gas piping shall not be buried below the floor. Water heaters' size should be determined by all related factors. All hot water supply and return pipes shall be insulated. Hose bibs shall be located no more than approximately 300 feet apart. Sewer pipe shall be installed outside the building as much as possible. Each separate building shall be provided with a single gas meter. No underground gas piping on the building side of a gas meter. Provide for future expansion for new buildings. TUSD to indicate where future buildings are planned. Terminate sewer so it may be extended. Water shall terminate with a valve and capped pipe for future extension. Where drains are not near regularly used fixtures, provide a normally closed solenoid valve and a seven-day clock set to have trap filled automatically once a week. This may be connected in the Energy Management System. Automatic trap primer valves may be used in other areas. See Section 15421. Use vacuum breakers when required by code. Each group of fixtures shall be provided with globe valve shut off valves. All main branches off main water source shall be provided with shut off valves.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 10 of 33

DIVISION 15

SECTION 15401 - DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM Provide a method for balancing circulated domestic hot water. Provide time clock control such that the circulator pump operates only during occupied periods. Do not utilize EMCS for this purpose. Tempered hot and cold water shall be piped and connected at every lavatory and nurse's sink. Classroom sinks to have only cold water. Science classrooms shall have hot water supplied to the teacher's station, but not to student stations. All domestic hot and cold water piping outside the building insulation envelope (i.e., in attic spaces) shall be protected from freezing by suitable insulation. Provide reduced pressure backflow preventer for all heating and cooling make-up water with strainer on inlet. Install a drainpipe to nearest floor drain. Install reduced pressure backflow preventer at locations using carbonating devices. 1.1 HOSE BIBBS Hose Bibbs shall be loose key type. Loose key hot and cold water mixing valve at can-washing area for kitchen, maximum 140 degrees hot water. 1.2 DISH MACHINE Dish machine shall be equipped with water pressure regulator and in-line bronze strainer. Use no PVC piping to dish machine. Dish machine shall have a reduced pressure assembly (RPA) installed for internal potable water protection. The RPA relief valve shall be piped to drain with an adequately sized dedicated line. The drain lines for dishwashers shall not have slip joint connectors. 1.3 GARBAGE DISPOSAL Garbage disposal shall have independent hot and cold water shut-off valves. SECTION 15405 - SOIL AND WASTE PIPING SYSTEM Soil and waste piping system shall have flashing vents compatible with roof supplied. SECTION 15421 - DRAINS 1.1 FLOOR DRAINS Floor drains shall be installed with floor sloped to drain. In areas where drains are not near regularly used fixtures, provide a normally closed solenoid valve and connect to the EMCS microprocessor. Arrange for trap to be filled automatically once a week. Automatic trap primer valves that operate on a pressure drop principal may be used in other areas, near regularly used fixtures. Trap primer valves must be installed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations. Drain cover shall be metal, suitable for the service without distortion. Drains above grade shall have draining flange with flashing and flashing clamps. Trap primers are not acceptable. Provide floor drains in kitchens and at emergency showers and eye wash fountains, and at other locations where agreed by the Project Manager. Floor drains are required in equipment rooms, at pumps, in restrooms, and in kitchens where required.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 11 of 33

DIVISION 15

SECTION 15423 - CLEANOUTS Cleanouts outside shall be placed at grade with 12" x 12" x 12" concrete encasement and shall be covered with Alhambra A-1242 or similar, modified with screws to hold cover in position. Cleanouts shall be same size as soil or waste pipe with covers to be installed using pipe thread tape on the threads. Kitchen multi-bowl sinks shall have cleanout plugs on the horizontal drainpipe from the end bowls prior to the trap to allow rodding of pipe from tailpiece to trap. All grease interceptors shall be located outside the building. SECTION 15424 - DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS Water heaters shall have a maximum capacity 199,900 BTU rating, have glass lined tanks equipped with hand holes for cleaning and inspection, and have anode rods. Pipe to allow maintenance space and provide pipe from relief valve, union close to relief valve. Water heaters' size should be determined by all related factors. Use small electric water heaters for use with four lavatories and mop sink or less. All water heaters shall be internally insulated with a minimum of one inch of polyurethane foam (R-8.33) or two inches of fiberglass blanket meeting the requirements of ASHRAE Standard 90. All water heaters shall have separate, individual expansion tanks installed. For gas water heaters above 199,900 BTU provide spark ignition and flue dampers equal to State. Provide time clock control such that the circulator pump and gas supply operates only during occupied periods. Do not use EMCS for this purpose. Provide a booster water heater at kitchen dish wash machines to obtain the required 180 degree water. Booster heater is to be installed within two feet of dish machine or a recirculating pump from hot water heater must be used. SECTION 15451 - PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 1.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES Plumbing fixtures shall be from the list in this document, except fixtures not listed should be approved by TUSD Facilities Management Department. Fixture heights shall be shown as on architectural drawings. Flush valves shall be Sloan Royal flush valve low water use or other approved model having brass reinforced neoprene diaphragms. All fixtures shall have loose key, iron pipe, angle stops. Valve water pipe inside electric drinking fountain cabinets. 1.2 PLUMBING TRIM Plumbing trim shall be "Delta" of the Model number indicated. Other trim with machined water passages may be approved by Facilities Management Department as an equal. Suppliers wishing to be approved shall submit one faucet of each type for testing by TUSD. TUSD experience indicates that the specified fixtures, as supplied, do not meet the 20 ppb standard upon installation. A period of flushing is generally required to alleviate initial lead concentration to the desired levels. Installed fixtures shall be rinsed daily for not less than 30 seconds each. The flushing shall continue for a minimum period of two (2) weeks. TUSD shall be notified at conclusion of flushing period. Verification samples may be collected by a TUSD representative. At the discretion of TUSD, an additional two week flushing period may be required. Records of flushing shall be maintained and available for TUSD inspection.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 12 of 33

DIVISION 15

1.2

WATER CLOSET Water closet shall be flush valve, type elongated, 1.6 gallon per flush, white open front seat with check hinges. "American Standard" of Model listed or approved equal. No wall mounted water closets shall be installed. Only floor mounted, down dischard closets are to be used. All closets, including disabled access closets, are to be standard 17.5" height. Flush Tank: Floor Mounted Flush Valve: American Standard New Cadet Model 2292.203 American Standard Madera Model 2234.015

1.3

URINALS Urinals shall be American Standard Washbrook 6501.216., Eljer 161-1060, or Kohler K-4970-T. Flush valve and fixtures shall be compatible for low water use, to meet code requirements of 1 gallon per flush. Support with Josam Series 17800 or other equal.

1.4

LAVATORIES (WALL HUNG) Lavatories (Wall Hung) shall be American Standard, Lucerne 0355.012, 20" x 18", Eljer, Delwyn, 051-1644, 20" x 18", or Kohler, Hudson K-2861 or K-2867, 20" x 18". Faucets shall be slow self-closing after delivery of 0.25 gallons. Faucets are to be 4" centers only and are to be approved by Facilities Management Department. Strainer shall be Grid strainer similar to Chicago 327. Support shall be Josam Series 17750 or other equal.

1.5

LAVATORIES (DISABLED, WALL HUNG) Lavatories (Disabled, Wall Hung) shall be American Standard, Roxalyn, 0194.076, 20" x 18", Eljer, Mayburne, 051-2344, 20F" x 18", or Kohler, Jamestown, K-2053, 20" x 18". Faucets shall be Delta 710WF HDF for two hole sinks or 3579 WFHDF for three hole sinks. Strainer shall be Grid strainer similar to American Standard 7723.018 to keep trap close to wall. Support shall be Josam Series 17100 or other equal. Provide water flow restrictors for 2.5 GPM maximum.

1.6

LAVATORY (COUNTER TOP) Lavatory (Counter Top) shall be Elkay, PSLVR-1916CS, stainless steel, self-rimming, 19" x 17", or Just LLO1917-A-GR, stainless steel, self-rimming, 19" x 17", or other equal stainless steel rectangular stainless steel lavatory with round or oval bowl, overflow and self-rimming. Faucets shall be slow self-closing, after 0.25 gallons, Delta 701 HDF.

1.7

CLASSROOM SINKS Classroom sinks shall be Haws Model 4230, 31" x 19" or Just, Model CRA-1931-A-GR, 31" x 19"; 18 gauge stainless steel, type 302 satin finish, self-rimming. Faucets shall be Delta 710WF HDF TUSD. Valve water under sink with separate full port ball valves for drinking faucet and gooseneck faucet. For replacement sinks use either 25" x 17" or 31" x 19", whichever best fits into the existing space. Provide faucet with flow restrictors for 2.5 GPM maximum. Bubbler to be Elkay LK1141.

1.8

NURSES SINKS Nurses sinks and kitchen hand sinks shall be Elkay LR-2521, 25" x 21", Just SL-2125-A-GR, or equal, 18 gauge, stainless steel, Type 302, self-rimming. Faucet shall be Delta 710 WF, HDF TUSD with crumb-cup strainer drain. Sink swing spout to be Delta 101 TUSD. Provide with water flow restrictors for 2.5 GPM maximum.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 13 of 33

DIVISION 15

1.9

KITCHEN MULTI-BOWL SINKS Kitchen multi-bowl sinks shall be three compartment type, fabricated with minimum of 30" x 24" x 14" compartments and two drain boards each not less than 30" long. Sinks shall be NSF approved construction and suit Pima County Health Department requirements. One sink shall drain by air gap into a floor sink, not to the sewer line. Two faucets shall be provided, Delta 200 with 12" spout. Hot water to supply to sinks shall have recirculating line with if located greater than six feet from hot water source.

1.10

SINKS Sinks, other locations, shall be Elkay LR-2521, 25" x 21", Just SL-2125-A-GR, or equal, 18 gauge, stainless steel type 302, self rimming. Faucet shall be Delta, 710 WF, HDF. Drain shall be crumb-cup Delta 100 strainer or grid strainer. Provide with water flow restrictors for 2.5 GPM maximum. Sink sizes and quantity of bowls may be modified to meet special requirements.

1.11

SERVICE SINK Service sink shall be Fiat Products Department, Model TSB-12", 24" x 24", American Standard, 7740.020, 28" x 28" enameled cast iron; or Elkay, EFS-2523-C, 25" x 23", or equal. (Note, the above listed service sinks are not equal to each other.) Faucet shall be American Standard 8344-111 or Chicago 897. Provide with vacuum breaker, minimum 36" heavy duty hose and screwdriver stops. Drain shall have grid strainer. Provide bumper guards to protect the sides and top edge from damage.

1.12

THREE COMPARTMENT KITCHEN SINK Faucets shall be Chicago Brothers. Drains for three compartment kitchen sinks shall be Franklin.

1.13

SHOWER (NURSE) Shower (nurse) shall be equipped with Acorn Model 531, Chicago No. 1762, Delta Model 603, Speakman SM1425, or Symmons - 4-500-X. Many other manufactured products are equal to the above. Shower valve shall be single lever, balanced pressure, volume control (2.5 GPM) either as part of the valve or the showerhead. Shower head shall be Acorn Model 800 or other self-cleaning low water flow head. Water supplies shall be provided with stops or valves to allow for maintenance.

1.14

SHOWER Shower, other locations shall have Acorn Model 531, Chicago No. 1762, Delta Model 603, Speakman SM-1425, or Symmons - 4-500-X. Many other manufactured products are equal to the above. Shower valve shall be single lever, balanced pressure, volume control (2.5 GPM) either as part of the valve or the showerhead. Showerhead shall be Acorn Model 801 or other self-cleaning low water flow head. Bent arm, shower head bracketed, stalls, shower columns, or other shower configuration shall meet the space requirements. Water to shower, either single or groups, shall have shut off valve in a supervised area to turn off the water to all heads.

1.15

EYE WASH STATIONS All science lavatories shall be equipped with faucet mounted eye wash stations. Stations shall be similar to Lab Safety Supply Company, No. PA-8252 station for standard faucet or No. PA-8270 station for gooseneck faucet. Provide two stations in each lavatory with as much separation as possible.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 14 of 33

DIVISION 15

1.16

COATING PROCEDURE For drinking water faucets or bubblers where lead-free or screw-machine fixtures are not available a coating procedure shall be followed: Prior to coating, the fixtures shall be disassembled to maximum degree possible. This includes removal of the Aerators and the valve assembly. Waterways shall be wire brushed to remove loose surface materials. "TNEMEC" Series 20 Pota-Pox coating shall be mixed and two coats applied, 12 hours apart, following manufacturers' directions. Other brands may be acceptable, but must be approved by TUSD Engineering prior to use.

SECTION 15455 - DRINKING FOUNTAIN Drinking fountain outdoors shall be installed in a closet with metal door to outdoors and shall be cast aluminum with two or three bubblers. No electric outdoor coolers shall be installed. All outdoor drinking fountains shall have waste line connected to sanitary sewer. No dry wells are permitted!

SECTION 15460 - GREASE TRAPS Grease traps are required at all kitchens. Grease traps shall have cleanout located at the outlet. Grease traps shall be located on the building exterior for easy access by trucks for cleaning and maintenance purposes. Grease interceptors shall be used where only food warming takes place. SECTION 15500 - FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 15500) Fire protection information is for the guidance of the designer. Information is included in this section and in other specification sections. These sections cover items that are critical to the design and operation of the TUSD buildings. The designers shall use their best judgment when the sections are silent on a subject. When required new and existing buildings shall be provided as required with a wet fire sprinkler system. Obtain TUSD approval before installing new sprinkler systems. Systems shall be acceptable to the Tucson Fire Department within the city limits, and the State of Arizona Fire Marshal in the county, and the Drexel Heights Fire Marshal at any site under his/her jurisdiction. (See Appendix A.) Design shall include, as a minimum, available water flow, water density, building classification, riser location and pipe sizes 4" and over. Contractor to provide shop drawings, and calculations approved by the authority having jurisdiction and certified with a stamp by a registered engineer. Risers, valves, controls, etc., shall not be installed in areas where students have access. Piping shall be out of reach of student, horizontal and vertical. Provide protective enclosures for horns, bells, gauges, valves, etc. and guards for outdoor fire sprinkler heads All drains on piping for flushing, testing, draining system shall discharge to the outdoors. Fire Department connections shall be located at property line, near street and water department hydrant. Enclose in masonry enclosures, reinforced to prevent vandalism.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 15 of 33

DIVISION 15

Provide for future expansion for new building. TUSD to indicate where future is planned. Installation shall meet or exceed NFPA 13, and NFPA 25 requirements. All drains and inspectors test points shall pipe to outside building. All sprinkler pipe must be concealed except for equipment room. Exceptions must be approved by TUSD. Flow switches and tamper switches shall be supervised by the fire alarm system and indicate trouble when valve is not in full open position. Through the fire alarm system, shut down or redirect the air handler and exhaust fan systems within the building if necessary to comply with fire or building safety codes. The sprinkler system shall be supplied water from fire line. Do not connect to domestic water piping inside the building. If partial sprinkler system is installed, design partial system with proper size pipe and valves to supply the complete building in the future. SECTION 15501 - WET AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM Automatic fire sprinkler equipment shall be approved by Factory Mutual (FM) and Underwriter's Laboratory (UL). Flow switches and tamper switches shall connect to building fire alarm system. Two-piece adjustable escutcheons for heads, swing joints from branch pipe to heads. Inspectors' test points shall be most remote location from riser. All sections of pipe must be drainable either through the main drain or auxiliary drains. Test per NFPA 13 shall be witnessed by TUSD Fire Prevention Supervisor and State Fire Marshall. SECTION 15600 - HEATING, COOLING AND VENTILATION See end of Division 15 for the HVAC design guidelines for comfort limits for TUSD students. PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 15600) Heating, Cooling and Ventilation general information are for the guidance of the designer. Information is included in this section and in other specification sections. These sections cover items that are critical to the design and operation of the TUSD buildings. The designers shall provide analysis of operating cost including maintenance for alternative systems for comparison. The analysis report with a narrative description of each system shall be submitted to TUSD for review. All calculations are to be included and remain the property of TUSD. See services by the Architect. No evaporative cooling for any new or remodeled schools, except when directed otherwise by TUSD. (SEE SECTION 15770 FOR PACKAGED EQUIPMENT) 1.1 COOLING SYSTEMS IN EXISTING BUILDING Cooling systems in existing building shall be retained and revitalized as may be necessary. Changes in type of systems must be approved by the Director of Engineering and Planning Department. Serving areas shall be evaporative cooled. The prep areas shall have supplementary heating for use when the exhaust system is not in use. Hoods shall be single shell designed to the minimum allowable exhaust flow as defined by the Council of American Building Officials, National Evaluation Service Committee. Such hoods shall be U.L. Listed and have been evaluated by the committee for reduced exhaust as is defined by the Uniform Mechanical Code.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 16 of 33

DIVISION 15

Locally manufactured exhaust hoods which are not listed by the National Evaluation Service Committee shall not be used. The minimum exhaust airflow shall not be less than 50 cfm per square foot of load area. Clearance between the cooking surface and front bottom edge of the hood shall be a minimum of 40 inches and a maximum of 54 inches. The designer shall decide the most efficient and economical method to provide make-up air. Provide sufficient air to balance exhaust system. No equipment or piping shall be on the roof except range hood and dishwasher exhaust fans and large exhaust fans for toilet rooms. 1.2 WORKING SPACE Working space shall be provided for maintenance. This shall include space to replace bearings. Indicate clearance on drawing. Design space for removal of shafts. Access door or panel through adjacent walls should be considered to reduce floor area. Every effort should be made to keep equipment from the roof. 1.3 AIR HANDLERS Air handlers, evaporative coolers and similar equipment that are located in spaces not accessible from adjacent floor level or grade shall be provided with stairs, not ladders, and a platform from stairs to equipment and around equipment. A minimum of 6'-0" above the platform shall be clear of any obstructions. Platform shall be a minimum of 3'-0" wide to allow space for maintenance. Additionally the equipment may be mounted as illustrated in Appendix "D." No fan coils or air handlers with cantilevered blower shafts shall be allowed except with specific prior approval of owner. Mechanical equipment, pipes and ducts shall be insulated to prevent condensation and to provide economical heat transfer. Water pipes shall not be buried below floors. Pipes shall be located where they will not freeze. Chilled and heating water systems shall have a minimum of 12 psig at the highest point. Valve inlets and outlets of all equipment. Convert steam system to hot water when possible. Verify with TUSD. Portable buildings shall use evaporative coolers and electric heat pumps. Provide for future expansion for new buildings. TUSD to indicate where future buildings are planned. Where feasible boiler, chiller and auxiliary equipment shall be in one location in one or more rooms. Gas fired heat exchangers shall be stainless steel. Gymnasiums should have separate on/off control systems.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 17 of 33

DIVISION 15

1.4

OUTSIDE AIR Toilet rooms shall be exhausted with a minimum of 15 air changes per hour.

Minimum outside air required for each area shall be in strict conformance with, but not exceeding ASHRAE Standard 62, current at the time of design. *Air quantity shall balance with exhaust systems but not less than amount listed. **Verify typical occupancy with the District be for proceeding with HVAC design.

APPLICATION

PEOPLE** 1000 SQ. FT. (REFERENCE ONLY) 35 30 30 50 20

CFM/ PERSON

CFM/ SQ. FT.

Classroom Laboratories Shops Music Rooms Libraries Locker Room Corridors Auditoriums Offices Reception Areas Conference Rooms

15 20 20* 15 15 0.50 0.10

150 7 60 50

15 20 15 20

*Air quantity shall balance with exhaust systems but not less than amount listed. **Verify typical occupancy with the District be for proceeding with HVAC design. A method shall be provided to relieve air back to the outside. This may be through gravity or a positive relief system. Outside air inlet, shall be provided with an automatic damper arranged to keep the damper closed to only open during normal building occupancy. If there is a possibility of freezing the coil, provide a freezestat to close outside air dampers and stop the fan. Provide for future expansion for new schools. TUSD to indicate where future expansion may occur. Air used for ventilation purposes the air intakes shall comply with ASHRAE and shall be located to minimize the intake of material off-gassing. 1.5 CONDENSERS AND COOLING TOWERS Air cooled condensers shall be used for systems up to 70 tons. Cooling towers shall be used for systems over 75 tons. Evaporative condensers shall not be used. Cooling towers shall be energy efficient design with totally enclosed two speed motor(s) designed for wet service. Tower performance shall be certified by an independent test laboratory or field certified by an independent test and balance agency provided by the contractor. Tower shall be rated 125% of actual building cooling load at 78F, EWT. 95F, EWT, 85F, LWT and 3 gpm per ton.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 18 of 33

DIVISION 15

Provide plate and frame heat exchanger(s) on all cooling towers using a 2 and 4 pipe system. Heat exchangers shall be sized for two degree approach, specify minimum surface area. Cooling tower gear drives are acceptable only with owner approval on a case-by-case basis. Cooling tower gear drives are acceptable with double cell designs. Cooling towers with metal casing shall have all steel panels and structural elements made from G210 hot-dip galvanized steel, with edges given a protective coat of zinc-rich compound. In addition, a Zinc Chromatized Aluminum finish shall be applied to the exterior of the unit(s) after assembly. . (We should try to wrap our specifications around the most efficient towers, i.e., BAC or Marley, to the extent we can.) Cooling towers shall have strainer inside tower on water outlet. Screen size to protect pump impellers. Fan and shaft shall be supported by heavy duty, relubricatable ball bearings with special moisture-proof seals, extended lubrication lines, grease packed, self-aligning, and integral slinger rings. All bearings shall be designed for minimum L10 life of 2,000 hours. Provide a bleed-off control valve to close when the tower pump is off. Condensing water pumps shall have positive head on the suction side. Provide a spring type check valve to prevent the tower basin from flooding to activate when the pump is off. Pipe to have a strainer on the pump discharge. Locate the strainer so the pump will have positive pressure on the suction side. Pumps shall have mechanical seals. 1.6 ENERGY RECOVERY All design work should include energy recovery consideration. Of particular importance is tempering the fresh air intakes of classroom air conditioners. Design proposals should include payback calculations for a particular design. Design parameters and utilities costs are located elsewhere in this document.

SECTION 15622 - BOILER 1.1 HEATING BOILER Heating boiler shall have hi-low-off operation, I.R.I. gas train. Flow switch on boiler discharge shall interlock with boiler operation. Flue flashing shall be metal and allow for metal expansion. Set boiler on concrete housekeeping pad. Contractor to obtain permits from authority having jurisdiction. Stack heat recovery shall be used on each installation over one million BTUH input. Use Cane Industries or equal. Installation of additional equipment shall not void the ASTM approval without prior approval from TUSD Engineering SECTION 15671 CHILLER General Scope: It is the intent of TUSD to procure high-quality mechanical systems and equipment that minimize the total cost of ownership over the expected life of our facilities. Energy consumption is typically the largest single cost component of the overall cost of ownership. Consequently, systems and equipment shall be selected to minimize energy consumption. In Tucson, water-cooled mechanical systems have a considerable efficiency advantage over air-cooled equipment. Therefore, as the capacity requirement of a given system increases, the importance of incorporating water-cooled equipment increases as well. New facilities shall be designed with water-cooled mechanical systems unless specific TUSD approval is given to the contrary. Existing water-cooled systems that are being upgraded or expanded shall incorporate new water-cooled equipment. Existing air-cooled systems or facilities that are being upgraded to include refrigerated air
Rev. 01/01/2007 Mechanical - 15 Page 19 of 33

DIVISION 15

conditioning should be examined carefully to determine the feasibility of utilizing water-cooled systems. Evaporative condensers shall not be considered without prior approval of TUSD. 1.1 AIR COOLED CHILLERS: 140-Tons and less

Specify the following features: Multiple screw or scroll-compressor design Minimum of (2) circuits Stand-alone microprocessor control Integral EMCS interface to open protocol standards BACnet, Lon Mark, and Modbus Flow monitor (differential pressure switch preferred) Phase loss and under/over voltage protection Ground fault protection High ambient operation (to 125oF) UL or ETL listed Easily obtainable compressors competitively priced Schedule the following: Design ambient condition (115oF) Chilled water flow rate (GPM) Entering and leaving chilled water temperatures Required unit capacity in Tons at design operating conditions Minimum EER at design operating conditions IPLV at ARI Standard conditions Electrical service (Ex: 460V/3-PH) Mean circuit ampacity (MCA) and Maximum overcurrent protection (MOCP) Maximum water pressure drop (Ft. of head) Submittal Requirements: Published performance ratings in accordance with ARI Standard 550/590-98 Published sound pressure ratings in accordance with ARI Standard 370 Dimensional, physical, and electrical data Pressure drop curves Controller information

1.2

AIR COOLED CHILLERS: 120-Tons and larger

Specify the following features: Multiple screw-compressor design Minimum of (2) circuits Stand-alone microprocessor control Integral EMCS interface to open protocol standards BACnet, Lon Mark, and Modbus Flow monitor (differential pressure switch preferred) Phase loss and under/over voltage protection Ground fault protection High ambient operation (to 125oF) UL or ETL listed Easily obtainable compressors competitively priced

Schedule the following: Design ambient condition (115oF)


Rev. 01/01/2007 Mechanical - 15 Page 20 of 33

DIVISION 15

Chilled water flow rate (GPM) Entering and leaving chilled water temperatures Required unit capacity in Tons at design operating conditions Minimum EER at design operating conditions IPLV at ARI Standard conditions Electrical service (Ex: 460V/3-PH) Mean circuit ampacity (MCA) and Maximum overcurrent protection (MOCP) Maximum water pressure drop (Ft. of head)

Submittal Requirements: Published performance ratings in accordance with ARI Standard 550/590-98 Published sound pressure ratings in accordance with ARI Standard 370 Dimensional, physical, and electrical data Pressure drop curves Controller information

1.3

WATER COOLED CHILLERS: 125-Tons and smaller

Specify the following features: Multiple scroll-compressor design Minimum of (2) circuits Stand-alone microprocessor control Integral EMCS interface to open protocol standards BACnet, Lon Mark, and Modbus Flow monitor (differential pressure switch preferred) for evaporator and condenser Phase loss and under/over voltage protection Ground fault protection UL or ETL listed Scheduled performance with fouling factors per ARI Std 550590-98 Easily obtainable compressors competitively priced Schedule the following: Chilled water flow rate (GPM) and entering/leaving water temperatures Condenser water flow rate (GPM) and entering/leaving water temperatures Maximum water pressure drop thru evaporator and condenser (Ft. of head) Required unit capacity in Tons at design operating conditions Minimum EER at design operating conditions IPLV at ARI Standard conditions Electrical service (Ex: 460V/3-PH) Mean circuit ampacity (MCA) and Maximum overcurrent protection (MOCP) Submittal Requirements: Published performance ratings in accordance with ARI Standard 550/590-98 Published sound pressure ratings in accordance with ARI Standard 370 Dimensional, physical, and electrical data Pressure drop curves Controller information 1.4 WATER COOLED CHILLERS: 125-Tons and larger

Specify the following features: Single or dual centrifugal or screw compressor design1 Refrigerant cooled (hermetic) compressors
Rev. 01/01/2007 Mechanical - 15 Page 21 of 33

DIVISION 15

R-134a or other refrigerant not subject to the Montreal Protocol and/or US Clean Air Act Stand-alone microprocessor control Integral EMCS interface to open protocol standards BACnet, Lon Mark, and Modbus Flow monitor (differential pressure switch preferred) for evaporator and condenser Phase loss and under/over voltage protection Ground fault protection UL or ETL listed Scheduled performance with fouling factors per ARI Std 550590-98 Chiller shall have the capability of storing and isolating the entire refrigerant charge in the condenser Evaporator and condenser shall be shell and tube type design, constructed, tested and stamped according to the requirements of ASME Code, Section VIII Reseating-type spring loaded pressure relief valves in accordance with ASHRAE-15

Schedule the following: Required unit capacity in Tons at design operating conditions Maximum full load efficiency (kW/Ton) at design operating conditions NPLV at listed conditions2 Chilled water flow rate (GPM) and entering/leaving water temperatures Condenser water flow rate (GPM) and entering/leaving water temperatures (80oF/90oF when new cooling towers are being procured in conjunction with chillers) Maximum water pressure drop thru evaporator and condenser (Ft. of head) Electrical service (Ex: 460V/3-PH) Mean circuit ampacity (MCA) and Maximum overcurrent protection (MOCP) Unit mounted starter3 Submittal Requirements: Computer performance ratings in accordance with ARI Standard 550/590-98 Computer sound pressure levels measured according to ARI Standard 575-87 Dimensional data Controller information Footnotes: 1. Dual compressor designs provide a level of redundancy not available with single-compressor designs. Additionally, they generally provide superior part load performance. Dual compressor designs are required when space limitations prohibit multiple chiller installations and should be considered for all installations. NPLV shall be listed at the scheduled evaporator and condenser flow rates and temperatures. As a minimum, utilize load-weighting data per ARI Standard 550/590-98. Consult with TUSD regarding anticipated actual load weighting for NPLV calculation. If actual load-weighting information is available or determined, schedule these values in lieu of ARI Standard load-weighting values. The use of VFDs substantially reduces inrush (starting) current requirements, which can result in significant savings in the electrical distribution system. Additionally, VFDs result in superior part-load performance. Designers are strongly encouraged to consider VFD starters for all centrifugal chillers.

2.

3.

SECTION 15675 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES Equal of ABB, with bypass capability

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 22 of 33

DIVISION 15

SECTION 15710 - HEATING AND COOLING WATER SPECIALTIES 1.1 EXPANSION TANK Bladder tanks shall be used with removable bladder, welded steel, ASME Code constructed and stamped for a 125 psi working pressure, provided with appropriate openings, sight glass on the air chamber side and floor mounted where possible. 1.2 MAKE-UP WATER HEATING OR COOLING Make-up water heating or cooling provide Cash-Acme, Type B, line size or equal of Fisher Governor or Watts, set approximately 5'-0" above floor along a wall. 1.3 POT FEEDER AND SIDE LINE FILTER Pot feeder and sideline filter required on heating and cooling water closed loop systems. The filter feeder shall be equipped with 100 micron filters for start up and 10 micron permanent filters. Provide three spare permanent filters for each unit. SECTION 15761 - FAN COIL UNITS Fan coil units shall be surface mounted or with bottom flush with ceiling cabinets at ceiling, similar to Trane Model E, or C or TUVA concealed above the ceiling. (See diagram in Appendix D.) Provide with split capacitance high efficiency motors. Provide access for maintenance. Piping and three speed switches are to be concealed. Provide thermostatic control water flow, 2 way or 3-way modulating control valve. Unit shall be rated sound level maximum 40 NC when operating at design conditions and have tamperproof panels and access doors. Drain pans may be omitted on heating only units. Provide fresh air intake. Manifold intake air dampers and provide for automatic damper control using the EMCS. (Try to not specify air handlers or fan coils with cantilevered shafts. Bearing repair/replacement is almost impossible with unit in place.) SECTION 15770 - PACKAGE HEATING AND COOLING UNITS Units shall be in a location other than the roof or attic. Ground mounted units shall be on stands 18" above grade. All units shall have 3/4 inch standard steel expanded metal attached to the fined condensing coil unless the unit is fully enclosed in fencing. No attic installed equipment without express prior approval from owner. Allow sufficient space around the unit for serving and airflow. All packaged equipment shall have outside air economizers dry bulb controlled. Economizers shall be supplied by the equipment manufacture if available or specifically designed for the particular equipment model equal to Plenums Incorporated. All package cooling, split cooling, heating and cooling, and heat pumps shall be of the highest SEER rating offered with R-22 refrigerant. Exceptions requested to use R-410A must be made in writing to include a detailed payback comparison using an eight year life cycle, $0.12 per KWH, and operation from 6:00 to 6:00 Monday through Friday. Assume a 15% loss per year. SECTION 15774 - AIR HANDLING UNITS OUTSIDE AIR HANDLING UNITS Air handling units outside air handling units shall have hinged access openings to both sides of coils, to fan section, and to filters. Provide coils, copper tubes, aluminum fins, maximum 10 fins per inch 6" WG drop. Allow
Rev. 01/01/2007 Mechanical - 15 Page 23 of 33

DIVISION 15

clearance suitable for coil and shaft removal and replacement. All air handlers shall utilize the outside air economizer cycle with local coil freeze protection. SECTION 15805 - EVAPORATIVE COOLERS Evaporative coolers shall have cross fluted cellulose media with a minimum thickness of six (6) inches with polybond coated metallic casing. Aspen pad and rotary coolers shall not be used. Bleed off shall be used on all cellulose media coolers as follows: 1. Provide a suitable length of black poly drip irrigation tubing to form a capillary type restriction to the bleed off flow without the use of pinch clamps, which may become blocked. Poly tubing shall not be exposed to sunlight. Pipe the cooler overflow/drain to a suitable location. The bleed piping shall be piped to the overflow. The connection to the drain fitting shall be easily removed and accessible. (Timed bleed pumps seem to be more efficient and economical than the pinched bleed technique.) For Standard coolers use standard 1/8-inch drip irrigation tubing pushed into the 1/4-inch tubing which comes with the bleed kit. BLEED-OFF RATE TABLE MODEL 4500 H.P 1/3 1/2 3/4 3/4 1.0 SEC. 150 100 80 70 60 APROX. FT. 21 13 10 6 4.5

2.

6500

Note: A minimum amount of bleed-off water must be established to maintain maximum pad life. The above table gives this seconds to fill a 12 fluid ounce can from a length of 0.170 by 0.100 inch poly drip irrigation tubing pushed into the standard inch tubing supplied with the unit. Clamps and restrictor valves are not allowed. 3. For Custom Air Handlers shall use cross fluted fiberglass media with a suitable length of 1/4-inch tubing in conjunction with a globe valve if required. Bleed Rate (gpm) Area (Ft2) or = Media Face X 0.05 = Media Face Area (Ft2) 20

Valve make-up water inside the building with a ball valve for one or more coolers. Pipe shall pitch to a drain valve. Valve make-up water at each cooler. Piping shall pitch so it can be drained. Provide compression fittings on all pipes outdoors that may freeze. There shall be a hose bib within 50 feet of each cooler. Cooler base shall allow water to drain. Provide space to maintain, remove and replace coolers. A minimum of 3'-0" must be provided on the inlet and each side of each cooler.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 24 of 33

DIVISION 15

SECTION 15809 - MAKE-UP AIR UNITS Make-up air units shall have a gas fired heater and evaporative cooling. Provide unit with electronic ignition, twostage burner, and two speed motor. The furnace portion is to be stainless steel. The control panel is to be secure from students. The media shall be Glas-Dek cross-fluted fiberglass. Make-up air units are to be used for kitchen and locker rooms.

SECTION 15821 - CENTRIFUGAL FANS Extend grease fittings to side of casing. SECTION 15841 - ALL PRESSURE DUCTWORK All ductwork shall be galvanized sheet metal above ground, and below ground non-metallic or galvanized sheet metal encased in minimum 3" thick concrete and fabricated per current SMACNA standards. Ducts are to be sealed air tight using approved SMACNA techniques. Provide access doors to all equipment in the duct. Dishwasher exhaust ducts shall be aluminum and slope to allow drainage; seal all joints to prevent leakage. Encase range hood ducts as required by codes, extend outdoors as directly as possible. Flexible duct shall have a maximum length of 18", triple lock aluminum.

SECTION 15864 - FIRE DAMPER Fire damper shall be U.L. approved with blades stored out of air stream, Type B. SECTION 15870 - GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS Provide straightening devices behind grilles and diffusers so air will enter properly. SECTION 15879 - LOUVERS Louvers shall prevent water entrance and have a bird screen on the outside. SECTION 15880 - FILTERS Filters at air handlers shall be minimum 2" thick replaceable media in metal frames. When possible use 24" x 24" or 20" x 20". Provide magnahelic pressure gauge for each filter bank handling more than 2000 cfm. Provide for filter removal without removal of ceiling tile whenever possible. SECTION 15900 - ENERGY MANAGEMENT & CONTROLS SYSTEMS (EMCS) All controls designs shall have strategy, extent, type and diagrams reviewed and approved by TUSD's Utilities Manager prior to drawing release for construction. Pneumatics are permitted for final drivers on large valves or devices when necessary and/or reasonable only. Primary controls to be digital. PART 1 - GENERAL: 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 25 of 33

DIVISION 15

A.

Drawings and general provisions of contract, including general and supplementary conditions and Division 1 apply to work specified in this section. All work shall be coordinated with Section 15995 Mechanical Systems Commissioning.

B.

1.02 WORK COORDINATIION WITH OTHER TRADES: A. All low voltage wiring and 120 volt control wiring including conductors, control relays, switches, sensors, transformers for EMCS equipment, interconnections, etc., for control functions shall be provided as part of Section 15900 work, unless specifically included in other specification sections. Material and installation methods for wiring and raceways shall conform to Division 16 requirements. Control wiring for start/stop signals to motor starters and contactors shall be provided as part of Section 15900 work. Control switches and cover plates as applicable shall utilize same color and material as specified in Division 16 for electrical wiring devices.

B.

C.

1.03 WORK INCLUDED: A. Provide a complete Native BacNet DDC system, with an on-site computer terminal (if shown on the drawings and not currently installed on site) and remote connection to Tucson Unified School Districts main EMCS location. All DDC devices that make up the buildings EMCS shall communicate using native at the BacNet protocol, no exceptions. The Electronic Microprocessor Based Energy Monitoring & Control System (EMCS) shall monitor the Data Environment and perform control functions in relation to a programmed strategy and the status of the Data Environment. The system shall use solid-state computer-based digital and analog technology. The system shall be standard with the manufacturer to insure ongoing parts availability and trained technical support. Provider of DDC components shall guarantee that compatible replacement parts shall be available from the manufacturer for a period of 10 years after project completion. Provider shall furnish PICS statement for each DDC device installed for this project. The EMCS shall be of the fully user programmable type requiring no special computer education for operation. All necessary instruction manuals and user orientation training to be supplied by the manufacturer or agent thereof. The programmable control capabilities for EMCS shall include, but not be restricted to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Scheduled start/stop Optimum start/stop Supply air temperature reset Day/night setback Scheduled occupancy routines including holidays Accumulating run time Direct digital temperature control Adaptive control strategies Tenant override User defined programming

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 26 of 33

DIVISION 15

G.

Provide direct digital control system including thermostats, sensors, control valves, dampers, operators, indicating devices, interface equipment, software, hardware, operator input/output devices, remote processing units, wiring and conduit. Additionally this same contractor shall provide engineering, installation, supervision, labor, calibrations, software programming and commissioning necessary for a complete and fully operational system. Commissioning will be coordinated with TUSDs EMCS shop and will be performed with TUSD personnel present. The intent of this division specification is to establish a level of control system required for this project. All functions described herein are required but it is understood that some degree of flexibility may be required. Any major deviation requires the written approval of the Architect/Engineer prior to bid date. This EMCS shall be fully integrated into front end workstation software approved by TUSD prior to the Districts acceptance of the system.

H.

I.

1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Provide complete system drawings, complete listing of control programs, panel drawings, schematic operational description of sequences, and description and engineering data on each control system component. An electronic copy of the systems sequence of operation shall be provided for approval to the Districts EMCS Section Representative in MS Word format prior to commissioning of the system.

B.

1.05 ENVIRONMENT: A. The EMCS shall be capable of operating in an environment of 31-120 degrees F and 10-95% relative humidity. Sensors and control elements shall operate under the temperature, pressure, humidity and vibration conditions normally encountered in the installed location. EMCS system shall maintain accuracy as follows: 1. 2. 3. +/- .5 F for the space temperatures in the 40 F - 130 F range. +/- 1.0 F for outside air temperatures in the 30 - 130 F range. +/- 5 F for duct temperatures in the 40 F - 130 F range.

1.06 BATTERY BACKUP: A. The system shall be tolerant of power failure and hold memory a minimum of 12 hours. On power restoration, the system shall automatically and without operator intervention of execution of manual restart procedures including. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Come on line Update all monitored functions. Resume operation based on current time and status Implement special building start up strategies as required. Log time of power outages and start-ups.

The system shall monitor the battery backup and provide an alarm for failure of batteries to the TUSD EMCS front end.

1.07 PROGRAM STORAGE: A. The system shall also be capable of interfacing with a mass storage (tape or disc) device, for use in up loading and down loading programs to the EMCS.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 27 of 33

DIVISION 15

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. B. C. D. E. Delta Alerton Automated Logic Andover Controls Native BacNet approved equal.

2.02 MODULAR DESIGN/EXPANDABILITY: A. The EMCS shall be of a modular design providing distributed processing capability, and allowing future expansion of both input/output points and processing/control functions.

2.03 EMCS INPUT: A. GENERAL: 1. The input section of the EMCS shall connect the EMCS to the building environment. The EMCS shall be capable of accepting information from the form of a temperature, voltage, digital signal (on-off) or pulse counter.

B.

ANALOG INPUTS: 1. The Analog Input (AI) function shall monitor each analog input, perform A/D conversion, and hold the digital value in a buffer for interrogation. The A/D conversion shall have a minimum resolution of 12 bits. Analog inputs shall withstand continuous direct shorting to 120 VAC, 60 Hz power without failure.

C.

DIGITAL INPUTS: 1. The Digital Input (DI) function shall accept dry contact closures and voltage level transitions. Digital Inputs shall withstand continuous direct shorting to 120 VAC, 60 Hz power without failure.

D.

TEMPERATURE INPUTS: 1. Temperature inputs originating from a thermistor, or RTD shall be monitored and buffered as an AI, except that automatic conversion to degrees F shall occur without any additional signal conditioning. Pulse inputs shall withstand continuous direct shorting to 120 VAC, 60 Hz, power without failure.

E.

PULSE ACCUMULATOR INPUTS: 1. The pulse or watt accumulator function shall have the same characteristics as the DI, except that, in addition, a buffer shall be included to totalize pulses between interrogations. The pulse accumulator shall accept rates up to 10 pulses/second. Pulse inputs shall withstand continuous direct shorting to 120 VAC, 60 Hz, power without failure.

2.04 EMCS OUTPUTS: A. DIGITAL OUTPUTS:

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 28 of 33

DIVISION 15

1.

The Digital Output (DO) function shall provide contact closure for momentary (Pulse Width Modulation) and maintained operation of field devices. Output pulse width shall have a minimum resolution of 0.1 seconds. Isolation and protection against voltage surges up to 180 VAC peak shall be provided. Contact rating shall be a minimum of 2 amps at 24 VAC. Each digital output shall be equipped with an On/Off/Auto switch to manually obtain either output state. Manual overrides shall be reported to the Master at each update. An LED shall be provided to indicate the state of each digital output.

2.05 SOFTWARE FEATURES: A. MATHEMETICAL CAPABILITIES: 1. The EMCS shall have a math package capable of +,-,*,<,> functions and up to five levels of parenthesis for computation of variables. Control commands may be executed based on these calculated variables, which are available to the program on a global basis. Math expressions may be used in action and exit commands of control program. The mathematical software shall be capable of mixed mode arithmetic, utilizing Boolean Logic statements in combination with basic arithmetic to provide conditional mathematical computations. Final field programs shall be stored in battery backed up memory. The software shall include fixed formulas for psychometric calculations.

2.

3. 4. B.

PASSWORDS: 1. The EMCS shall have a minimum of 6 levels of user programmable passwords in addition to a master password, for programming security. Up to 8 separate passwords may be user programmed. Access to a first level password shall allow interrogation of system status only.

C.

HISTORY LOGGING: 1. The EMCS shall be capable of History Logging up to 16 system variables over 32 user defined time intervals concurrently, from 10 seconds to 1999 minutes each.

D.

MESSAGES: 1. The EMCS shall have capability of storing and displaying up to 99 user programmed messages of up to 128 characters each for alarming, preventative maintenance and status reporting.

E.

LOOK UP TABLES: 1. The EMCS shall have preprogrammed "LOOK UP" tables for the conversion of voltage inputs into temperature, water vapor pressure values for the computation of relative humidity and enthalpy.

F.

DOCUMENTATION FORMAT: 1. The programming language of the EMCS shall be English based such that a printout of the control program may serve as the primary documentation for the system.

G.

MICRO PROCESSOR INTEGRITY CHECKING:

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 29 of 33

DIVISION 15

1.

The EMCS microprocessor shall continuously monitor and check itself and produce error messages in the event of a malfunction.

H.

SOFTWARE MANUAL: 1. The software manual shall describe programming and testing, starting with a system overview and proceeding to a detailed description of each software feature. The manual shall instruct the user on programming or re-programming any portion of the system. This shall include all control programs, variables, set points, time periods, messages, passwords and other information necessary to load, alter, test and execute the system. The manual shall include: a. Complete description of programming language, including commands, editing and writing control programs, printouts and logs, and mathematical calculations. Instructions on modifying any control point, verifying error status, changing passwords, and initiating or disabling control programs.

b.

2.06 USER INTERFACE: A. LOCAL DISPLAY AND ADJUSTMENT: 1. The master/global DDC controller shall be provided with a digital display or hand held module which can be programmed to display such information as time, date, analog or binary information required for proper analysis and adjustment of the system being controlled. Adjustments of control variables shall be conveniently available at the controller by means of a laptop computer with software allowing editing, programming and delete capabilities as desired by the user and must be programmable on-site. Access to various levels of local control shall be password "secured" at each panel.

2.

3. B.

EXTERNAL COMMUNICATION INTERFACE: 1. The system shall be capable of communication through an EIA RS232C serial port. Communication may be accomplished with any RS232C compatible terminal. Operator communication shall be in English language format.

C.

DIRECT COMPUTER COMMUNICATION: 1. EMCS shall have a computer compatible communication mode for communication with other intelligent devices, which performs data integrity checking with automatic re-transmission of data when errors are detected.

2.07 UL AND GSA APPROVAL: A. EMCS shall be UL and GSA approved as an Energy Management System.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: 3.01 INSTALLATION:

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 30 of 33

DIVISION 15

A.

Check and verify location of all equipment with plans before installation.

B. C.

Interlock alarms with starter switching to bypass alarm when equipment is manually disconnected. This EMCS (For all Site that currently do not have EMCS systems) shall be complete Native BacNet system with an on-site computer terminal and remote connection to Tucson Unified School Districts main EMCS location.

D.

Any installations done on sites with existing CSI systems in place will be individually assessed by TUSD case by case to determine special needs and integration into the Tucson Unified School Districts BacNet front end.

3.02 WARRANTY AND INSPECTIONS: A. Division 15900 shall guarantee work to be free from defects in workmanship and material as indicated in Division 1 from the date of final acceptance. Any material or equipment furnished under section 15900 which proves defective within the period shall be promptly repaired or replaced by that contractor without cost to the owner. Make minimum of three complete inspections of approximately four hours duration in addition to normal service calls to adjust controls with reports written and submitted to the Architect/Engineer during first year. Inspections shall be spaced three months apart.

B.

3.03 STARTUP AND CHECKOUT: A. Provide startup of system and program user supplied operating hours and holiday scheduling. A system demonstration procedure shall be developed, submitted to Architect for approval, and performed in presence of Architect's representative for final checkout of system. Minor program modifications requested by the owner shall be made at that time at no charge to the owner. Prior to system demonstration the controls contractor shall submit a detailed point-to-point sign-off checklist. The point-to-point sign-off checklist shall be submitted a minimum of seven working days prior to the system demonstration. The Tucson Unified School Districts Section Representative will participate in the functional testing and commissioning of the EMCS after the Contractor has completed mapping the controls points to the Tucson Unified School Districts EMCS server. The Contractor shall notify the Tucson Unified School Districts Representative a minimum of ten working days prior to scheduling this testing.

B.

C.

D.

When the functional testing and commissioning is complete the contractor shall provide a back up disc to the TUSD EMCS shop containing the program database including all graphics pages.

E.

On existing EMCS systems any unused points or programming must be deleted before acceptance.

3.04 OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS:

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 31 of 33

DIVISION 15

A.

Provide competent instructors who will give full instruction to designated personnel in the adjustment, operation and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the equipment and system specified. A minimum of twenty-four hours of instructions in four hour sessions spaced a minimum of 1 week apart shall be provided. A written statement signed by owner's designated personnel shall be submitted with warranty to Architect.

3.05 WIRING AND CONNECTIONS: A. All wiring required from EMCS to relays, starters, sensors, etc., to be installed per Division 16 and per manufacturer's recommendation by Division 15900. EMCS bus wiring may be wired using cable approved for return air plenums, where permitted by code. Use 22 gauge wire for runs up to 250 ft. From 250 ft. to 500 ft. use 18 gauge. EMCS bus wiring must not be run in the same conduit as line voltage wiring (30 VAC or above) or wiring that switches power to highly inductive loads (contractors, coils, motors, generators, etc.). All wiring required from EMCS to relays, starters, sensors, etc., shall be labeled at the termination point in EMCS controllers enclosure. Label should include point name and address.

B.

C.

D.

SECTION 15990 - BALANCING AND TESTING The General Contractor will hire a Balancing Contractor as part of the Base Bid. The Engineer shall list what should be balanced and any special requirements. Before testing or balancing is started, the Mechanical Contractor shall adjust belts and sheaves, align all parts, replace all air filters, oil and grease bearings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Clean exterior surfaces of coil tubes and fins, flush interior of coil tubes until clean and check mixing damper operation to insure free operation and activation by the correct thermostat. TUSD reserves the right to hire an independent balancing contractor if questions arise as to the adequacy of the balancing work. If the balancing proves to be unacceptable, the cost of re-balancing will be borne by the General Contractor. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for certifying in writing that the system, as scheduled for balancing, is operational and complete. Completeness shall include not only the physical installation, but the Mechanical Contractor's certification that the prime movers, fans, pumps, refrigeration machines, boilers, etc., are installed in good working order, and that full load performance has been preliminary tested under the certification of the Mechanical Contractor. Before any testing and balancing is started a complete report shall be sent to the Test and Balance Agency. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for making all modifications to rectify discrepancies reported by the Balancing Contractor as indicating in the systems commissioning report as non-compliant with the contract documents. Outside air quantities are critical to the school District and will be verified. Deficiencies may require additional design effort to correct.

END OF SECTION

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 32 of 33

DIVISION 15

Division 15 Appendices

Appendix A All programmable thermostats, room sensors, HVAC air movers, and central plants should be set to the following criteria, unless specific direction to the contrary is given by the Facilities Utilities Trades Manager. Temperature 720 F Days.. Monday through Friday Times 06:00 to 18:00

Rev. 01/01/2007

Mechanical - 15 Page 33 of 33

DIVISION 16

TUCSON UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT MANUAL OF STANDARDS AND PROCEDURES

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 16000 16721 16730 16760 16765 16770

TITLE ELECTRICAL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CLOCK SYSTEM INTERCOM SYSTEM SPEAKER SPECS-MULTI-PURPOSE RM SECURITY SYSTEM WIRING SPECIFICATIONS

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 1 of 32

DIVISION 16

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL

SECTION 16000 - ELECTRICAL SCOPE AND INTENT


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE AND INTENT A. This section is written for new school or total remodel projects. For smaller projects such as partial remodel or addition work, those requirements which pertain to the scope of the particular project shall apply. B. Unless the project is considered temporary construction (such as portable classroom installation), all electrical work regardless of project scope shall comply with this manual. 1.02 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and specifications shall accurately and clearly describe the electrical work. B. As a minimum, drawings shall contain the following plan layouts showing circuiting and outlet locations for all systems: 1. Receptacle outlets and power to equipment 2. Lighting 3. Telephone raceway 4. Data Network raceway 5. Fire Alarm 6. Clock 7. Intercom 8. Security System raceway 9. Closed circuit television 10. Specialty Sound Systems C. Plans for above may have more than one system drawn on a common background but the final documents shall be arranged with a sufficient number of background sheets such that the individual system layouts can be easily followed. D. All systems shall be circuited. Do not show outlet layouts only, which require the contractor to work out the conduit and/or wiring layout. 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS A. All work shall comply with the electrical and outdoor lighting ordinances of Tucson and Pima County and requirements of the State of Arizona Fire Marshall, which are current at time of construction. PART 2 - DESIGN AND CAPACITY REQUIREMENTS 2.01 REQUIRED OUTLETS (See Appendix D for additional requirements.) A. Duplex convenience receptacles shall be provided in the various areas as shown below. The quantities shown are minimums and more outlets shall be provided when required by the particular project. All convenience outlets shall be 20 amphere receptacles.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 2 of 32

DIVISION 16

2.01.2

GENERAL CLASSROOMS

A. Minimum of five, with at least one duplex receptacle outlet each wall. When budgets permit, it is desirable to provide at least two duplex receptacles on each end wall and the wall along the corridor. B. Always locate a duplex receptacle adjacent to the closed circuit television outlet. C. Always locate a duplex receptacle adjacent to the telephone and data connection point. D. On remodel projects when surface raceways are used it is desirable to use Wiremold #3000 or #4000 on the two end walls and the corridor wall for the purpose of mounting and wiring the receptacles. The feed to the 3000/4000 raceway may be #500, 700 or 2100 raceway or conduit. 2.01.3 VOCATIONAL CLASSROOM

A. Provide similar to general classroom, but in addition provide outlet at each equipment and worktable location. Verify specific requirements for each project. Use GFI receptacles within 6 feet of sink. 2.01.4 SCIENCE LABORATORIES

A. Provide similar to general classroom, but in addition provide outlet at each lab table station and instructor's table. Use GFI receptacles within 6 feet of sink. 2.01.5 OFFICES

A. Provide outlet at each desk location and spaced liberally on walls. In general offices provide a 4-plex outlet at each desk. (One duplex on normal power and one on conditioned power, if conditioned power is available). 2.01.6 MULTI-PURPOSE ROOMS, AUDITORIUMS, GYMNASIUM, ETC.

A. One outlet per wall, and additional outlets when required so that outlets on walls are provided at not over 40' 0" on center. 2.01.7 COMPUTER CLASSROOMS

A. Install outlets approximately 4' 0" on center on perimeter of room. Also provide floor outlets as required to serve center area of room. Provide at least five, 20 ampere circuits for standard computer classrooms. Isolated grounds are not required. See comments in Appendix B regarding standard power and conditioned power. B. SEPATATE CONDUIT SHALL BE RUN FOR COMPUTER CIRCUITS. C. The circuiting provided to the outlets shall take into account the probable loading based on the furniture placement in the room. POWER POLES (power/data) are requisite when power requirement is more than three (3) from walls. It is desirable to have circuit numbers stenciled on the receptacle cover plates. 2.01.8 LIBRARY

A. Approximately 20'-0" on center in stack areas and reading rooms. Provide one outlet per each study carrel when permanently installed. Provide sufficient outlets in check-out counter area and provide outlet for book security system.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 3 of 32

DIVISION 16

2.01.9

WORKROOM AND TEACHERS' LOUNGE

A. One outlet each wall minimum. On counter tops provide outlets at 4'-0" on center when it is likely appliances will be used. Provide outlet for vending machine(s) and refrigerator as scheduled. Vending machines SHALL be on a separate circuit. In work rooms there should be a minimum of three outlets along counter tops with each on it's own circuit where possible. Teacher's lounge should be comparable to a residence with a minimum of TWO (2) circuits for coffee pots, micro ovens, etc. 2.01.10 CORRIDORS

A. Provide outlets at 25'-0" on center. 2.01.11 STAFF AND PRIVATE TOILETS

A. One GFI outlet adjacent to lavatory. 2.01.12 EQUIPMENT ROOMS, STORAGE, ETC.

A. Provide at least one outlet and switched light fixture in each room or space. 2.01.13 RECEPTACLE

A. Receptacle outlets shall not be provided in the following locations: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.01.14 COPIER Kindergarten or primary grade outdoor play yards. Student or public toilet rooms. Above sinks. Within 6'-0" of sinks in student accessible areas unless GFI protected. Paint spray booths or rooms.

A. Provide a 30 A, 120/240V, or 120/208V single phase, 4 wire outlet for copier in office or workroom as directed. This outlet to be fed from 30A, 2 pole circuit breaker, connected load 20 amperes. In addition, provide a 20A, 120V duplex receptacle on an individual circuit at the same location. 2.02 LIGHTING A. Calculations shall be submitted and become the property to TUSD. B. In the following table average illuminances are as typically calculated using the zonal cavity method. The minimum illuminances apply at any location likely to have a desk or other work surface. A point by point type calculation shall be made for the work surface or surfaces most likely to have the minimum illuminance. C. Since the below listed illumination levels are lower than has been used in the past, it will be necessary to pay particular attention to fixture location, glare and uniformity of lighting. Thus, while it may be possible to achieve 46 foot-candles with four (4) lamp fixtures, in most cases it will be necessary to use three (3) lamp or even two (2) lamp fixtures to achieve acceptable uniformity. D. Lower levels of artificial lighting are acceptable if the space has good day lighting and it is unlikely to be used for classes at night.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 4 of 32

DIVISION 16

E. When existing lighting fixtures are being replaced and the existing lighting system does not produce light levels which are up to this standard, it is not intended to require an increase in lighting levels if the building users find the pre-existing light levels adequate. Instead the new lighting shall provide light levels of at least the same as the existing system. 2.02.1 TABLE OF ILLUMINANCE

(Maintained foot candles minimum and average schedule) AREA Classrooms Kindergarten General classrooms, Sewing (2) Shops (2 Typing, Seminar rm. Computer Music Room Large group instruction areas (including lecture theaters (1)(3) AV FC 46 38fc to 56 30-40fc 50 fc AREA Auditorium Assemblies only (1) When used for study or examinations MIN AV FC 23-43 45-56

38

24fc 38

Storage areas Offices Cafeteria General Servery Kitchen When used for study/ examinations Graphic arts General on boards Gymnasium (Gymnatorium & Cafetorium) General When used for study or examinations Library Stack Reading, note taking, Cataloging Corridors(6) with lockers without lockers 38

10-20 46-56

18 fc

23 to 43 fc

38

23-33 32-43 40-50 46-56 50 fc 53 fc

Drafting General On boards (2) Mechanical and service areas 38 69 46-58 23-33

38

28-38

46-58 28 38 46-56 23-33 10-20

Washrooms and locker areas

23 to 33

Laboratories General Demonstrator's desks

69

86-96

ILLUMINANCE TABLE NOTES 1. It should be possible by simple switching to vary the illuminance by 50 per cent either up or down to accommodate note taking or audio-visual presentations. Total control by areas is desirable. Local lighting is to be used to supplement the general lighting where fine work is to be carried out or feature displays are located. Since study carrels cut off light from the overhead general lighting system, a local lighting luminary in each carrel is frequently desirable.

2.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 5 of 32

DIVISION 16

3.

Pay particular attention to good light levels along marker boards. Supplementary lighting is frequently required for marker boards, board lighting should be switched separately and have an asymmetrical distribution. In computer rooms it must be possible by switching to bring the illuminance up to general classroom levels. Values are for direct lighting. Where indirect lighting, providing high VCP is used, lower maintained light levels may be used. In corridors, pay particular attention to getting light on walls and ceilings. LIGHTING CONTROL

4.

5.

6. 2.02.2

A. Light switches shall be provided in classrooms and offices to permit turning out the lights when viewing slides or videos. B. Student restrooms in middle schools and high schools should be controlled by time switches. A spring wound timer style override switch should be provided in an area accessible to staff for turning on the lights for after hours use. C. Where practical use photo-sensors to provide override control for all or part of the lighting in areas where daylight provides good quality lighting. D. In classrooms, offices, etc., provide multi-level switching where practical, particularly if space has windows. Position one switch close to windows to allow occupants to take advantage of daylight. E. In general lights shall not be switched from circuit breaker panels. Circuit breakers, rated or not, are not to be used as light switches. F. In rewire and remodel projects the existing switch locations shall be reused, unless unsafe or inconvenient. 2.02.3 INTERIOR LIGHTING

A. Use shielded (lensed ) fixtures in the following areas: classrooms, offices, workrooms, lounge, libraries and corridors. B. Use shielded fixtures, which completely shield the lamp (lensed but not parabolic) in Kitchens. C. Use only metal halide fixtures for gymnasium lighting. Fluorescent lighting may be acceptable upon TUSD Engineering approval. D. Use vandal resistant fixtures in student toilet rooms and for all exterior lighting. E. Lensed fixtures shall use acrylic lenses at least .125" minimum (not nominal) thickness. F. Do not use wraparound style fixtures. G. Computer rooms shall have lighting designed to minimize glare. Indirect lighting should be used if ceiling height permits. H. Marker boards in computer rooms should have separately switched fixtures with asymmetrical distribution unless indirect lighting is used. Modern marker boards, which are very light in color, cause significant glare on computer screens.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 6 of 32

DIVISION 16

I. J.

Do not use paracube lenses. ALL FLOURSCENT LIGHTING SHALL BE T-8 WITH ELECTRONIC BALLASTS. T-5 AND T-6 FLOURSCENT LIGHTING ARE ALSO ACCEPTABLE. In general, fluorescent is the preferred light source for most areas except where dimming is required over small areas. Do not use 3', 6', or 8' lamps.

K. Four foot fluorescent lamps should be used wherever practical, except that the smaller 2700 K compact fluorescents (Philips PL, Osram Dulux, GE Biax etc) may be used where incandescents would otherwise be the logical choice. Where 2' fluorescent lamps are required use the larger compact fluorescents. It is expected that these will ultimately replace U-tubes and 2' T12 lamps. L. For compact fluorescent lamps the following sizes should be used to promote standardization: 9W 13W 13W 28W 40W Twin Tube Twin Double Twin Tube Double Twin Tube Twin Tube (22 ") G23 GX23 G14D1 G24D3 2G11 single end, 2 pin base single end, 2 pin base single end, 2 pin base single end, 2 pin base single end 4 pin base

M. For new fixtures or where new ballasts are installed in existing fixtures use 3050 lumen, 3500 K, T8 lamps, such as, Philips, F32T8/TL/835, Osram, F032W/835K or other approved equal, with electronics ballasts designed for T8 lamps. N. It is suggested that calculations for these lamps be based on 3050 initial lumens with a maintenance factor of 80% for prismatic lenses and 76% for deep cell parabolic louvers O. Electronic ballasts shall meet the following requirements: 1. 2. Rapid start type with heated cathode rather than the instant start type. All electronic type as opposed to hybrid electromagnetic/electronic type. The all electronic units typically have higher light output and higher efficiency. Total harmonic content shall be no greater than 20% to avoid overloading neutrals. Some electronic ballasts, such as, Advance's, operate without any discernible ballasts hum. These units should be used in preference to the noisier units to provide a calmer classroom environment. The use of quite ballasts is essential in special education rooms.

3. 4.

P. Special education classrooms shall be lit using fluorescent fixtures in the same way as other classrooms, except that ballasts shall be dimable, completely silent, and have no flicker, such as, those manufactured by Advance. Q. The silent operation will avoid problems with hearing impaired students who usually do not have as much hearing loss at low frequencies as at high frequencies, creating tendency for low frequency noise to mask speech frequencies they might otherwise be able to hear. The absence of flicker will reduce the likelihood of seizures for some with a Neurological disability. R. Three lamp fixtures shall use a master/slave ballast arrangement for the center lamps, with ballasts in one fixture controlling the center lamps in two fixtures. A master/slave arrangement shall also be used when it is desired to switch lamps separately in two lamp fixtures. S. Two lamp ballasts are more efficient than single lamps ballasts and generally operate quieter. Wiring between fixtures shall be in filed installed " flexible metal conduit. Factory installed whips tend to be too flimsy.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 7 of 32

DIVISION 16

T. Per the City of Tucson, it is also acceptable to install branch circuit wiring in the same flex conduit, such that, for a pair of fixtures there will be one piece of flex connecting to a branch circuit junction box and one piece of flex connecting the two fixtures. U. In attics, tunnels, normally unoccupied equipment rooms, storage rooms accessible only to outside of building and not heated, and similar spaces, incandescent lamps in porcelain lampholders are the appropriate light source. Provide a wall switch for porcelain fixtures. V. H.I.D. light sources should not be used for general indoor unless special permission is given by the Engineering department. When H.I.D. lighting is used in interior space, a secondary lighting system such as incandescent shall be provided for instant on capability. Emergency lighting in H.I.D. areas shall be designed with a time delay to permit restrike prior to extinguishing the emergency light. Incandescent/Quartz restrike systems for H.I.D. should not be used in lieu of separate "instant on" fixtures and time delay on the emergency lighting as the District's experience has shown them to be a high maintenance item. W. Provide night lights in corridors. These shall be located in a manner to minimize the use of 3-way and 4-way switching in the corridors. Corridor night lights shall be selected fixtures of the normal corridor light system. When unit emergency lighting equipment is used, the corridor night lights shall be the fixtures used for emergency lighting. If 3-lamp or 4-lamp fixtures are used in corridors, only 1 lamp should be operated as a night light with the other lamps connected to the normal light switches. When night lights are provided, a suitable switching means shall be provided to turn off the night lights to make a totally dark building interior when the building is vacant. This switch shall not disconnect power from any unit battery emergency equipment. 2.02.4 EMERGENCY LIGHTING

A. Emergency lighting for schools not having emergency generators shall use wall pack units separate from the normal light fixtures. The District has experienced short battery life with emergency ballasts used in normal fluorescent fixtures, and these units are typically not built so as to permit replacing batteries without replacing entire units at great expense. B. High schools and large campus style middle schools should use standby generator to provide power source for emergency egress lighting, if project budget can accommodate the cost. C. When a generator is used, light fixtures wired to the emergency system shall be identified in some manner to indicate that prompt relamping of such fixtures is mandatory. 2.02.5 PARKING LOT LIGHTING

A. Parking lot lighting shall be high pressure sodium type, except in Area "A" as defined by the Tucson and Pima County Light Pollution Codes, where low pressure sodium is required. B. Low pressure sodium may be used in other areas, if it results in a significant energy savings, but experience has shown in most situations that vertical lamp high pressure sodium fixtures give much better uniformity and result in less or only a little more wattage than low pressure sodium fixtures with fewer poles. C. Luminary height shall not exceed 30'-0". Concrete pole bases shall be raised at least 30" above finished grade. D. Parking lot lighting shall be designed for a minimum of 0.2 footcandles minimum with an average to minimum uniformity ratio of 6:1 to 10:1 or less. The maintained average shall be no more than 5 footcandles. E. Parking lot lights shall be controlled by EMCS system with photocell to prevent lights from operating during the day. If EMCS system is not available use photocell "on" electro-mechanical time control "off." In either case provide wind-up timer override in a location convenient to staff.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 8 of 32

DIVISION 16

2.02.6

BUILDING MOUNTED OUTDOOR LIGHT FIXTURES

A. Outdoor building mounted light sources shall be low pressure sodium type.

2.02.7

OUTDOOR LIGHTING CONTROL

A. Outdoor lighting on buildings shall be controlled by an EMCS. Spring wound timer over-ride shall be provided for parking lot lighting in a location convenient to the staff. Where EMCS is not available, photo-cell control shall be provided, with electro-mechanical time switch "off for parking lot lights. B. Outdoor lighting shall have a bypass switch provided in the main electrical equipment area or other area not normally accessible to other than maintenance staff. This by-pass switch shall be used to turn lights on during the day time for maintenance purposes. 2.02.8 DELAMPING OF EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURES

A. Information presented below is provided for those remodel projects, which do not have sufficient funding to permit complete replacement of the lighting fixtures. In many cases the existing lighting levels far exceed the recommended foot-candle values as stated above. When this is the case, it is intended that a de-lamping program be implemented to lower the foot-candle levels to the value stated in the standard manual. Except for slimline fixtures with disconnect type lamp holders the unused ballasts shall be disconnected from the circuit. B. When delamping four (4) lamp fixtures, consideration should be given to relocating sockets in addition to disconnecting one of the ballasts. Many four (4) lamp fixtures have provisions for two lamp socket locations and are easily modified. With others relocating sockets is difficult and not worth the trouble. C. Most existing three (3) lamp 2x4 fixtures are wired with double switching. When this is the case it may be possible to rework the switches to provide operation of either one (l) lamp or two (2) lamps, but not all three lamps. This arrangement is preferable to eliminating the center lamp from all fixtures. D. When existing 4' fixtures have energy saving ballasts, the existing ballasts may remain in place. When existing ballasts are not energy saving type then replace the ballasts with new electronic type for T8 lamps and retrofit T8 lamps to the fixtures, if sufficient funding exists. E. It is recommended that whenever possible 8' slimline strip fixtures be replaced with new lensed fixtures using 4' lamps. If not possible to eliminate the strip fixtures, consideration should be given to converting to one lamp per fixture and operating tandem pairs of 8', one lamp fixtures off one 2 lamp electronic ballast. F. In all cases an economic analysis should be done as the cost of retrofitting ballasts, relocating sockets, etc. could be higher than furnishing new fixtures. 2.02.9 EXISTING INCANDESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES

A. When existing incandescent fixtures are to be kept in operation and no dimming capability is required, retrofit with compact fluorescent adapters, which permit relamping without replacing the ballasts. Lumatech retrofit units meet this requirement. 2.03 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT A. Comply with National Electrical Code requirements (Articles 110-16 and 384-4 in particular). B. Preferred panel board locations are flush in corridor walls or surface in dedicated electrical space in electrical or mechanical equipment rooms. Do not install panels in storage or custodial rooms. Computer rooms, vocational
Rev. 01/01/2007 Electrical - 16 Page 9 of 32

DIVISION 16

and science classrooms, kitchens, and other rooms of similar nature may have the panel boards installed in the room when practicable to provide convenient control of equipment. When shunt trip EPO Systems are used the panel board shall be located in the same room. C. Service entrance and distribution equipment should be installed indoors, in equipment rooms. On rewire and remodel projects when no indoor space is available then service equipment may be installed outdoors. Outdoor services shall be switchboard construction, not gutter and switch layouts. D. Do not locate transformers or distribution panels on roofs. E. Do not locate dry type transformers where accessible to students or the general public. 2.04 DISCONNECTS AND CONTROLS A. Provide main breakers in all panel boards except when the panel board is located in the same room as the switchboard, which feeds it. B. Vocational (shop) classrooms shall have mushroom head, emergency power off (EPO) switches installed to trip a shunt-trip main breaker in the room's power panel. Lights shall not be tripped off by activating the EPO system. C. Provide a connector to interlock kiln power outlets with the exhaust fan for the kiln (the exhaust fan must be on in order for kiln to operate). D. If individual panels are provided in shop, science and cooking classrooms and similar rooms, refrigerators shall be circuited to separate panel (so refrigerators can operate when main breakers to room are off). E. Typing and similar rooms shall have master control switches installed at the room door (either toggle switches, remote control switch to connector or a dedicated panel in the room). Do not provide master switches in Computer Classrooms. F. Every switch except light switches shall have engraved nameplate to describe the switch function. 2.05 ELECTRICAL CAPACITY AND CIRCUIT LOADING A. Duplex receptacles as described in Paragraph 2.01 in classrooms shall be provided with a minimum of two 20 ampere circuits per classroom. B. In offices connect not more than four duplex or 4-plex receptacles per 20 ampere circuit. C. Each classroom or office circuit may also feed not more than one corridor, outdoor or storage/equipment room receptacle. D. In general, continuous lighting or motor loads shall not be connected to receptacle circuits. It is acceptable, however, to connect non-continuous lights such as closet or equipment room lights (not over 300W per circuit) to receptacle circuits, especially in 480/277V buildings. E. Panel board feeders shall be sized with 25% minimum spare capacity. F. It is anticipated that a significant amount of the actual receptacle loads will be computers and similar equipment. Consideration should be given to sizing feeder neutrals to 208Y/120V receptacles panels at 173% of phase leg sizes and transformers (if used) be suitable for non-linear loads. G. Service entrance and distribution centers shall be provided with spare breakers or fused switches (at least two 100A and one 200A at 208Y/120V in services in elementary schools, quantities to be determined for larger buildings).
Rev. 01/01/2007 Electrical - 16 Page 10 of 32

DIVISION 16

H. Provide a 200A, 208/120V, 3 phase, 4 wire feeder to an exterior gutter for portable classrooms at all school projects. This gutter to be located where accessible for portable classroom additions. A maximum of six classrooms can be connected to this gutter. Calculated load for this gutter shall be 200 amperes. I. Initial design of lighting and appliance branch circuit panel boards shall be made on the following basis: Panel Size 12 circuit 18 circuit 24 circuit 30 circuit 42 circuit J. Max. Circuits Connected 8 14 18 24 34 Min. Spares 4 4 6 6 8

20A-1P circuit breakers shall be provided for the spare circuits and it is intended that these spares shall be used for small remodel projects.

K. Flush panel boards shall have spare conduits stubbed out to attic, tunnel or accessible ceiling space on the basis of one 3/4" conduit per three spares or spaces plus at least one, L. 1" conduit on 200A and larger panels. 2.06 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SELECTION A. Electrical service and distribution systems shall normally be rated 208Y/120V and/or 480Y/277V, 3 phase, 4 wire. B. 480Y/277V systems should not be used for smaller buildings unless a major portion of the load will operate without transformation on the 277 or 480V circuits. Most evaporative cooled elementary schools will have too much 120V load to justify the 480/277V system. The Engineer shall select the most economical power system for the project. C. When 480Y/277V systems are used, utilization equipment shall be selected to minimize transformation. D. On high schools, primary voltage services may be continued in use or renovated if analysis proves this to be the most economical distribution method. New high schools should be designed using 480Y/277V power service rather than primary voltage, unless a significant life cycle cost savings can be proven for primary voltage. 4KV primary system shall be used not 14KV. E. It is recommended that service entrances be built with a single service disconnecting means rather than multiple mains and that the switchboard bus work on the line side of the main be as minimal as possible. Ground fault protection is desirable on all 480/277V services to minimize the damage due to arcing faults. Ground fault settings shall coordinate with 20A 277V lighting breakers for all possible magnitudes of ground fault current. 2.07 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Electrical drawings shall include the outlet and wiring layouts for all work, which the electrical contractor will install. B. When it is intended that conduit and wiring for HVAC controls be installed by the electrical contractor, that conduit and wiring layout shall be included in the electrical plans. Special attention shall be given to coordination of the supplying of starters.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 11 of 32

DIVISION 16

2.08

TELEPHONE AND DATA NETWORK OUTLETS AND RACEWAY SYSTEM A. Coordinate required locations of telephone and data network outlets with the site committee and/or users for each project. In addition, refer to Appendix B for additional outlet requirements. B. Construction projects shall provide outlet rough-ins, raceways and/or wire management system, plywood terminal boards, conduit or duct from telephone company service point at property line to the building, pull strings in conduits, blank cover plates for unused outlets, and other incidental and necessary work to prepare building for wiring installation. C. Wiring, outlet devices, terminations, equipment, etc., are excluded from the construction contract and will be furnished by Owner or by separate contractor. D. Outlets shall be 4" square x 2" deep minimum with one gang plaster ring. PROVIDE A DEDICATED 1FB TELCO PHONE LINE TO TERMINATEAT EACH SECURITY SYSTEM FOR ALARM SYSTEM COMMUNICATION PURPOSE ONLY. E. Provide 3/4" conduit with pull wire for all outlets. Run conduit to terminal board in central communications closet or stab to accessible ceiling space when wire management system, such as, cable tray, is provided through the ceiling spaces. It is not necessary to run the conduit continuously to the cable tray so long as the wiring can be neatly run in the above ceiling space to the tray. F. If practical, a cable tray or other suitable wire management system should be installed to collect all station cable homeruns and carry the cables to the central communications closet terminal board. If a cable tray or similar system is provided, it may also serve to support intercom and closed circuit television wiring in addition to the telephone and data network wiring. G. Provide separate outlet boxes for telephone and data in administrative areas (offices, nurse, kitchen, etc.). A single rough-in will provide dual telephone/data service in classrooms. In general, locate outlets at same mounting height as electrical outlets. H. Provide a main telephone terminal board (4'x8'x3/4" plywood, minimum) for each project. Locate in central communication closet. On large or multi-building project's satellite terminal boards should be provided for each building or area. Provided adequately sized raceways between buildings and also provide spare raceways. I. J. Provide telephone conduit to each Master EMCS controller. PROVIDE 3/4 X 4 X4X4' PLYWOOD DEDICATED FOR SECURITY SYSTEM EQUIPMENT. FIRE ALARM See Section 16721 for specific requirements. A. For small addition and partial remodel projects when the existing fire alarm system is not Class "A", the new work can be connected to the existing system but the conduit in the new work shall be laid out to permit future rewiring to make a Class "A" system.

2.09

2.10

INTERCOM See Section 16760 for specific requirements. A. On a renovation and remodel project consult with the Engineering Department and TUSD Maintenance to decide whether to reuse the existing equipment of replace the system.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 12 of 32

DIVISION 16

B. Partial remodel or addition projects on sites, which presently do not have intercom systems, shall have raceways roughed in for future intercom installation.

2.11

CLOCK See Section 16730 for specific requirements. A. On a renovation and remodel project consult with the Engineering Department and Maintenance to decide whether to reuse the existing equipment or replace the system. B. Partial remodel or addition project on sites, which presently do not have clock systems, shall have raceways roughed in for future clock installation.

2.12

SECURITY SYSTEM RACEWAY See Section 16770 for specific requirements. A. Provide conduit, wiring, and junction boxes for security system. Layout to be coordinated with TUSD electronics maintenance shop.

2.13

CLOSED CIRCUIT TV OUTLETS AND RACEWAY SYSTEM A. Coordinate required locations of closed circuit television (CCTV) outlets with the site committee and/or users for each project. In addition, refer to Appendix B for additional outlet requirements. B. Each site shall be evaluated to determine whether high-on-wall outlets should be provided (for built-in wall bracket television in each room) or low mounted (same as electrical outlets) outlets should be used (for plugging in portable televisions.) If middle and high schools anticipate taking advantage of the Whittle Channel, one program, then a permanent television would be mounted in each classroom and the CCTV outlets should be located approximately 6'0" AAF. If the school does not expect to take advantage of this program (and all elementary schools) then mount the CCTV outlets low to be convenient for portable television use. C. Always provide a 120V receptacle outlet adjacent to the CCTV outlet. This outlet can be connected to the normal receptacle circuits in the room. D. In addition to classrooms, provide CCTV outlets in principal's office, library, cafeteria, multi-purpose room, stage and any other location requested. E. A location shall be provided for CCTV head end equipment, generally in the library workroom. Provide cable TV service to this location. Provide at least one 4-plex receptacle on an individual circuit at this location. If Channel One is anticipated also provide location for satellite dish antenna with two (2), 1" conduits from head end to the antenna and grounding provisions for the antenna. F. No wiring shall be provided for the CCTV system, but outlets, raceways and wire management shall be provided. Each CCTV outlet shall have 4' 1/16" square x 2 " D box with one-gang plaster ring and blank stainless steel cover plate. Provide 3/4" conduit from outlet, which shall either loop from outlet to outlet or run from outlet up to a wire management system (cable tray) in ceiling space. Provide conduit access to head end equipment by home running the outlet conduits to the head end (if full conduit systems used) or via a 2" conduit from head end to the wire management system. If full conduit systems are sued there should be at least four separate home runs to the head end elementary schools with middle and high schools having one homerun per six classrooms. Other conduit arrangements may be acceptable when they provide equivalent access.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 13 of 32

DIVISION 16

2.14

SPECIALTY SOUND SYSTEMS See Section 16765 for speaker system requirements. A. Platforms and stages in auditoriums and multi-purpose rooms shall have sound systems installed. Coordinate type and scope with Engineering Department and the TUSD Electronic Department.

PART 3 - MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION 3.01 UNDERGROUND WIRING A. Provide raceways for all underground electrical circuits. B. Primary feeders and secondary power feeders installed on school property shall be concrete encased. Provide red dye in concrete. C. Underground circuits for lighting, low voltage circuits and temporary installation such as portable classrooms shall be direct buried raceways. D. Provide metalized plastic marker tape in trench approximately 12" below finished grade along full length of all underground circuits. E. Minimum burial depth of underground circuits outside of building is 24". 3.02 CONDUCTORS AND WIRING A. All conductors shall be copper. Conductor insulation shall be THW, THHN, THHW, THWN OR XHHW. B. All conductors for power and lighting, fire alarm and clock system shall be installed in approved raceway. C. All circuits shall be provided with an isolated ground. D. Color code conductors: System Phase A Phase B Phase C Neutral Equipment Ground Isolated Ground 3.03 APPROVED RACEWAYS A. Electrical wiring shall be installed in the following types of raceways: a. b. c. d. e. f.
Rev. 01/01/2007

120/208V Black Red Blue

277/480V Brown Orange Yellow

120/240V Black Orange Red White Green

White Gray Green Green Green with orange tracer

Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRC) Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit (PVC) Flexible Metallic Conduit (FLEX), steel only Liquid-tight Flexible Metallic Conduit (Seal Tight)
Electrical - 16 Page 14 of 32

DIVISION 16

B. Use only GRC, IMC, or PVC for underground circuits: a. b. GRC and IMC shall be tape wrapped. Use GRC or IMC for all bends and concrete penetrations when PVC is used.

C. Do not use PVC above grade or inside building above floor level. D. Connectors and couplers for EMT shall be steel (not die cast) compression type (set screw fittings are acceptable for 2-1/2 inch and larger EMT). E. Limit lengths of Flex and Seal Tight to 3- 0 unless special circumstances exist (6' fixture whips are acceptable). Fixture whips shall be constructed to same standards as any other flex. F. Connectors for Flex shall be 2 screw clamp type. G. Support all conduits at 5' 0" intervals and within 18" of box or termination. H. When installed exposed all conduit straps shall be 2 hole type. I. Use Wiremold or equal #500, #700 or #2100 surface metal raceway for exposed wiring in rewire work. (Verify with Engineering Department; some projects may use conduit). Do no use on Fire Alarm Systems. Do not run raceways above roofs without prior approval of the Engineering Department.

J.

K. Anchors which fasten devices, conduit and etc. to brick or masonry surface shall be metal expansion type with screws or bolts (plastic anchors and shot-in anchors are not acceptable). L. Anchors which fasten devices, conduit and etc to hallow, drywall or plaster walls shall be or a type that expands after it has entered the material (example: toggle, molly, etc.). Wood screws into solid wood framing or blocking are acceptable. M. Provide separate conduit systems for each system (do not combine intercom and clock, for example, in same raceway). 3.04 BOXES A. Minimum size 4" square x 1-1/2" deep for general use - do not use handy boxes. B. Boxes on Wiremold system shall be matching Wiremold boxes (or approved equal). C. Boxes in exposed wiring shall be cast type with threaded hubs when located below 8' 0" AFF in student or public areas. (Use FS/FD style not bell box). Do not use any stamped steel boxes with punched knockouts, when located below 8'0" AFF in student or public areas. D. Boxes in weatherproof areas shall be cast FS/FD style or when larger than 3 gang use standard sheet metal weatherproof boxes with screw on cover. E. All homerun boxes shall be identified with circuit number. F. Every box for special systems shall be identified by painting the color specified in other sections of this manual. G. Use waterproof marker to write identification on boxes. Also color code boxes when so required by other sections of this manual.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 15 of 32

DIVISION 16

3.05

WIRING DEVICES A. Use devices of quality equal to or exceeding the following: 1. 2. Switches: Hubbell #1221 Series 20A 120/277V. Duplex Receptacle: Hubbell #5252 Series 20A 125V (use #5352 20A 125V when only one receptacle per circuit).

B. On new work and total rewire projects use brown color devices. On partial remodel work match the most prevalent existing color. C. Device plates shall be P & S #302 satin finish stainless steel. Do not use plastic device plates. D. Conditioned power without isolated ground receptacles shall be gray color. E. Isolated ground receptacles shall be orange color. F. Receptacles and switches on emergency generator shall be red color. G. In utility tunnels and similar spaces light switches shall be glow handle type (glow when off) equal to Hubbell #1221-ILC, clear handle. H. Device plates on Wiremold system shall be stainless steel. 3.06 LIGHT FIXTURES A. Ballasts for fluorescent fixtures shall be saving type. (See Section 2.02.) B. Ballasts for 50W and larger H.I.D. fixtures shall be high power factor type. Provide HLR/GLR fusing for each H.I.D. ballast. C. Fixtures mounted surface over acoustic ceiling material shall be UL listed for installation on low density ceilings or shall be mounted on spacers at least 1-1/2" high. D. All fixtures shall be permanently and securely supported by the building structure. Do not allow suspended ceilings to be the support for fixtures. 3.07 DISTRIBUTION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT A. This section applies to panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, transformers, etc. B. Busbars shall be copper. C. Do not use load center type panels except for portable classrooms. D. Breakers in panels shall be as follows: 120/208/240V, 10,000 AIC 120/208/240V, over 10,000 AIC 277/480V Plug-on type Bolt-on type Bolt-on type

E. Panelboards shall have permanent circuit numbering, not adhesive attached numbers.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 16 of 32

DIVISION 16

F. Panelboards shall have metal or lexan plastic directory frames. Plastic pocket type is not acceptable. G. All distribution panels, switchboards and motor control centers shall have permanent nameplates installed describing each circuit. H. All floor mounted equipment shall be mounted on 4" high housekeeping pads. I. J. Do not use "pull-out" style disconnects. Panel boards shall have a main breaker unless the upstream feeder over-current device is located in the same room as the panel.

K. Provide a ground bar in all panels. Ground the panel with a copper wire sized per NEC Table 250-95 run to the system main ground. L. Provide an isolated (insulated) ground bar in all receptacle panels. This ground bar shall have an isolated ground wire run with the panel feeder and it shall originate at the service main ground or the 208Y/120V transformer secondary ground when the building service is 480Y/277V. Minimum size isolated ground wire is #6 copper. 3.08 FUSES A. If fuses other than Class H, RK-5, RK-1 or L are used, provide at least two spare sets of each type and ampere rating to maintenance department. B. If class RK-1 fuses are specified and required to provide current limiting short circuit protection for lower rated downstream equipment provided a permanent sign on the exterior of the switch stating "CAUTION, Replace fuses only with current limiting class RK-1 type of same rating." 3.09 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Receptacle outlets for wall mounted electric drinking fountains shall be mounted inside the unit. B. Provide flex conduit connection to all permanently installed equipment. C. Provide disconnecting means at all equipment. 3.10 TESTING A. All feeders shall be tested for insulation integrity with a 500V megger. B. Test polarity of all receptacle outlets. C. Verify A-B-C phase rotation at all service, distribution, disconnecting, etc. equipment. PART 4 - PORTABLE CLASSROOMS 4.01 GENERAL A. Due to temporary nature of portable classroom installation, certain temporary aspects and methods may be utilized providing they meet the National Electrical Code. 4.02 CONDUIT A. Schedule 40 PVC conduit (Power, 2" minimum) (Fire Alarm and Intercom 1" minimum) shall be used for underground runs from portable to portable. Concrete encasement not required. PVC may not run exposed from
Rev. 01/01/2007 Electrical - 16 Page 17 of 32

DIVISION 16

trench up to connected point on building. Rigid, ten (10)-mil wrapped on buried portion, shall be used above grade to connected point on portable. 4.03 REQUIRED SYSTEMS A. The below listed systems shall have individual PVC conduits run to each portable classroom: 1. 2. 3. 4. Power (normally 125A 120/208V or 120/240V single phase, to each single classroom portable or 200A 120/208 or 120/240 single phase to each double classroom portable.) Fire Alarm Intercom Raceway for telephone/data

4.04

PERMANENT BUILDING PROVISIONS REQUIRED A. Each site shall provide a permanent electrical connection point for electrical services, located on the building exterior wall for connection of portable classrooms. B. The electrical connection point shall consist of a gutter or circuit breaker panel board for power, a junction box for fire alarm, a junction box for telephone/data and a junction box for intercom. All such boxes shall be grouped together and shall be located such that when portables are installed circuits can run from the boxes to the trench to the portables. C. Provide a 200A 208Y/120V, 3 phase, 4 wire feeder to the electrical connection point. This will provide service for up to six (6) classrooms. (On single phase or 480Y277V sites equivalent capacity shall be provided.) D. Provide one Class "A" fire alarm zone and one Class "A" fire alarm signal circuit to the fire alarm connection point. This zone and circuit shall be dedicated for the portables. E. Provide six (6) intercom circuits to the intercom connection point. F. Provide one 1" conduit from telephone/data source or wire management system to the telephone/data connection point. G. The location of the connection point shall be that which will most likely be central to the anticipated portable classroom location. H. On remodel projects, any existing portable classrooms shall be connected to connection point as described above. I. J. If more than six (6) classrooms are planned at a site then provide sufficient capacity as required. If portables are installed at more than one location on-site then provide suitable permanent connection points for each location.

PART 5 - OBSOLETE EQUIPMENT 5.01 GENERAL A. Equipment and methods described herein are considered obsolete. When scope of remodel project is a complete renovation, all equipment of the types described shall be replaced or updated to comply with Parts 1,2, 3, 4 and 6 of this section.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 18 of 32

DIVISION 16

5.02

OBSOLETE EQUIPMENT 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. Rubber insulated branch circuit wire. Ungrounded electrical systems. Non-grounded electrical outlets. Knob-and Tube, Romex or BX wiring. Non-weatherproof equipment installed outdoors. Plug fuse panelboards. "Multi-breaker" panelboards. Circuit breaker panelboards installed prior to 1960. Fusible switchboards of the "hinged cover" type. Over 600V non-shielded cables. Any distribution equipment of inadequate interrupting capacity. Snap type toggle switches or push button light switches. Plastic device cover plates. Incandescent light fixtures for general illumination. Mercury vapor exterior light fixtures. Fire Alarm other than "Class A". Minute-Impulse or carrier current clock system. Vacuum tube operated intercom or specialty sound system.

PART 6 - APPROVED MANUFACTURERS 6.01 GENERAL The following listed manufacturers are pre-approved. 6.02 LIGHT FIXTURES: A. Fluorescent, General: Lithonia, Prudential, Keystone, Columbia, Metalux, Gibson, Daybrite, KLP. B. Incandescent, Specialty: Lithonia, Marco, Visa, Prescolite, Halo, Lightolier. C. H.I.D.: Lithonia, Kim, Nuart, Sterner, GE, McGraw Edison, Trimble House, EMCO, Gardco, Moldcast, Hadco. D. Emergency: Lithonia, Dualite, Surelights, use metal cased units, do not use ni-cad batteries. E. Exit Signs: EXILITE, Flashing L.E.D. type. Do not substitute without prior approval of Tucson Unified School District's Electronics Department. 6.03 WIRING DEVICES A. Hubbell, P & S, GE, Bryant, Leviton 6.04 DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT A. GE, Square "D", Siemens ITE, Westinghouse 6.05 FIRE ALARM A. Simplex, Autocall, EST

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 19 of 32

DIVISION 16

6.06

INTERCOM A. Dukane, Rauland, Simplex, VALCOM

6.07

CLOCK A. Master Clock: Rauland, Simplex, Dukane B. Secondary Clocks: Simplex, Cincinnati, American

6.08

SPECIALTY SOUND SYSTEM A. Dukane, Rauland, Bose, Altec, Ramsa

SECTION 16721 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL (SECTION 16721) 1.1 A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The fire alarm system shall in its entirety satisfy the national fire code and all state and local codes current at time of construction. It shall be a standard manual/addressable type system utilizing pull stations, heat detectors, duct detectors, strobe lights and signaling horns. Resetable heat detectors will be accepted in storage and mechanical areas. We will only accept Ionization-type smoke detectors unless unavailable by manufacturer. This exception must be supported by manufacturer documentation. If documentation provided, or if code specifies, photoelectric-type smoke detectors may be used. All equipment shall be U.L. approved, and of one manufacturer where possible, and achieve T.U.S.D. goals. All equipment shall be U.L. approved, and of one manufacturer where possible, and achieve TUSD goals. It shall be installed as a fully supervised electrically Class "A" system. All devices used within the system shall contain four screw terminals to accommodate the four-wire system. All devices excluding smoke and heat detectors shall be red in color. The fire alarm panel shall be located in a supervised area under constant surveillance of administrators and office staff. It is the intent that administrators and offices staff are aware of its condition at all times, and have the capability of operating its controls. If an annunciator panel is required, it shall be located within the building in the most likely area that the fire department would enter during a fire condition. Special attention shall be given to the design to insure a vandal-proof installation. When a fire sprinkler system is utilized within a school, it shall be connected to the fire alarm system. Flow switches shall be installed where required and sound alarm when water is flowing within the pipe. Water supply valves shall be supervised with tamper switches to indicate trouble when valve is not in the fully opened position. Universal type tamper switches not to be used for new installations. Water valves shall be locked in the open position. Omit heat detectors when fire sprinkler system is used. When an intercom system is utilized with a school, it shall be connected to the fire alarm system. (The function of the intercom will be to provide a supplemented fire signal through all speakers during alarm
Electrical - 16 Page 20 of 32

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

Rev. 01/01/2007

DIVISION 16

condition.) The fire alarm shall have the capability of silencing the fire horns and the intercom speakers simultaneously with one switch activation and the panel not yet reset. The wiring from the fire alarm panel to the intercom equipment shall be the responsibility of the fire alarm contractor. I. The fire alarm panel shall have the capability to supply alarm and trouble signals to a security panel by the use of dry contacts. The wiring from the fire alarm panel to the security alarm equipment shall be the responsibility of the fire alarm contractor. Install a dedicated conduit from each fire alarm panel to the closest security panel with a four (4)-conductor cable installed. The fire alarm panel shall have the capability of indicating ground faults within zone wiring by illuminating the amber lamp on the panel ground fault indicator. The fire alarm panel shall have line voltage protection. The fire alarm panel shall be of modular concept. The panel shall have zone disconnect capability. The panel shall contain spare zone and signal modules that are interchangeable with active modules in case of a module failure. The spares shall equal 25% of the number of specific type of zone and signal modules. The numbers shall be rounded to the next full number to determine how many spare modules are necessary. One dedicated initiation zone, and one signal circuit shall be supplied for future portable classroom installation. TUSD will give location (s) of interconnect boxes. The fire alarm system shall be powered from a dedicated 120 volt AC circuit. The circuit breaker shall possess a lock so it cannot accidentally be turned off. It shall be clearly marked in the fire alarm panel as to its location. At the point the circuit leaves the building, a weatherproof box shall be provided of adequate size to house a surge suppressor for each circuit. Surge suppressors shall be included in all new installations for all circuits leaving and entering buildings. The system shall contain battery backup power for a period of five (5) minutes of alarm, and twenty-four (24) hours on stand-by mode. The batteries shall be rechargeable and be of a gel cell type. The panel shall contain a battery charger to insure fully powered batteries at all times. It shall be supervised and indicate system trouble when the batteries are not capable of supplying power under demand. The batteries shall be sized according to the National Fire Code. A floor plan map of the school shall be made, and references made to zone location wording and to geographic location within the school. The map shall be color-coded and correspond building to map in the direction in which it is mounted. The map shall be protected by a glassed frame securely fastened to the wall in the immediate area of the fire alarm panel. If an annunciator panel is used, a similar map shall be furnished and mounted in the immediate area of the enunciator. If the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) is replaced or for new construction, install a conduit for a network drop from the FACP to the Main Communications closet. Pull Cat5E (Enhanced) type cable in the conduit.

J.

K.

L.

M.

N.

O.

P.

Q.

1.2

SYSTEM OPERATION The activation of any fire alarm pull station, heat detector, smoke detector or water flow switch circuit shall cause the following to happen: a. Sound a fire signal through all horns and sounding devices and illuminate all visual alarm signals (general alarm). It shall continue sounding until manually silenced at the fire alarm panel.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 21 of 32

DIVISION 16

b. c. d.

Illuminate the control panel (red) lamp indicating the zone that initiated the alarm. Illuminate the enunciator panel (red) lamp indicating the zone that initiated the alarm. Release any door holders allowing fire doors to close and release any powered door latches so doors can be opened. Shutdown or redirect the HVAC system within the school if found to be necessary to comply with fire and building safety codes. Remote LEDs will be installed when duct detectors are mounted above ceilings. HVAC fans will only restart when the FACP is reset. Bypass for HVAC shall release the units when the system is in alarm condition.

e.

The system shall be fully supervised and cause the following to happen: a. When a ground fault occurs within the fire alarm panel or field wiring, it shall illuminate the panel (amber) ground fault lamp. Also, a local sounding device within the panel only shall sound, indicating a trouble condition. When an open circuit occurs within zone wiring, the amber zone module lamp shall illuminate, indicating which zone the open occurred, as well as the system trouble amber lamp. Also, a local sounding device within the panel only shall sound, indicating a trouble condition. When the battery backup supply has become inadequate to power the system, the system trouble amber lamp shall illuminate. Also, a local sounding device within the panel only shall sound, indicating a trouble condition. Indication shall be given at the fire alarm panel when A.C. power to the fire alarm panel has been removed.

b.

c.

d.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (SECTION 16721) 2.1 A. EQUIPMENT Equipment for fire alarm system shall be manufactured by Simplex, or TUSD approved equal. TUSD has standardized the brand and type of fire alarm systems used throughout the District for cost efficiency, safety and maintenance reasons, as allowed under R7-1102, C. All components shall be by the same manufacturer. The fire alarm control panel shall be of solid-state design and of modular concept. The fire alarm equipment shall be housed in a cabinet with a lockable front door access. It shall be surface or semi-flush mounted at eye level. It shall have a control section mounted on or part of the motherboard. Pluggable control module is acceptable. It shall contain integral static protection. It shall have controls that will accomplish trouble silence, alarm silence, and system reset. It shall be basically a low voltage system. All control functions (modules) signal devices (horns and bells) initiating devices (pull stations and heat detectors) shall be operated with low voltage. It shall possess a resound function. Upon loss of A.C. power, it shall release any powered door latches. The panel shall consist of one or more pluggable signal modules. The signal modules shall not be loaded to more than 85% of its designed current capability. The signal module shall have an amber trouble indicator that will illuminate when trouble exists in the module or field wiring.

B. C.

D.

E.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 22 of 32

DIVISION 16

F.

The panel shall consist of one or more pluggable zone modules. The zone module shall have a red lamp that will illuminate, indicating alarm condition when a device within that zone wiring is activated. The zone module shall also have an amber lamp that will illuminate when trouble occurs within that module or within field wiring. The panel shall have pluggable relay modules or relay action that is built into the motherboard that will provide terminals to control HVAC shutdown, door release, and external alarm and trouble signals. The panel shall have pluggable battery monitor/charger module or built into the motherboard, that function which will monitor the capacity of the batteries as well as keeping them fully powered. The panel shall have a bypass switch that will bypass the HVAC shutdown function. The switch shall have two positions that are clearly identified (normal and bypassed). When the switch is in the bypass position, it shall cause an amber lamp to illuminate and cause system trouble.

G.

H.

I.

PART 3 EXECUTION (SECTION 16721) 3.1 FIELD WIRING Field wiring for hardwired systems shall be color-coded and be consistent throughout the entire installation. These colors shall be used: Red and Black Yellow and Blue Orange and Brown White and Violet = = = = signal devices (horns, bells and visual indicating devices.) initiating devices (pull station and heat detectors) flow and tamper switches auxiliary (door release/door latch release and HVAC shutdown, and etc.)

a. b.

Use color-coded wire insulation. Do not use colored tape to re-identify wire(s). Any wire pulled from a spool and used external to the F.A.C.P. shall be considered field wiring and shall match by the colors of this section. Any wire used within the F.A.C.P. for interconnection shall not use the same colors as the field wiring without the District's consent. Any situation that may arise that color of wire is not clearly specified, the contractor shall contact the District for clarification prior to installing the wire. For addressable systems, only data cable approved by the manufacturer shall be used. Unless otherwise noted, all conduit for fire alarm shall be a minimum of in diameter. All non-exposed fire alarm conduit shall be red in color (fire alarm conduit). The conduit pipe that contains the field wiring shall be installed in two (2) dedicated runs (leaving loop and returning loop), except underground, stubs down to devices, and at the fire alarm panel. At no time shall any zone wires leaving the panel share the same conduit as wires returning. Conductors shall be #14 AWG solid. Insulation shall be type "THHN", except when run below grade use "THW", "XHHW" or UF insulation. Junction boxes shall be sized so that when covered, the wires occupy only 50% of the box area. Extension boxes bolted to back boxes to achieve sufficient depth are not acceptable. (Boxes must reasonably be capable of housing twice the number of wires.) All junction and pull boxes and their covers shall be painted red. Boxes shall be painted red prior to installation. (Boxes painted after their installation is not an acceptable sequence.)

c.

d.

e.

f.

g.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 23 of 32

DIVISION 16

h. i. j.

No junction box, pull box, and auxiliary box shall be without cover. All boxes installed outside in open air surrounding shall be weatherproof. All back boxes for devices (pull stations, heat detectors, and etc.) shall be appropriate boxes as designated by manufacturer. (Extension boxes bolted to back boxes to achieve sufficient depth are not acceptable. All back boxes with more than eight (8) splices shall have terminal strip. All flex shall be no more than three (3) feet long and shall have a green ground wire installed. All conduit shall be installed in a professional manner. No conduit will be installed on or above roof surface without the District's approval. All conduit shall be fastened with two hole straps when fastened to flat surfaces.

k.

l.

m. All metal conduit shall have electrical continuity back to the F.A.C.P. Connectors and couplers for EMT shall be steel (not die cast) compression type (set screw fittings are acceptable for 2-1/2 inch and larger EMT). Wire mold raceway, shall not to be used. n. Wiring carrying high voltage (120V AC) and wiring carrying low voltage (24 VAC) shall not share the same conduit. Anchors, which fasten devices, conduit, and etc., to brick or masonry surface, must be metal expansion type with screws (plastic anchors are not acceptable). Anchors, which fasten devices, conduit and etc., to hollow, dry or plaster walls, must be of a type that expands after it has penetrated the material (example: toggle, molly, and etc.) (Wood screws into solid wood framing or backing are acceptable).

o.

p.

3.2

TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE A. The State Fire Marshall, or the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), in conjunction with TUSD personnel, shall conduct a complete and thorough test to insure that the system will satisfy all the requirements of the national and state fire codes, as well as TUSD standard. The test and acceptance shall be scheduled at a time when students are not present, and with least amount of interruption to staff personnel. B. After the State Fire Marshall, or the AHJ and TUSD personnel are satisfied that the installation meets all requirements, an instructional session shall be scheduled with the principal and office staff concerning the operation and the function of all controls. C. Copies of the test procedures shall be given to the general, electrical and fire alarm contractors, so pretesting can guarantee passage of all functions of the installation. D. Pretesting shall be a mandatory requirement of the Contractor and should include an inspection of wire color, coding and conduit system. The Contractor is responsible to provide TUSD advance notice of pretests that affords TUSD an opportunity to observe the pretest procedures. If excessive deficiencies are found at the time of the scheduled test due to the Contractor's failure to provide comprehensive pretesting, the Contractor shall be liable for the cost of lost man-hours. (Refer to Subparagraph "l" below.) The following test procedures will be performed: a. Fire alarm system will be tested on battery operation for a period of five (5) minutes (A.C. power removed).

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 24 of 32

DIVISION 16

b. c. d.

e.

f.

g. h. i.

j. k.

All sprinkler flow switches will be tested to verify that they will create alarm condition and sound fire horns. All sprinkler tamper switches will be tested to verify that they will create a trouble condition in the zone module. At random, wiring to initiating and signaling circuits will be tested for ground faults. (Ground faults will be simulated to verify that the panel will detect and indicate ground fault trouble condition). In every initiating active zone, wires will be completely separated from an initiating device to verify that the panel will indicate trouble; then alarm will be initiated from that same zone, from a different pull station to insure the fire horns will still sound. In addressable systems, every initiation loop will be tested for shorted, and open circuits indication, and for ground fault condition In every signaling active zone, wires will be completely separated from the signaling device to verify that the panel will indicate trouble; then alarm will be initiated to insure that the remaining fire horns will still sound. The enunciator panel will be tested for proper operation, and the wiring will be tested for supervision. Any HVAC shutdown and door/latch release shall be tested to confirm proper operation. The fire-signaling module in the intercom will be tested to insure that it will sound over all speakers upon an alarm condition. It will also be tested to verify that it will silence when the fire panel is silenced with one switch activation and panel not yet reset. A visual inspection of conduit and wiring will be made (to insure conduit separation of loop wiring and no "T" taps exist). Also, all junction and pull boxes are covered and painted red. It is the responsibility of the general contractor previous testing and assurance from the electrical, alarm, and sprinkler contractors guarantee that these test procedures are satisfied. The initial test and one additional test, if found to be necessary, are to be considered as part of the installation. Any tests that are required thereafter, a charge of three hundred dollars per test will be charged to the general contractor. Any monies received shall be placed in the contingency fund. If testing is discontinued as a result of the Contractor's failure to pretest the system resulting in excessive deficiencies, the scheduled test shall qualify as the initial test under this section.

l.

SECTION 16730 - CLOCK SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND CONDITIONS A. The clock system shall consist of a master clock located in the office area. The master clock shall also be connected to the intercom system for purpose of initiating class change tone signals. B. Battery operated clocks are acceptable as secondary clocks. Battery operated clocks shall be a C-cell type and have a three (3) year warranty on the movement. C. Secondary clocks shall be provided in classrooms, multi-purpose rooms, kitchen, conference rooms, workroom, lounge, nurse's office, main office, principal's office and other areas where required. D. If school does not have MAIN CORRIDOR OR EXTERIOR INTERCOM SPEAKERS, bells in main corridors and on the exterior of the building shall be installed, AS REQUIRED TO ENSURE TOTAL COVERAGE.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 25 of 32

DIVISION 16

E. If a school with an existing master clock system is scheduled to receive a new intercom system the possibility of connecting the existing clock to the intercom should be evaluated. Consequences should be reviewed with the TUSD Senior Staff prior to committing to interconnection. F. The system shall be purchased as a completely installed operating system, with a warranty period of TWO (2) years (material and labor) from the date of Substantial Completion. The material shall be new and free from defects. G. Replacement component parts shall be made available locally, for purchase by T.U.S.D. technicians after the warranty period has expired. H. Service information and schematics with parts breakdown shall be supplied for the master clock and secondaries. It shall be supplied at the time of acceptance to the T.U.S.D. Maintenance Department. I. Instructional sessions shall be conducted by the vendor to familiarize staff in the operation of the system. A complete instruction manual shall be provided at the time of acceptance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. Master clocks shall be manufactured by RAULAND , Simplex, Dukane or TUSD approved equal. Secondary clocks shall be manufactured by Simplex, Cincinnati, American or TUSD approved equal. B. The system shall be wired synchronous type and operate from 120 volts AC. It shall be hard-wired between the master and all secondaries. C. The master clock shall be of solid state design and of digital type. It shall have hourly and twelve-hour correction modes, which will synchronize the secondaries to itself. Hourly correction shall be accomplished at the 57:54 minute after each hour, when 120 volts AC is present on the correction line for eight seconds. D. Twelve-hour correction shall be accomplished at 57:54 minute after 5:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. (twice daily), when 120 volts AC is present on the correction line for fourteen seconds. (The correction line only has voltage present during the correction modes.) E. The master clock shall be programmable to interface to the intercom tone system. It shall have a minimum of four separate circuits, which will sound the intercom tone system in the classrooms. It shall have the capability of storing additional schedules in memory. IT SHALL ALSO BE CAPABLE OF CONTROLLING VOLTAGE TO THE BELLS AS NEEDED, AS DESCRIBED IN THE "GENERAL". F. The master clock shall have battery backup power, which will maintain memory and time during power outage. G. Secondary clocks shall be analog type, wall mounted, twelve inch round, which are operated from 120 volt source. The movement shall be compatible with the master clock to respond to all correction signals. PHYSICAL MOUNTING OF CLOCKS SHALL BE DESIGNED TO FACILITATE EASY REMOVAL. NO MODIFICATIONS TO MANUFACTURER'S MOUNTING DESIGN SHALL BE ALLOWED. CLOCKS AND MOUNTING RECEPTACLES MUST BE COMPATIBLE. H. Provide wire guards on clocks installed in gymnasium and similar areas.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 26 of 32

DIVISION 16

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD WIRING A. All electrical wiring shall be installed according to the National Electrical Code. Use #12 AWG conductors installed in raceway. B. Field wiring shall be color coded and consistent throughout the entire installation. These colors to be used: 1. 2. 3. Black White Red = 120 volts AC = Neutral = Correction

C. (Tape applied to the end of wire to indicate color is not acceptable.) D. All field wiring shall connect to secondary clock through connectors (plugs and jacks). Do not wire-nut FIELD WIRING DIRECTLY TO CLOCKS. E. All junction and pull boxes and their covers shall be painted blue. Boxes shall be painted blue prior to their installation. (Boxes painted after their installation are not acceptable.) F. ALL CIRCUITS FOR MASTER CLOCKS AND SECONDARY CLOCKS SHALL BE DEDICATED AND IDENTIFIED. G. All conduit shall be installed per Section 16000. No conduit shall be installed on or above roof surface without the District's approval. H. All metal conduit shall be fastened with two hole straps, when fastened to flat surfaces. I. Anchors, which fasten devices, conduit, and etc., to brick or masonry surface shall be metal expansion type with screws (plastic anchors are not acceptable). Anchors, which fasten devices, conduit, and etc., to hollow, dry or plaster walls shall be of a type that expands after it has penetrated the material. (Example: toggle, molly, and etc.) (Wood screws into solid wood framing or blocking are acceptable.)

J.

SECTION 16760 - INTERCOM SYSTEM


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND CONDITIONS A. The intercom system shall be a two-way voice communication system, between control HANDSETS, located in the office area, and remote stations. (Classrooms, multi-purpose room, kitchen, conference rooms, workroom, lounge, custodian's work room, main boiler room, nurse's office and any other area where required.) B. For paging, time tone and emergency tone signal provide speakers in corridors, public and student toilet rooms, and building exterior (air towards playground and student entrances). C. The system shall be a hard wire manually operated system, of solid state design. It shall be comprised of various types of electronic component equipment, that when interfaced together satisfy the general requirements of the system. THE SYSTEM CONTROL CONSOLE CABINET SHALL BE LOCATED IN THE BUILDING COMMUNICATIONS ROOM.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 27 of 32

DIVISION 16

D. The system shall be purchased as a completely installed operating system with a warranty period of two years (material and labor) after the date of Substantial Completion. The materials shall be new and free from defects and of one manufacturer when possible. A list of all component equipment (manufacture and model numbers) used to make up the system shall be supplied as part of the purchase Agreement. Installation shall be according to intercom standards and satisfy these guidelines. E. Replacement component parts shall be made available locally, for purchase by T.U.S.D. technicians after the warranty period has expired. F. Service information and schematics with parts breakdown shall be supplied on every piece of component equipment that is interfaced to become a complete system. It shall be supplied at time of acceptance to the T.U.S.D. Maintenance Department. G. Instructional sessions shall be conducted by the vendor to familiarize school staff in the operation of the system. A complete instruction manual shall be provided to school staff at time of acceptance.

1.02

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The system primary function shall be two-way voice communications, between office staff and classroom personnel. This function shall be referred to as IC function. B. The system shall be capable of voice communications to all stations simultaneously (either from a HANDSET, microphone or front panel speaker). This function shall be referred to as all call. C. The system shall generate and distribute an intermittent supervisory tone signal to any speaker being monitored. This function shall be referred to as supervisory function. D. In an emergency situation the system shall have the capability of communicating an emergency voice message to all stations simultaneously by one switch activation. The switch activation shall override all function and switch modes and allow the message to be transmitted through the system. This shall be referred to as emergency functions. E. The system shall be capable of generating and initiating a single tone throughout the system or pre-selected areas. A push button switch on the face of the control console shall control the tone length in time. The switch shall be identified as custodian call. This function shall be referred to as custodian call. F. The system shall be capable of interfacing with a master clock system to provide MINIMUM OF six different time tone circuits that are programmable. It shall receive signals from the master clock and initiate chimes or tones for predetermined length of time in pre-selected stations, as preprogrammed in the clock system. This function shall be referred to as master clock interface. G. The system shall be capable of interfacing with the fire alarm system. It shall generate and provide a supplement fire signal throughout every speaker or horn regardless of speaker selector switch position, when the fire alarm is activated. This function shall be referred to as fire alarm interface function. H. The system shall contain a 5-disc Compact Disc player. Its output shall interface with the program amplifier and speaker selector boards. The signal shall be capable of pre-monitoring from a monitor speaker before distribution. This function shall be referred to as a program function.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. Equipment shall be manufactured by TERADON CORP, DUKANE, SIMPLEX, or TUSD approved equal
Rev. 01/01/2007 Electrical - 16 Page 28 of 32

DIVISION 16

B. The control console shall consist of various electronic component equipment that when interfaced together will perform all functions mentioned in the general requirements section. C. The control console cabinet shall be WALL MOUNT or floor model depending on individual application. It shall have accessible service panels or rear service door and proper ventilation provisions. D. The control console shall be pre-wired to contain a pigtail of multi-conductor cables from the speaker selection boards to the junction box. The pigtail shall be sufficient in length to allow the console to be placed in a service position and the pigtail still connected. E. The control console CPU shall have the capability to connect to the districts computer network for the purpose of remote programming and diagnostics. If the control console CPU does not have the capability to connect to the districts computer network, then a Virtual Serial Device Server manufactured by TIBBO Technologies (model DS202R) shall be supplied for communications. F. The control console shall have installed an UPS/Line conditioner for AC circuit protection and power outages. G. The SYSTEM will be capable of distributing a MINIMUM of six time tone circuits. The time tone circuits shall be programmable and interface with the master clock system. H. The system shall contain amplifiers, which when interfaced will accomplish the general requirement. a. b. c. Amplifiers shall be used for IC communications. Amplifiers shall be used to convey the all call, emergency messages, and custodial call. Amplifiers shall be used to convey the time tone (chimes) to the classrooms and all other designated areas.

I. J.

All amplifiers shall be sized in wattage according to the size of the system. All system components shall be sized to provide for 25% future expansion of INTERCOM STATIONS.

K. The system shall incorporate signal modules that electronically generate chimes (start, end, and class change), fire signal (supplement to fire alarm), and custodial call (request for custodian). These modules shall utilize appropriate amplifiers to accomplish their function. L. The system shall incorporate power supplies to adequately power all equipment within the system. Power strips shall be used to distribute incoming AC power. All power supplies and strips shall be located inside the console. M. Remote stations shall be as follows: a. b. c. Classroom speakers shall be wooden wall baffles, containing 8" speakers and programmable tap transformers. These baffles to be surface mounted. Hall speakers shall be EIGHT (8) INCH SPEAKERS with programmable tap transformers in vandal proof enclosures. The enclosures should be mounted to be effective and deter vandals. Outside speakers shall be horns with built-in transformer taps protected in vandal proof enclosures. They shall be mounted to be effective and completely out of reach of the roofs or areas that are accessible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD WIRING.

A. All remote station wiring shall be HOME RUNS. EACH REMOTE STATION WIRE SHALL BE 4-PAIR 24 GAUGE CAT 5 COMPUTER CABLE Where practical and convenient home runs will join to a multi-cable, and
Rev. 01/01/2007 Electrical - 16 Page 29 of 32

DIVISION 16

be carried to the control console. If multi-cables are installed, there shall be a separate cable for all speaker pairs and a separate cable for all call-in pairs. All multi-cable shall begin and terminate in junction boxes sized to accommodate the number of pairs. SYSTEM PAIRS SHALL BE TERMINATED TO TELEPHONE PUNCHDOWN BLOCKS AND IDENTIFIED,. No wire nut connections will be accepted. B. All intercom cable shall be in conduit or raceway when exposed in student occupied areas. Wiring that has District's approval, which is run in attics or tunnels, shall be loomed. The looms shall be in close proximity of the roof, when in the attic, and to the ceiling, when in the tunnels. It shall be so installed as not to hinder service from other trades. C. There shall be no wiring installed that is directly exposed to the weather (sun and rain). D. All wiring from the main building to portables shall be run underground in P.V.C. piping. E. No junction box, pull box, or auxiliary box shall be without cover. F. All boxes installed outside in open-air surroundings shall be weatherproof. G. All conduits shall be installed in a professional manner. No conduit shall be installed on or above roof surface without the District's approval. H. All conduit or raceway shall be fastened with two hole straps when fastened to flat surfaces. I. All intercom junction, pull boxes, and their covers shall be painted green in color so as to be identified as part of the intercom system. Boxes shall be painted prior to their installation. (Painting of these boxes after installation will not be acceptable.) a. Anchors that fasten devices, conduit, and etc., to brick or masonry surface shall be metal expansion type with screws (plastic anchors are not acceptable). Anchors that fasten devices, conduit and etc., to hollow, dry or plaster walls shall be of a type that expands after it has penetrated the material (example: toggle, molly, and etc.) (Wood screws into solid wood framing or blocking are acceptable.)

b.

3.02

TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE A. Service panels shall be removed and all component equipment listed on purchase Agreement shall be pointed out by the vendor, as to its location. This will confirm all purchased components are present and incorporated within the system. B. The performance of every function listed in the general requirements shall be tested to confirm that they conform to these guidelines. C. A general inspection shall be conducted to verify that professional workmanship was used during the installation and trade standards observed.

SECTION 16765 - SPEAKER SPECIFICATION - MULTI-PURPOSE ROOM

A. The Multi-Purpose Room sound system shall be a 70volt distributed sound system consisting of a metal enclosure, suspended ceiling bridge (where applicable), speaker and baffle.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 30 of 32

DIVISION 16

B. The metal enclosure shall be Atlas/Soundolier Model Q408, QS408, or approved equal. Enclosure shall be of welded construction and shall have a volume of 1 cu. ft. Interior of enclosure shall be undercoated and lined with 1-1/2" thick fiberglass with a 1-1/2 lb/cu. ft. density. C. Enclosure shall have four combination 1/2"-3/4"-1" knockouts and shall incorporate a plaster flange for mounting Atlas/Soundolier T-Bridge model 81-8R and Atlas/Soundolier loudspeaker baffle model 62-8 or approved equal. D. The speaker shall be Atlas/Soundolier 8" dia. loudspeaker/transformer combination Model C803A-T70 The lowfrequency reproducer cone shall be a full 8" in diameter and the high frequency reproducer cone shall be 3" in diameter. The woofer shall have a 10 oz. ceramic magnet; the tweeter shall have a 2.35 oz. ceramic magnet. The two reproducer sections shall be coupled through a built-in crossover network. The crossover frequency shall be at 2800 Hz. Frequency response range shall be 70 Hz to 15.5 kHz, +/- 5 db. Sensitivity shall be 98 db at 1 watt, 1 meter. Voice coil impedance shall be 8 ohms. Low frequency voice coil diameter shall be 1" and operate in a magnetic field of at least 10,600 gauss. Transformer primary voltage shall be 70.7v with a frequency response range of 100-10k Hz and power taps at .5, 1, 2, & 5 watts. Insertion loss shall not exceed 1.5 db. The maximum depth of the loudspeaker shall not exceed 2-7/8" E. The cable run from the amplifier to speakers, and between speakers, shall be a minimum of #16 strand (x2).

SECTION 16770 - SECURITY SYSTEM WIRING SPECIFICATION


1.01 NEW CONSTRUCTION A. The special systems contractor shall install a complete raceway system, to include conduits, junction boxes, and system cabling, following prints and the specifications of the TUSD Electronics Department. B. Sensor cable shall be the Alpha 2469 or Belden 8724 with cable numbers at all junction boxes, pull boxes, and splice boxes. A detailed directory must be left at system gutter to indicate cable locations. C. All wiring shall be contained in EMT, which shall terminate in a 4-x 4 x 24" gutter at 6. 6 above finished floor. Cable to the "entry box" shall be a 15-conductor, #22AWG stranded; Belden 8458 or equal. Conductor shall be ICEA color-coded. All junction boxes must be properly secured. Any junction boxes installed above ceiling shall not be more than 12 above fixed or t-grid type ceiling. All wall junction boxes for motion sensor locations shall be mounted at 8' AFF, if possible. The "entry box" junction box shall be mounted at 5 AFF at specified location. 1.02 REMODEL AND RENOVATION WORK A. The demolition contractor shall notify TUSD electronics prior to demolition to remove any existing security devices in areas affected by construction. The Contractor shall remove all abandoned cable, wire and exposed wiremold raceway and boxes from abandoned systems. B. All EMT shall terminate in a 4" x 4" x 24" gutter mounted at 6' 6" A.F.F. at specified location. Provide a 4'x4' plywood backboard for mounting. All junction boxes not in public spaces shall be painted orange prior to installation. All other system junction boxes with system devices attached shall be painted to match the color of surface it is installed on. All boxes must be properly secured. At each sensor location in suspended accessible ceilings, a 4" x 4" x l.5" electrical box shall be mounted no more than 12" above ceiling grid. Cable to sensors shall be the Alpha 2469 or Belden 8724 with cable numbers at all ends and junctions. Cable to the TUSD supplied "entry box" shall be a 15-conductor, #22 AWG stranded; Belden 8458 or equal. Conductors shall be ICEA colorcoded with a cabling location directory provided in the security gutter. The "entry box" shall be surface mounted at 5' 0" A.F.F. at specified entry point.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 31 of 32

DIVISION 16

GENERAL A. TUSD will red-line electrical engineers drawings to indicate conduit size and routing, junction boxes, and equipment and devices locations. B. TUSD Electronic Department technicians will inspect, install, terminate, and program the control panel to district security formats upon completion and acceptance of installation. C. At ceiling sensor locations, the contractor shall provide a flush type 3.0 mud ring on ceiling mounted boxes. D. At inaccessible ceilings (sensor location), the contractor shall provide a flush type 3.0 mud ring on ceiling mounted boxes. E. All cables shall have a minimum length of 24" at all device locations and make-up boxes. No splices shall be allowed unless in designated make-up boxes as shown on the prints, all other boxes shall be pull though, or end of line device boxes only. F. Flex conduit shall be no longer than 6 feet in length from box to box unless other wise approved by the TUSD Electronics Department. G. Provide six feet of extra length on all cables at system gutter box for control panel terminations. H. Wall mounted sensors located in the corners of the rooms shall be mounted as close to the corners as possible. I.
J.

The Contractor shall leave a copy of the as-built drawings on site for use by TUSD installers.
TUSD Electronics Technicians will inspect work for compliance with specifications.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Electrical - 16 Page 32 of 32

DIVISION 17

TUCSON UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT MANUAL OF STANARDS AND PROCEDURES

DIVISION 17 TECHNOLOGY/TELECOMMUNICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION

TITLE

17000

Voice and Data Horizontal Wiring Structure

Rev. 01/01/2007

Technology/Communications - 17 Page 1 of 16

DIVISION 17

SPECIFICATION 17000 - VOICE AND DATA HORIZONTAL WIRING STRUCTURE ** Note: See 1.08 for portable classroom wiring backbone exceptions. 1.01 Horizontal Wiring Definition

The horizontal wiring is that portion of the wiring system, which extends from the work area to the telecommunications closet. The horizontal wiring includes the telecommunications outlet in the work area and the mechanical termination located in the telecommunication closet (TC or IDF) or main cross-connect (MC or MDF). 1.02 Topology

The horizontal wiring topology shall be a star configuration. Each communications outlet shall be connected to a telecommunications closet (TC or IDF). 1.03 Telecommunications Cable

The telecommunications cable shall consist of 24 AWG 100 ohm unshielded twisted pair solid wires. Pairs shall be identified with the standard blue, orange, green and brown colored insulation. Cable shall be plenum rated or PVC, as applicable by building code, and be at least UL-listed Category 5E.

*NOTE: PVC Type Cable is not permitted in any air plenum return. 1.03.1 Telecommunications Cable Color

The telecommunications cable shall be a different color than the data cable, the preferred color is grey. Plenum sheath color is to be white but is negotiable based on availability. 1.03.2 Termination at Telecommunications Closet or Main Cross-Connect

The telecommunications cable shall be terminated on Category 5E rated, 110 style blocks in the telecommunications closets. Any and all IDF locations in a classroom must be in approved cabinets. All equipment shall be standard catalogued items of the manufacturer and shall be supplied complete with any optional items required for proper installation unless otherwise noted. 1.03.3 Termination at Outlet Voice Wall & Voice Flush Mount Classroom telecommunications outlets shall be minimum category 5E rated. All non-classroom outlets shall be category 5E rated connectors. In every case, all pairs shall be terminated on the outlet connector housing. No pairs shall be cut, wrapped around cable, or orphaned. All outlets shall be T568A compliant. Cat 5E Leviton Quick Port (ivory) for voice and orange for data will be the standard for all outlets. Exception will be (Black) jacks for Food Services Point Of Sales Stations.

1.04

Data Communications Cable

The data communications cable shall consist of 24 AWG 100 ohm unshielded twisted pair solid wires. Pairs shall be identified with the standard blue, orange, green and brown colored insulation. Cable shall be plenum rated, as applicable by building code, and be at least UL-listed Category 5E. Data cable is to be Blue in color. Rev. 01/01/2007 Technology/Communications - 17 Page 2 of 16

DIVISION 17

1.04.1

Data Cable Color

The data communications cable shall be a different color than the telecommunications cable, the preferred color is blue. Plenum sheath color is negotiable based on availability. All cable colors for each site are to be indicated on the as built drawings. No same function cable may be of a different color. 1.04.2 Termination at Telecommunications Closet or Main Cross-Connect

The data cable shall be terminated on category 5E-rated patch panels mounted on 19" racks in the telecommunications closets unless modified on a school by school basis. Leviton Solution patch panels, either 24 port Cat5E T568A or 48 port Cat5E T568A. 104.3 Termination at Outlet

Data outlets shall use a Cat5E 8 pin connector wired per the T568A wiring scheme. All pairs must be terminated on the outlet connector housing. Extra care must be taken to ensure twists are maintained up to no more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination. Open twists or untwisted termination's are not acceptable. All data outlets shall use orange jacks.

1.04.4 Racks The 19" data racks shall be a minimum of 72" tall, have an integrated cable management system to ensure compliant bend radiuses, have a minimum 4' 110 VAC power strip with a 8 foot pigtail, a minimum of eight grounded outlets and a 15 amp power rating. All racks shall be grounded to the TC or IDF ground system with a #6 AWG copper ground wire and bonded to the rack with an approved physical connector.

1.05

Distance Limitations

Cable length from the telecommunications closet (TC or IDF or MC or MDF) or wiring hub location to the work area outlet should not exceed 90 meters (295 feet). An allowance has been made for three additional meters (10 feet) to accommodate outlet to station cable, and does not need to be included in the 90 meter limitation. Patch cords and cross-connects used for horizontal patching and equipment connections in the telecommunications closets (TC or IDF or MC or MDF) shall be limited to 7 meters (23 feet). This distance does not need to be included in the 90 meter distance limitation. Splices and bridged taps are not allowed as a part of the horizontal cabling. 1.06 Cable Raceways and Conduits

All cable shall be installed in conduit, cable tray or shall be supported a minimum of every 5'. No cable shall be installed laying on ceiling tile. Cable that is not in conduit or cable tray, which crosses any electrical or lighting fixture, should do so at a right angle to the lighting/electrical fixture. Cable supports shall be installed to carry the cable without pinching or crimping the cable in any way. The contractor shall make an effort to vary the spacing of supports to prevent frequency dependent aberrations. Cable wraps shall not be tight enough to disturb the internal cable pair twists. In general, no cable shall be left unprotected and/or exposed to the elements. Upon approved exceptions, the contractor shall be responsible to install appropriately rated and sheathed cable. Vendors shall follow, without exception, the industry standards: ANSI/EIA/TIA-569 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways & Spaces. October, 1990.

*Note: No building structural components may be modified to run conduits or cables.

*Note: Cables, conduits or raceways may not be supported from suspended ceilings. Rev. 01/01/2007 Technology/Communications - 17 Page 3 of 16

DIVISION 17 1.06.1 All voice, video and audio backbone cable from the MC or MDF to each TC or IDF shall be installed in conduit, cable tray or allowed to "free air" in enclosed ceilings. No cable shall be installed laying on ceiling grid/tile or strapped on any ceiling grid wire with tie wraps. Any cable attached to a ceiling grid wire must be affixed using an approved support. The support must be "J" hook in nature approved byTUSD. With the minimum support distance of "free air" wire is 5'. Reference NEC code 300-11 (a)(1); TIA/EIA 569(4.6.1.2).

1.06.2 Free Air Cable No cable may be allowed to run free air that is visible. Visible meaning without moving ceiling tile, etc. Any such exposed cable must be encased. Exceptions shall be directed to the district via change order. 1.07 Minimum Bend Radius

The minimum bend radius for UTP is equal to 10 times the cable diameter. 1.08 Portable Classrooms

Fiber optic cable to a portable TC or IDF locations need 6 strand MM with associated LIU. The voice backbone cable supplying a portable must deliver a minimum of twice as many pairs as needed to provide the required voice. Pair count to be determined, per job, by TUSD. 1.08.1 Telecommunications Closets in Classroom All TC or IDF's located in a classroom shall have all the equipment installed in an enclosed, lockable cabinet. The cabinet is to be DAMAC brand #63006 or approved equal. Cabinets must be at least 36" tall. Cabinets may not be installed in any such way as to impede foot traffic in a classroom. Every attempt will be made to identify the location during the site visit. Vendors are advised that the site administrator may choose another TC or IDF location in the same room or close proximity to the room that was identified on the site visit, prior to installation, at no additional charge to the District. Any other closet changes require written approval from this issuing office. Any TC or IDF cabinet installed in a location not acceptable to the site supervisor shall be the responsibility of the vendor to relocate at no charge to the district.

2.0

- Intra-building and Inter-building Backbone Wiring Structure Voice/Data/Video ** Note: See 1.8 for portable classroom wiring backbone exceptions.

The function of the backbone wiring is to provide the interconnection between each telecommunications closet (TC or IDF or MC or IDF or MDF) and building main cross-connect (MC or MDF or TC or IDF) in the telecommunications system wiring structure. Bridged taps, which create multiple appearances of the same cable at several distribution points, are not allowed. 2..01 Intra-building vs. Inter-building

The contractor may be asked to determine the need for protected copper facilities between buildings and classrooms on a school-byschool basis for an additional charge. The pricing section is constructed to allow flexibility in the determining the proper TC or IDF or MDF or MC connection.

2.02 Cable Counts and Type The following cable types and installation specifications shall be used for the backbone wiring:

Rev. 01/01/2007

Technology/Communications - 17 Page 4 of 16

DIVISION 17 2.02.1 Voice Cable

Each TC or IDF or MC or MDF in a fixed structure building shall be connected to the MC or MDF by a minimum of 25 pair UTP, 100 Ohm, 24 AWG and must be water and moisture resistant. All cable shall be terminated on category 5 rated 110 style or equivalent blocks. The minimum bend radius for UTP is equal to 10 times the cable diameter. If four or less phones (voice outlets) are served by an IDF in a portable classroom and it is clear there is no future expansion planned beyond the four outlets, pair requirements shall be determined by TUSD. General cable OSP will be cable of choice for all outside plant cabling. All connecting devices shall be Leviton solutions. Leviton 100 pair rack mount wiring panel 41DR2-100. Leviton 100 pair non-rack mount wiring panel 41AW2-100. 2.02.2 Video Cable

Each TC or IDF or MC or MDF shall be connected to the MC or MDF or Video Head-end with a minimum of one RG11 cable. This cable is to be appropriately contained in conduit where conduit is required by TIA/EIA Building Wiring Standards, NEC or local codes. All cables shall be terminated on appropriate splitters. 2.02.2.1 All video head ends shall have a six-strand multi mode optical fiber run made to the MC or MDF location. Termination is not necessary at this time. Each end of the fiber shall be left with a twenty (20') ft. service loop. 2.02.3 Data Communications Cable

At all secondary schools, each TC or IDF or MC or MDF shall be connected to the MC or MDF by a minimum of twelve multi mode optical fiber, terminated on a 12 port rack mounted LIU. Elementary schools are to have six multi mode optical fiber, terminated on a 12 port rack mounted LIU. All LIU's are to be labeled on the front surface of the LIU. All multi mode optical fiber must be terminated, tested, and labeled. Labeling must clearly state: To MC or MDF From TC or IDF. All connecting devices shall be Leviton solutions. Leviton, high density, low profile fiber optic rack mount. 5P230-OAB 12 fiber loaded with "ST" adapters. 5P030-OHB 24 fiber "ST" bulkhead with 6 adapters. 5F100-IST loaded fiber sm/mm "ST" bulkheads 5W110-OON 12-48 wall mount fiber optic patch panels.

2.02.3.1 Vendors' bid must provide for two (2) category 5E data links from TC or IDF or MC or MDF to each identified hub, if the hub option is used. All identified "hub areas" must have dedicated power and either a rack system (19") or an adequate amount of shelves provided. If the location is in a classroom, a cabinet enclosure must be installed per the specifications necessary for installing a TC or IDF. The other option is to terminate all data cables (including video control) at the nearest MC or MDF or TC or IDF location within specification. 2.03 Multi mode Optical Fiber

The multi mode optical cable shall meet at a minimum the following standards: ANSI-FDDI, TIA/EIA 568A, ICEA S-83-596, TR-NWT-000409, UL 910, CSA FT4, FT6 and OFNR rated. The fiber shall meet the following optical requirements in addition to meeting all TIA/EIA 455.* test procedures:

Rev. 01/01/2007

Technology/Communications - 17 Page 5 of 16

DIVISION 17

62.5 m Multimode Plenum Buffered Fiber (LED) or 50 m Multimode Buffered Fiber (Laser Optimized) Glass Fiber (Seicor Freedom) (Seicor Freedom) Coating Core diameter Cladding diameter typical Coating tight buffer plenum rated Maximum Attenuation 62.5m 125m 250m 900 m

850nm: 1300nm:

3.40 dB/km 1.0dB/km 160MHz.km 500 MHz.km 100KPSI

Minimum Bandwidth

850nm: 1300nm:

Fiber tensile proof

2.03.1 Termination Requirements Multi mode All fiber strands shall be individually terminated and labeled on 19" rack mounted combination shelves (a.k.a.: LIU or light guide interface unit) at both ends. All terminations shall be ST type. 2.03.2 Inspection and Testing Fiber Optic Cable All optical fiber shall be tested individually using a power through test. The test shall include and verify power at wavelengths of 850 nm and 1300 nm. A final report shall be generated on each strand for loss. Reports may be supplied in printed form, a disk or both. 2.03.3 Installation Practices for Multimode

All cable shall be installed in interdict, conduit, cable tray or shall be supported a minimum of every 5. No cable shall be installed laying on ceiling tile. Cable supports shall be installed to carry the cable without pinching or crimping the cable in any way. All practices identified in 568A shall be followed. All fiber shall have 20 foot service loops.

3.0 3.01

- OUTLET CONNECTOR SPECIFICATIONS Outlet Requirements

The communications outlet must meet or exceed the rating required for Category 5EUTP applications and must qualify for use with the proposed cable manufacturer for a minimum 15 year warranty of the system for operation at speeds of at least 100 MHz. The EIA568A standard requires that cable twists be maintained up to no more than from the point of termination to ensure the integrity of the system.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Technology/Communications - 17 Page 6 of 16

DIVISION 17 3.02 3.02.1 Phone/Data Wall Outlets "A" Outlet

The "A" outlet shall be used for voice/telecommunications applications and shall use a Cat5E, 8-pin (41108-RI3 type) connector for telecommunications applications. All pairs must be terminated on the outlet housing using the T568A wiring scheme. 3.02.2 "B" Outlet

The "B" outlet shall be used for data applications and is the primary data communications outlet for LAN and Host applications. It shall use a Cat5E, 8-pin (41108-R05 type) connector wired per the T568A wiring scheme. All pairs must be terminated on the outlet connector housing. Extra care must be taken to ensure twists are maintained up to the point of termination. Open twists or untwisted terminations are not acceptable. 3.03 Phone/Data Modular Furniture Outlets

All modular furniture outlets shall be flush mounted utilizing a bezel designed for the existing or planned \furniture raceways. 3.03.1 "A Outlet The "A" outlet shall be used for voice/telecommunications applications and shall use a Cat5E, 8-pin (41108-RI3 type) connector for telecommunications applications. All pairs must be terminated on the outlet huffing using the T568A wiring scheme. 3.03.2 "B Outlet The "B" jack shall be used for data applications and is the primary data communications outlet for LAN and Host Applications. It shall use a Cat5E, 8-pin (41108-R05 type) connector wired per the T568A wiring scheme. All pairs must be terminated on the outlet connector housing. Extra care must be taken to ensure twists are maintained up to the point of termination. Open twists or untwisted terminations are not acceptable.

3.03.3 Color The phone/data outlets shall match the color of the modular furniture as closely as possible. The vendor is required to submit samples of all outlet connectors and plates for approval prior to installation.XAcceptability shall be at the sole discretion of the District.

3.04 "Single Phone Wall Outlets Phone outlets shall be wired to the "A" jack and use an 8-pin (630D8 type) connector for telecommunications applications. All pairs must be terminated on the outlet housing using the T568A wiring 3.04.1 Color All data faceplates shall be ivory. All non-wall mount voice plates shall be ivory. All wall mount voice plates shall be stainless. All Category 5E jacks are to be orange. All voice jacks are to be ivory. All video faceplates are to be ivory. The only exception is noted in 4.3.3. 3.05 Single Data Wall Outlets

Single Data Wall Outlets shall be wired to the "B" jack position and shall use an 8-pin (41108-RI type) connector wired per the T568A wiring scheme. All pairs must be terminated on the outlet connector housing. Extra care must be taken to ensure twists are maintained up to the point of termination. Open twists or untwisted terminations are not acceptable. All connecting devices shall be Leviton solutions. Rev. 01/01/2007 Technology/Communications - 17 Page 7 of 16

DIVISION 17 3.06 Multiple Data Classroom Outlet

The multiple data outlets shall be used in classrooms where there will be multiple workstations clustered or placed in rows of from three to fourteen stations. Outlets should have the capacity to handle at a minimum at least two and as many as six or eight data jacks. Each jack shall use a Cat5E, 8-pin (630D8 type) connector wired per the T568A wiring scheme. All pairs must be terminated on the outlet connector housing. Extra care must be taken to ensure twists are maintained up to the point of termination. Open twists or untwisted terminations are not acceptable. For installations on student workstations, surface-mount outlets will be used. All connecting devices shall be Leviton solutions. 3.06.1 Color The vendor is required to submit color samples of data outlet jacks and wall plates to the appropriate building principal, of all outlet connectors and plates for written approval prior to installation. Acceptability shall be at the sole discretion of the District. All data jacks (not the plate) shall be orange in color. 3.07 Floor Phone/Data Outlets These outlets should be configured similarly to the wall phone/data outlets as described in the Outlet Connector Section. 3.08 Floor Data Only Outlets

Floor single data outlets should be configured similarly to the single data wall outlets described in the Outlet Connector Section. Floor mounted communication outlets have unique configurations and TUSD will determine configurations and components on and as per project basis. 3.09 Wall-mount Phone Outlets

Wall mount phone outlets shall be stainless steel with stainless steel mounting pins. Vendors are to use only 630B8 type connectors. All plates must be securely fastened to the wall using appropriate anchors following industry standard procedures. Any existing wall mount jacks that are deemed acceptable by the District, that are in perfect working condition, need not be changed 3.010 Transition Point

The TIA TR-41 working committee (568A) is seeking to address the issue of transition points for modular furniture and classroom interconnections. At this time a final specification has not been developed and voted upon. Therefore, the successful vendor may submit a transition point system for approval during the installation process if the following conditions are meet: 1) the 'basic link' or 'channel link' 100 MHz certification is met and 2) there is no additional cost and 3) in the opinion of TUSD the bid provides a better solution. 4.0 - Cross-Connect Requirements

Vendor will be responsible for the cross-connect termination of all telecommunications and data cables. Vendor will be responsible to work with TUSD to determine placement of all termination hardware in each telecommunications closet. If an MC or MDF is located in another location separate from the MPOP, appropriate feed cable to extend MPOP to MDF is a requirement of successful completion. All existing phones shall be expected to work. 4.01 Warranty Requirements

The category seated termination hardware (i.e. 110 blocks and patch panels) must be certified along with the cable to provide at a minimum a 15 year warranty on the overall installed system from the hardware and cable manufacturers. 4.02 Location of Cross-Connects

The cross-connect locations for all buildings shall be located in the telecommunications closet (TC or IDF) for each serving area and the horizontal cable directly terminated in the main cross-connect (MC or MDF).

Rev. 01/01/2007

Technology/Communications - 17 Page 8 of 16

DIVISION 17 4.03 Mechanical Termination Hardware

3M termination equipment is only approved hardware. 5.0 Telecommunications

The hardware used to terminate unshielded twisted pair telecommunications cables shall be 110-type blocks rated to Category 5E specifications, and shall be wall-mounted. M66 blocks are NOT allowed. 5.01 Data

The patch panels used to terminate all data cables shall be category 5E certified and shall be wired as per the T568A specification. 19" racks shall be installed and bolted to the floor. Sizes and quantities of patch panels and 19" racks are itemized in appendix B. M66 blocks are not allowed. 5.02 Other Design Considerations A means to identify circuits for administration A means to use the standard colors to identify termination fields A means to handle wire and cable to permit orderly wire management A means of access to monitor or test.

The 100 Ohm unshielded twisted pair connect hardware shall be designed to provide:

6.0

Ground and Safety

*Current NEC and Division 16 Codes are always to be followed 6.01 Codes

This information is not intended to be complete. It does not replace the necessity to comply with all federal, state, and local codes, laws, or regulations. The following codes and practice recommendations are included by reference. 1. Codes: Comply with applicable sections of the following for interior and exterior installations of wire and cable raceways. a. Uniform Building Code (UBC) b. National Electrical Code (NEC/NFPA 70) c. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC IEEE C 2) d. Local Codes, amendments, and ordinances.

2.

Standards: Comply with applicable sections of the following for installation and testing of optical fiber and copper twisted-pair communication cabling and connectors. a. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A-1995, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard (All Addenda). b. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A-1998, Commercial Building Standards for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces c. ANSI/EIA/TIA-570-1991, Residential and Light Commercial Telecommunications Wiring Standard d. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-1993, The Administration Standard for the Technology/Communications - 17 Page 9 of 16

Rev. 01/01/2007

DIVISION 17 Telecommunications infrastructure of Commercial Building ANSI/TIA/EIA-607-1994, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications TIA/EIA TSB-67-1995, Transmission Performance Specifications for Field Testing of Unshielded Twisted-Pair Cabling Systems TIA/EIA TSB-72-1995, Centralized Optical Fiber Cabling Guidelines TIA/EIA TSB-75-1996, Additional Horizontal Cabling Practices for Open Offices

e. f. g. h. 3.

Installers shall have read the above documents and shall be familiar with the requirements that pertain to this installation. The documents may be obtained from: a. Global Engineering Documents, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO, 80112-5776, 800-854-7179, fax: 303-397-2740, http://global.his.com/ b. IEEE-Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc., 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY, 10017-2394, 800-678-ffiEE, fax: 732-981-9667, http://standards.ieee.org/

6.02

Bonding

A bonding conductor shall be provided between all non-current carrying devices from the TC or IDF to the MC or MDF i.e., rack, junction boxes, cable shields, conduit, and MC OR MDF rack.

6.03

Grounding Conductors in Metal Conduit

All cable bonds shall be a minimum #6 AWG copper wiring or bonding conductors, which run through metal conduit, must be bonded to the conduit at both ends. 6.04 Cable Bonding

All cable bonds shall be a minimum #6 AWG copper wire.

7.0 7.01

- Administration Description

The hardware portion of the administration includes all the material (i.e. backboard) on which the cross-connects and the patch panels are connected to. The documentation portion is the creation of the system and documents that are required to manage and maintain the end-to-end connectivity. Vendor will supply pre-printed labeling in sequence with the existing cable plant. 7.02 Administration Hardware

Termination hardware shall be mounted on contractor supplied 3/4" plywood backboard in the telephone closet and main crossconnect. The plywood shall be painted a light neutral color with fire resistant or retardant paint. It is the vendors responsibility to verify the acceptability of the plywood installation prior to TC or IDF or MC or MDF completion. Additional plywood backing, after room completion, shall be installed and painted by the cable vendor at no additional expense to the District. Rev. 01/01/2007 Technology/Communications - 17 Page 10 of 16

DIVISION 17 The material connected to the administration hardware provides for the interconnection of two or more elements or their subcomponents. The cross-connections formed here are distinguished from the more permanent joining of cables such as splice or taps, in that they can be readily rearranged or new ones formed as required. A coding scheme, both symbolic and color, is applied to each of the components to allow a circuit to be traced from end to end. Logical arrangement of the hardware in a closet or an equipment room is also an important part of hardware administration. Patch panels, equipment racks, and punch down blocks shall be arranged in such a manner that allows for natural wiring progression and minimizes crossing of the wires. They shall also be arranged in such a manner that allows for easy access to each component for the purpose of testing as well as moves, additions and changes. 7.02.1 Cross-Connect Field Color Coding The connecting hardware shall be color coded to allow easy tracking of the origins and mechanical termination points of a group of wire pairs. The EIA 568A standard color codes are as follows:

Green White Blue Purple Yellow Blue Red w/Yellow Boots

Leads from the Central Office (Trunk Ports, Network Interface or Nl) Leads from horizontal wiring voice (work and classroom areas) Leads from horizontal wiring data - (work and classroom areas) Leads from common equipment ports (e.g. cache engine/content engine) Patch Cords on Patch Panels designates Instructional Ports Patch Cords on Patch Panels designates Administrative Ports Patch Panels designates cross-cables used between swtiches, hubs, etc.

Orange Brown

Designates the CSU/DSU Designates Food Services connections

7.02.2

Label and Numbering Plan

All cables will be labeled in the same format as designated by Tucson Unified School District. The entire room number and cable ID must be identified on each end of cable with a permanent label. The required wiring scheme will be provided to all successful vendors. Outlet covers must also be permanently labeled and a corresponding label be attached to the termination point in the telecommunications closet. Handwritten numbers are not acceptable. Professional looking labels are required for data and video outlets. The stainless steel voice outlet plates are to be labeled in the upper left corner using a black permanent marker such as a Sanford brand "Sharpie". A diagram of how this is to be accomplished is available from the District.

Rev. 01/01/2007

Technology/Communications - 17 Page 11 of 16

DIVISION 17 7.02.3 Documentation

The entire installed cable plan shall be documented for maintenance purposes as perTIA/EIA 606, the industry standard for the administration of building telecommunication systems. The installer will be required to provide to TUSD at a minimum "As Built" drawings that identify each cabling system component. Each component must be physically labeled for identification, and recorded on the "As Built" drawings. 8.0 - Installation, Testing and Acceptance

TUSD will, during the progress of the installation, allow the vendor and its employees access to the premises and facilities at all reasonable hours or at such hours as TUSD and vendor may agree. At no time will vendors be permitted to disrupt classes. Typical hours of access are from 2:30 P.M. to 10:00 P.M., Monday through Friday. One facility may have different hours on any given day. Not all schools operate on the same hours. 8.01 Hours

8.01.1 Requests for staff to unlock and be on site after hours are to be directed to Donald Bailes at (502) 225-4647 or mobile (520) 904-3944. For all access requests the site administrator must be contacted. 8.01.2 TUSD/EFP and /or TUSD/TTS will provide general illumination in rooms in which work is to be performed. 8.01.3 Access Any access to existing conduit must have permission of District personnel. 8.01.4 Electrical Requirements

All electrical installations must follow current NEC industry standards as well as Tucson, Pima County and Arizona State codes and laws. 8.01.5 As required, vendor shall furnish and install sleeves in locations where conduits pass through floors, walls, partitions or roofs. All sleeves must be one (1') trade size larger than the penetration conduit. Sleeves passing through fire rated, light proof or soundproof walls/floors, shall be sealed with fire proof, non-shrink grout or other approved sealant material. Any conduit that is 2 1/2" in diameter or larger shall have the appropriate fire rated bags of fire retardant sealant placed in the conduit. 8.01.5 All conduit installed outside can be EMT as long as it is 12" above finished grade, with compression connectors. Junction boxes shall be no less than 12x12x6 and rated 3R. Conduit shall be installed parallel and perpendicular to all building surfaces, concrete walks, foundations, or structures. 8.01.6 Inspections TUSD/EFP and/or TUSD/TTS will make inspections when the vendor notifies Donald Bailes that the project is complete and ready for acceptance testing. * 24 hour advance notification is required Rev. 01/01/2007 Technology/Communications - 17 Page 12 of 16

DIVISION 17

8.02

Provision

The vendor must provide a knowledgeable, English speaking, project manager; labor construction tools, equipment, hardware and wiring materials as specified; transportation, erection, construction, unloading, inspecting, keeping inventory, and returning spare or unused material as specified in this Bid or subsequent contract documents. The terms -provide-, -furnish-, -supply-, or -install-, etc., are to be interpreted as requiring the vendor to both furnish and/or install materials, unless specific provisioning/installation of the materials by is denoted. 8.02.1 Identification

The vendor will identify to TUSD/EFP and/or TUSD/TTS any work necessitating cutting into or through any part of the building structure such as concrete, tile floors or partition ceilings. This information is to be processed through the construction department. 8.02.2 Damage

The vendor will be responsible for and repair all damage to the building due to negligence of its workmen, and report to TUSD/EFP and/or TUSD/TTS Department at (520-225-4647), any such damage to the building, which may exist or may occur during the occupancy of the quarters. 8.02.3 Code Compliance

The successful vendor must contractually guarantee that the installation of any cabling will be in full compliance with all federal and local government building and fire statutes, codes and regulations. The vendor will assume the expense of correcting any violation of such statutes, codes and regulations that may be found to exist. 8.02.4 Firewalls

Provide for the installation of all conduits and sleeves through firewalls as required to meet codes, and fire stopping these conduits and sleeves after cable has been pulled. This is to be as a separate line item and a per each piece cost. All firewall penetrations must be sealed according to all state and local fire codes. All walls, after penetration, must be restored to original form and grade and then approved b y s t a f f . 8.02.5 Ceiling Tiles

The vendor must provide for the removal and re-installation of all ceiling tiles required for the installation of all above ceiling wire. Any damaged tiles shall be replaced at the vendors expense. 8.02.6 Installation

The vendor shall install the wire, cable, and associated hardware in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. For twisted pair terminations, twists shall be maintained up to the point of connection to minimize the possibility of data loss at Category 5E rated speeds. Connections, which do not maintain the tight twist, will be rejected and redone in a timely fashion.

8.02.7

Test and Expectations

The vendor and TUSD/EFP and/or TUSD/TTS personnel, after installation has been completed shall conduct a site visit in order that TUSD/EFP and/or TUSD/TTS may be assured that the requirements for the installation are met. Spot checks and tests by TUSD/EFP and/or TUSD/TTS personnel will be conducted and compared to supply test data. 8.02.8 Data Communication Cable Testing All data testing of category 5E terminations will be performed by the vendor in a manner that will satisfy the manufacturer's requirements for a warranted system and meet TIA/EIA 67A. Rev. 01/01/2007 Technology/Communications - 17 Page 13 of 16

DIVISION 17 8.02.9 Completion Notification

Vendors shall promptly notify TUSD/EFP and/or TUSD/TTS of the completion of work on equipment of such portions thereof that is ready for inspection. 8.02.10 Defects

The vendor will promptly correct all defects for which the vendor is responsible. The final payment will be retained, as a minimum, until corrections are made. 8.02.11 Customer Contact

The vendor shall coordinate all work and direct all questions to either TUSD/EFP or TUSD/TTS at (520-225-4647 or 225-4646). Any trenching must be coordinated with Arizona Bluestake and TUSD Resource Management or designee, at (520-2254899). 8.02.12 Insurance

The vendor must maintain insurance in the amounts specified herein. Evidence of insurance will be required prior to any work commencing. Tucson Unified School District must be listed as additional insured.

8.02.13

Clean Up

Upon completion of the work each day, the vendor must remove all tools, equipment, rubbish and debris from the premises and must leave the premises clean and neat. Custodial charges will be imposed for additional cleaning that is necessary for clean up after a contractor. 8.02.14 Subcontractors

The vendor may use subcontractors to perform work. However, all responsibilities rest with the awarded vendor. 8.03 Test/Acceptance Criteria

All UTP cabling will be certified to meet and or exceed the specifications as set forth in the Link Performance Testing Specifications in the Transmission Performance Specifications For Field Testing Of Unshielded Twisted-Pair Cabling Systems, TIA/EIA TSB-67 level H, for Category 5 basic- links, or TIA/EIA TSB-95 for Category 5E. Certifications shall include the following parameters for each pair of each cable installed: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. 1. Wire map (pin to pin connectivity) Length (in feet) Attenuation Near End Crosstalk (NEXT) Far End Crosstalk (FEXT) ELFEXT Attenuation/Crosstalk Ratio (ACR) Return Loss Propagation Delay Delay Skew Test equipment shall provide an electronic and printed record of these tests. Owner reserves the right to hire an independent testing company to spot check the test results. If the results vary more than 10% from the results provided by the Contractor, the Contractor will be required to prove his results are correct or retest the entire system. Technology/Communications - 17 Page 14 of 16

Rev. 01/01/2007

DIVISION 17 8.03.1 TSB-67 Field Measurements

The vendor shall meet all testing requirements and documentation as specified in the TIA PN-3287 UTP Link Performance field test protocols. At a minimum every cable shall meet the test parameters including wire map, length, attenuation, NEXT and propagation delay. Where possible all tests shall be on a 'channel' (after cross connect field) and at a minimum on a 'basic' link as defined in TSB67. All measurements shall be made with a level one device. 8.03.2 Drawings

When required, or as needed, upon completion of the installation, the vendor will furnish a complete set of "As Built" drawings showing cable routes and termination points and identification numbers. 8.03.3 Video Testing and Acceptance

Video testing and acceptance procedures shall be performed as outlined in Video and Control Cable Section. 8.03.4 Fiber Testing

Fiber testing and acceptance procedures shall be performed as outlined in the Intra-building and Inter-building sections or as directed in TIA/EIA 67 if available prior to acceptance. OPTICAL FIBER TESTING Acceptance Testing: Test each strand of every optical fiber cable on the reel with an OTDR, to verify length and continuity. Fiber cables that have been damaged in transit must be replaced. Contractor installed fiber cable that proves to be defective will be replaced at the contractor's expense. Final Testing; After terminating optical fiber cables one of the individual fibers of each cable segment will be tested using an OTDR, both to determine the installed length and continuity. All individual fibers of each cable segment will be tested using a power meter to determine the actual loss. These readings will be taken at the 850 nm and 1300 nm windows for multimode and 1310 nm and 1550 nm windows for single mode. Testing will be in both directions. The final readings will be listed on the Optical Fiber Test Form. These readings must not be higher than the "Optimal Attenuation Loss". The OAL will be calculated using the manufacturer's factory certified test results, (db/km) converted to the actual installed lengths plus the manufacturer's best published attenuation losses for the connector and/or splice installed on this project. (0.20 for Connectors and 0.10 for splices.) The OAL shall be used for comparison with the end to end power loss test results prior to acceptance by the construction manager.

All cable tests must be documented and submitted to the District prior to request for final payment on hard copy and electronic media if available. 9.0 9.01 - Maintenance/System Certification TUSD Responsibilities

TUSD will notify vendor of any equipment malfunction in accordance with normal reporting procedures provided by the vendor. TUSD will provide reasonable access to equipment and maintain environmental standards as specified by the vendor. TUSD will provide, if needed, space to store spare parts as designated by the vendor, which will remain vendor's property. Tucson Unified School District will not accept any responsibility for these spare parts. 9.02 Warranty and Certification

The vendor shall describe the appropriate product warranty periods and conditions. The vendor must provide at a minimum a 15 year manufacturer's material warranty that the system will perform up to 100 MHZ without failure. Vendors are required to provide a two year, (24) month, no charge warranty for all materials and labor. Rev. 01/01/2007 Technology/Communications - 17 Page 15 of 16

DIVISION 17 9.03 Labor Cost

All bids must offer a per hour labor cost that includes mileage.

10.0 - Summary Pricing Form 10.01 Installation Labor Pricing shall include all labor. TUSD is not responsible for any additional labor costs over what is presented by the vendor in this pricing section with the exception of an acceptable change order. 10.01.1 TUSD will only accept change orders for additional funds if the District requests the changes. No changes will be accepted due to vendor negligence, oversight, or misinterpretation of bid specifications. 11.0 - Applicable Documents The cabling system described in this specification is derived in part from the recommendations made in industry standard documents. The list of documents below has bearing on the desired cabling infrastructure and are incorporated into this specification by reference: 1) 2) This Technical Specification and Associated Drawings. ANSI/TIA/EIA SP-4195 Proposed Addendum No. 5 to TIA/EIA-568-A Additional Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-pair 100 Ohm Enhanced Category 5 Cabling (latest revision). ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-A Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard October 1995. ANSI/EIA/TIA-569 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces - October 1990. ANSI/EIA/TIA-606 Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings - February 1993. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications - August 1994. Building Industries Consulting Services, International (BICSI) Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manuel (TDMM) - 1996. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) - 70, National Electrical Code (NEC) - 1993.

3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8)

11.01 If a conflict exists between applicable documents, then the order in the list above shall dictate the order of precedence in resolving conflicts. This order of precedence shall be maintained unless a lesser order document has been adopted as code by a local, state or federal entity. If a conflict exists, documents adopted as code shall take precedence. 11.02 If this document and any of the documents listed above are in conflict, the more stringent requirement shall apply. All documents listed are believed to be the most current releases of the documents. The vendor is responsible to determine and adhere to the most recent release when developing the proposal for installation. End of Section

Rev. 01/01/2007

Technology/Communications - 17 Page 16 of 16

APPENDIX A: REFERENCED STANDARDS

Air Conditioning Contractors of America 1712 New Hampshire Ave, NW Washington, DC 20009 Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute Suite 425 4301 North Fairfax Drive Arlington, VA 22203 Aluminum Association 900 - 19th Street N.W., Suite 300 Washington, DC 20006 American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827Waldon Office Square, Suite 550 Schaumburg, IL 60173 American Concrete Institute P.O. Box 9094 Farmington Hills, MI 48333-9094 American Forest & Paper Association 1111 19th St, NW Suite 800 Washington, DC 20036 American Hardwood Association 1210 West N.W. Highway Palatine, IL 60067 American Institute of Steel Construction One East Wacker Drive, Suite 3100 Chicago, IL 60601-2001 American Iron and Steel Institute 1140 Connecticut Avenue Suite 705 Washington, DC 20036 American Institute of Timber Construction Suite 140 7012 S. Revere Parkway Englewood, CO 80112

Automotive Lift Institute P.O. Box 85 Courtland, NY 13045 American National Standards Institute 25 West 43rd Street, Fourth Floor New York, NY 10036 APA - Engineered Wood Association P.O. Box 11700 Tacoma, WA 98411-0700 American Society of Agricultural Engineers 2950 Niles Road St. Joseph, MI 49085-9659 American Society of Civil Engineers Structural Engineering Institute 1801 Alexander Bell Drive Reston, VA 20191-4400 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. 1791 Tullie Circle, NE Atlanta, GA 30329-2305 American Society of Mechanical Engineers Three Park Avenue New York, NY 10016-5990 American Society of Sanitary Engineering 28901 Clemens Road, Suite A Westlake, OH 44145 ASTM International 100 Barr Harbor Drive West Conshohocken, PA 19428 ASTM International 100 Barr Harbor Drive West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959 The Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International 803 West Broad Street, Suite 600 Falls Church, VA 22046

American Water Works Association 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235 American Wood-Preservers Association P.O. Box 5690 Grandbury, TX 76049 American Welding Society 550 N.W. LeJeune Road Miami, FL 33126 Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association 355 Lexington Avenue, 17th Floor New York, NY 10017-6603 Canadian General Standards Board 222 Queens Street 14th Floor, Suite 1402 Ottawa, Ontario, Canada KIA 1G6 Canadian Standards Association 5060 Spectrum Way, Suite 100 Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 5N6 Canada Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 5959 Shallowford Road, Suite 419 Chattanooga, TN 37421 Code of Federal Regulations (ADAAG) 28 CFR Part 36 U.S. Department of Justice 950 Pennsylvania Avenue, NW Civil Rights Division Disability Rights Section - NYA Washington, D.C. 20530 Consumer Product Safety Commission 4330 East West Highway Bethesada, MD 20814-4408 Cedar Shake and Shingle Bureau P.O. Box 1178 Sumas, WA 98295-1178

Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association International 1300 Summer Avenue Cleveland, OH 44115-2851 U.S. Department of Commerce National Institute of Standards and Technology 100 Bureau Drive Stop 3460 Gaithersburg, MD 20899 U.S. Department of Labor c/o Superintendent of Documents U.S. Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402-9325 U.S. Department of Transportation c/o Superintendent of Documents U.S. Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402-9325 Factory Mutual Standards Laboratories Department 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike Norwood, MA 02062 Federal Emergency Management Agency Federal Center Plaza 500 C Street S.W. Washington, DC 20472 Federal Specifications General Services Administration 7th & D Streets Specification Section, Room 6039 Washington, DC 20407 Gypsum Association 810 First Street N.E. #510 Washington, DC 20002-4268 Hardwood Plywood Veneer Association 1825 Michael Faraday Drive Reston, VA 20190-5350

Industry Safety Equipment Association 1901 N. Moore Street, Suite 808 Arlington, VA 22209 International Institute of Ammonia Refrigeration Suite 700 1101 Connecticut Ave., NW Washington, DC 20036 International Code Council 5203 Leesburg Pike, Suite 600 Falls Church, VA 22041 International Standards Organization ISO Central Secretariat1, rue de Varembee, Case postale 56 CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve & Fittings Industry, Inc. 127 Park Street, N.E. Vienna, VA 22180 National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 8 South Michigan Ave Chicago, IL 60603 National Concrete Masonry Association 2302 Horse Pen Road Herndon, VA 22071-3499 National Fire Protection Association 1 Batterymarch Park Quincy, MA 02269-9101 North American Insulation Manufacturers Association Suite 310 44 Canal Center Plaza Alexandria, VA 22314 Plumbing and Drainage Institute 800 Turnpike Street, Suite 300 North Andover, MA 01845 Precast Prestressed Concrete Institute 175 W. Jackson Boulevard, Suite 1859 Chicago, IL 60604-9773

Post-Tensioning Institute 1717 W. Northern Avenue, Suite 114 Phoenix, AZ 85021 Rack Manufacturers Institute 8720 Red Oak Boulevard, Suite 201 Charlotte, NC 28217 Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors National Assoc., Inc. 4021 Fafayette Center Road Chantilly, VA 22021 Steel Joist Institute 3127 10th Avenue, North Myrtle Beach, SC 29577-6760 Single-Ply Roofing Institute 77 Rumford Ave. Suite 3-B Walthem, MA 02453 Telecommunications Industry Association 2500 Wilson Boulevard Arlington, VA 22201-3834 The Masonry Society 3970 Broadway, Unit 201-D Boulder, CO 80304-1135 Truss Plate Institute 583 DOnofrio Drive, Suite 200 Madison, WI 53719 Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingsten Road Northbrook, IL 60062-2096 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada 7 Crouse Road Scarborough, Ontario, Canada M1R3A9 United States Code c/o Superintendent of Documents U.S. Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402-9325

Window and Door Manufacturers Association 1400 East Touhy Avenue #470 Des Plaines, IL 60018 Wire Reinforcement Institute, Inc. 203 Loudon Street, S.W. 2nd Floor, Suite 203C Leesburg, VA 22075
Refer to the 2006 edition of the International Codes

APPENDIX B: ACCESSIBILITY

B001

GENERAL a. All school buildings must provide education facilities that are handicapped accessible.

B002 B002-1

FEDERAL LAWS Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1974 (updated July 2003) a. All school districts are responsible for coordination and implementation of Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 and Title II of the American Disabilities Act of 1990, which prohibits discrimination based on disability. Each district must have a selfevaluation and transition plan required under both of these statutes and a grievance procedure required under Title II of the ADA. This is not to say that all existing buildings must be fully accessible. However, all buildings within a school district must provide access to all programs in each building. This will require access into the building, at least one fully compliant toilet room for girls with another for boys, a drinking fountain, a telephone, additional accessible toilet rooms in large buildings where the travel is a long distance, a few accessible classrooms, and all program spaces must be accessible. Program spaces include the cafeteria, auditorium, gymnasium, library, media center, a music/band room, a technology room, an art room, a home and career room, a science room, etc. An elevator (or ramp) is not necessarily required if all the program spaces are on one accessible floor; nor does every toilet room need to be accessible as long as the distance to an accessible toilet room is close in travel time, even if by elevator.

b.

B002-2

Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA), Public Law 101-336,42 U.S.C.12101 ET SEQ. c. All districts to have made "reasonable" modifications to provide accessibility in existing buildings as required by the American with Disabilities Act (ADA) of 1990. The ADA required an evaluation, a transition plan, and the removal of architectural barriers to be completed by all school districts prior to January 26, 1995. In that sense, basic modifications should have been made in response to the required ADA plan by January 26, 1995. When plans for reconstruction to a building are submitted to Facilities Planning, we specifically check for any previous or current modifications for accessibility.

B003

FEDERAL LAW ENFORCEMENT a. b. Federal Law is administered in the field by periodic inspection and/or investigation of existing buildings. School districts must meet the requirements for program access and building access as required at the time of inspection. Existing buildings must meet Federal Law and these standards should be satisfied during such work.

B004

CODE COMPLIANCE a. All new construction must meet Code requirements and the referenced International Code Council (ICC) / American National Standards Institute (ANSI) - Standard ICC/ANSI A117.1 - 2005 relating to access and the Standard ANSI A17.1 1987 relating to vertical access.

B005

PROCEDURE c. d. State Law must be met by reference and detail on plans and in specifications. The design professional must certify to this. Generally new construction will meet the requirements of Federal Law. Additions and alteration work must meet recommended standards for new construction.

B006

PLANNING GUIDELINES

The following four pages are a guide to assist design professionals and school districts in reviewing current conditions and planning for future accessibility provisions.

ACCESSIBLE APPROACH / ENTRANCE People with disabilities should be able to arrive on the site, approach the building, and enter as freely as everyone else. At least one route of travel shall be safe and accessible for everyone, including people with disabilities. Accessible Routes (ADAAG 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.7) Is there an exterior route of travel that does not require the use of stairs? Do curbs on the route have curb cuts at drives, parking, and drop-offs?

Yes No

Ramps (ADAAG 4.8) Do all ramps longer than 6 feet have railings on both sides? Is there a 5-foot-long level landing at every 30-foot horizontal length of ramp, at the top and bottom of ramps and at switchbacks? Does the ramp rise no more than 30 inches between landings?

Parking and Drop-Off Areas (ADAAG 4.6) Are an adequate number of accessible parking spaces available? (8 feet wide for car plus 5-foot access aisle)? For guidance in determining the appropriate number to designate, the table below gives the Code requirements for new construction and alterations (for lots with more than 100 spaces, refer to ADAAG): Total spaces Accessible 1 to 25 1 space 26 to 50 2 spaces 51 to 75 3 spaces 76 to 100 4 spaces Are 8-foot-wide spaces, with minimum 8-footwide access aisles, and 98 inches of vertical clearance, available for lift-equipped vans? At least one of every 8 accessible spaces must be van-accessible (with a minimum of one van-accessible space in all cases). Are the accessible spaces closest to the accessible entrance? Are accessible spaces marked with the International Symbol of Accessibility? Are there signs reading Van Accessible at van spaces? Are No Parking signs posted at the accessible Aisles? Is there a painted crosswalk between the accessible parking area and the closest curb ramp to the building?

Accessible Routes (ADAAG 4.13, 4.14, 4.5) If there are stairs at the main entrance, is there also a ramp or lift, or is there an alternative accessible entrance? (Do not use a service entrance as the accessible entrance unless there is no other option.) Do all inaccessible entrances have signs indicating the location of the nearest accessible entrance? Does the entrance door have at least 32 inches clear opening (For a double door, at least one 34-inch leaf)?

Is there at least 18 inches of clear wall space on the pull side of the door, next to the handle? (A person using a wheelchair or crutches needs this space to get close enough to open the door.)POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS))

ACCESS TO GOODS AND SERVICES Ideally, the layout of the building should allow people with disabilities to obtain materials or services without assistance. Accessible routes (ADAAG 4.3) Does the accessible entrance provide direct access to the main floor, lobby, or elevator? Are all student/staff spaces on an accessible route of travel?

Yes No

Doors (ADAAG 4.13) Do doors into student/staff spaces have at least a 32-inch clear opening? On the pull side of doors, next to the handle, is there at least 18 inches of clear wall space so that a person using a wheelchair or crutches can get near to open the door?

Turning Space (ADAAG 4.2, 4.4, 4.5) Is there a 5-foot circle or T-shaped space for turning a wheelchair completely? Alarms (ADAAG 4.28; NFPA 72) If emergency systems are provided, do they have both flashing lights and audible signals? Reach Ranges (ADAAG 4.27) Are all controls that are available for use by the student and staff (including electrical, mechanical, cabinet, game, and self-service controls) located at an accessible height? Reach ranges: The maximum height for a side reach and for a forward reach, 48 inches. The minimum reachable height is 15 inches for a front approach and 9 inches for a side approach. Assembly Areas (ADAAG 4.2, 4.32, 7.2) Are the aisles between fixed seating at least 36 inches wide? Are the spaces for wheelchair seating distributed throughout?

Vertical Circulation (ADAAG 4.1.3(5), 4.3) Are there ramps, lifts, or elevators to all program areas?

Stairs (ADAAG 4.9) The following question applies to stairs connecting levels not serviced by an elevator, ramp, or lift. Do all stairs have continuous rails on both sides, with extensions beyond the top and bottom stairs?

Elevators (ADAAG 4.10) Do the controls inside the cab have raised and Braille lettering? Is there a sign on both doorjambs at every floor identifying the floor in raised and Braille letters? If an emergency intercom is provided, is it usable without voice communication?

Lifts (ADAAG 4.2, 4.11) Can the lift be used without assistance? If not, is a call button provided?

USABILITY OF ROOMS
Getting to the Rest Rooms (ADAAG 4.1) When rest rooms are open to the student and staff, they should be accessible to people with disabilities. If rest rooms are available to student and staff, is at least one rest room per floor (either one for each sex, or unisex) fully accessible? Stalls (ADAAG 4.17) Is there a wheelchair-accessible stall that has an area of at least 5 feet by 5 feet, clear of the door swing? In the accessible stall, are there grab bars behind and on the side wall nearest to the toilet? Is the toilet seat 17 to 19 inches high?

Lavatories (ADAAG 4.19, 4.24) Does one lavatory have a 30-inch-wide by 48-inch-deep clear space in front? (A maximum of 19 inches of the required depth may be under the lavatory.) Is the lavatory rim no higher than 34 inches?

ADDITIONAL ACCESS Note that this priority is for items not required for basic access in the first three priorities. When amenities such as drinking fountains and public telephones are provided, they should also be accessible to people with disabilities.

Drinking Fountains (ADAAG 4.15) Is there at least one fountain with clear floor space of at least 30 by 48 inches in front? (Not all drinking fountains need to be accessible. It is preferable to provide high and low units. )

Telephones (ADAAG 4.31) If pay or public use phones are provided, is there clear floor space of at least 30 by 48 inches in front of at least one? Is the phone device at an accessible height?

Casework Is casework provided in labs, the nurses office, lounges, classrooms, libraries and offices at an accessible height?

CODE COMPLIANCE CHECKLIST


TUCSON UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT Engineering, Facilities & Planning
Lee Instructional Resource Center 2025 E. Winsett Street Tucson, Arizona 85719

General Information

PAGES 1, 2, AND 3 ARE REQUIRED FOR ALL PROJECTS SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW.
Note: Fill in every line.
Note: The Excel version of this form has comments embedded for guidance in filling out many areas of the form. Comments are accessible by placing the cursor over the red triangle, right click and hit edit to read or copy the comment.

Project Number District / Building Name: Project Type: Project Description:

TUSD
New Building Existing Building Site Work Only Other

Architect / Engineer firm:


name phone number & e-mail

Contact Person:
name title phone number & e-mail

District Project Manager:


name title phone number & e-mail Yes

Project Control Number located on all Contract Documents, forms, and correspondence.

Required Bidding information is located in the contract documents on page or drawing numbers and are paper clipped: Board Members Cover Sheet Required Uniform Safety Standards and TEM information is located on page or drawing numbers and are paper clipped: Exiting Plan Off-Gassing C of O statement Ventilation Separation Asbestos Isolation Safety & Security Separation of Const. Cleaning Occupied Area Noise Control Fume Control Testing Lead & Asb. TEM & Code Rule 56

Check list Index - indicate which forms are included

Page 2 CODE REVIEW CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 3 STRUCTURAL RESPONSIBILITY CHECKLIST and CERTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4 ARCHITECTURAL REVIEW CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 5 STRUCTURAL DESIGN CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 6 ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 7 FIRE & ELECTRIC CODE REVIEW CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8 MECHANICAL REVIEW CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 9 PLUMBING & GAS REVIEW CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes NA NA NA NA NA NA

It is not necessary to provide pages noted as "NA". If the page does apply and is erroneously not provided, the project will not be reviewed until the page is provided with an addendum.

CODE REVIEW CHECKLIST


Project Number

page 2 of 9

TUSD
District Name Building Name

Building Information:
Use and Occupancy Classifications: (check all that apply)

E A-

I-4 M Relocation Alteration*

S-1 S-2

R-2 Other -

For Existing Buildings check all that apply:


( * check the definitions in Appendix K)

NA

Change of Occupancy Repair* Renovation*

Historic-K10 report required Reconstruction* Addition*

* Provide Key Plans demonstrating distinct work areas


list drawing numbers

Type of Construction: (check all that apply) Existing bldg: New building(s):

I-A I-A

I-B I-B

II-A II-A

II-B II-B

III-A III-A

III-B III-B NA

IV IV

V-A V-A

V-B V-B

Building Height and Area: (If additional space needed, provide on Code Compliance Drawings.) Height in feet: Number of stories: Permitted: Actual: Height in feet:
Parapet

Square feet / floor* Square feet / floor*


Stage Catwalk Courtyard

Number of stories:
Mezzanine

* If Actual exceeds Permitted, demonstrate on Code Compliance Drawings the area modifications permitted per Sections 506 and 507.7.

Special Features: (check all that apply)

For All Projects* Provide Code Compliance Drawings:


(*excludes site, roof, district-wide and energy performance projects) list drawing numbers No Yes, full Yes, partial Yes, in new construction only

NA*

Is a Sprinkler System provided? Building Information: Occupancy Classification Construction Classification - Existing Construction Classification - New Key Plan with building sides accessible Building Areas

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

NA NA NA NA NA

Egress Information: Room Use Designations Room Square Footages Room Occupancy Loads
Room Exit & Corridor exit width Calculations

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Fire rated

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

(Provide numbered Building Areas (existing and new), construction types, number of stories, number of sides accessible, allowable fire areas and actual fire areas with calculations. Show locations of fire walls and fire barriers.)

Exit Travel Distances incl. Common Path Stair & Exit Door exit width Calculations Accessibility for Exist and New Smoke only Corridor/Exit Enclosures
NA

Accessory Assembly Areas: Code requirements: Gymnasium: Auditorium: Cafeteria: Library: Other: area in sq. ft. area in sq. ft. area in sq. ft. area in sq. ft. area in sq. ft.

(If additional space needed, provide on Code Compliance Drawings.)

Occupant load Occupant load Occupant load Occupant load Occupant load

Required E.W. Required E.W. Required E.W. Required E.W. Required E.W.

Provided E.W. Provided E.W. Provided E.W. Provided E.W. Provided E.W.

Reminder: Exit unit = 22", half units are permitted at 12" per half unit. Gymnasium: area in sq. ft. Gymnasium: bleacher sq. ft. Auditorium: area in sq. ft. Stage/Platform area in sq. ft. Cafeteria: area in sq. ft. Natatorium: bleacher sq. ft remaining area including the pool in sq. ft. Req'd exit units Req'd exit units Req'd exit units Req'd exit units Req'd exit units Provided exit units Provided exit units Provided exit units Provided exit units Provided exit units

STRUCTURAL RESPONSIBILITY CHECKLIST and CERTIFICATION 1


Project Number

page 3 of 9

TUSD
District Name Building Name

The architect/engineer for each project shall complete and sign this form and submit it together with the final plans and specifications for the project.

A. STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS Are there any structural elements involved with this project a. If no, go to Section D and sign the Certification. b. If yes, complete Sections B, C, and D, seal and sign the Certification. B. STRUCTURAL LOADING Structural loading shall meet at least the requirements of the International Building Code. Page 5, the Structural Design Checklist, is appropriately filled in and attached. C. STRUCTURAL DESIGN IMPORTANT:
Check who is responsible for the design of each element Yes No Yes No

IMPORTANT:
Check applicable for each element

ARCH

ENGR STRUCTURAL ELEMENT 1. Foundation a. Footings b. Walls c. Piles (type) 2. Floor Framing Systems a. Mechanical/Special Framing 3. Columns 4. Walls a. Exterior Bearing 1. lintels 2. veneer attachment 3. reinforcing b. Exterior Nonbearing 1. lintels 2. veneer attachment 3. reinforcing c. Interior Bearing 1. lintels 2. reinforcing d. Interior Nonbearing 1. lintels 2. reinforcing 5. Roof Framing Systems a. Mechanical/Special Framing 6. Stairs and Stairways 7. Bridges 8. Catwalks 9. Railings 10. Bleachers/Grandstands 11. Retaining Walls 12. Chimney Stacks 13. Parapet Walls 14. Other

Present In Work

Not Present In Work

D. CERTIFICATION I, the undersigned, do hereby certify that: (Check appropriate box) There are no structural elements involved in the project, or I have designed the structural elements of this project, as noted above, in accordance with at least the criteria listed in the 2006 International Building Code.

Seal of R. A. licensed in Arizona

Seal of P. E. licensed in Arizona

Signature - Architect

Date

Signature - Engineer

Date

ARCHITECTURAL REVIEW CHECKLIST 1


Project Number

page 4 of 9

TUSD
District Name Building Name

LOCATION in Documents

Dead End Corridors less than 1 1/2 times the width, max 20 ft. Smoke Zone Exiting all student spaces over 500 sq. ft. . Building exits located on Construction Documents

. .

. . . . . . .

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable

. . Rescue Window Clear Opening Size on Construction Document(s) Class A finishes in Corridors and Assembly Spaces Assembly Area Maximum Occupancy Sign Electrically Powered Moveable Partition Sign Fire Extinguishers in Corridors . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . Safety Glazing in Doors, Exterior Corridor Windows, and Stair Windows Partition/Wall Fireproofing Design Number of Rated Partitions/Assemblies Corridor enclosure . . . . Rated interior Corridor Windows . . . Elevator Equipment Room enclosure 2 hour Stairways, riser and tread sizes are indicated Classroom Ceiling height 9'-0" . . . Secure Exam Storage . . Fire Blankets in Laboratory Rooms Door Schedules Hardware Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Window Schedules . . . Roof System UL Class A or FM Class 1 Carpet, Radiant Floor Panel Test Class 1 . .

Assembly Area Seating meets NFPA 701 .

Accessibility Parking . . . Exterior Accessible Route . . . Signage . . . Accessible Exits / Entrances . . Accessible Toilets . . . Accessible Work Stations in all classrooms Door Approach Clearances . . Interior Accessible Route to major spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA No No

PENC* PENC PENC PENC PENC PENC PENC PENC PENC PENC PENC PENC PENC PENC PENC PENC PENC

. . Door Hardware . . . . Wheelchair Viewing Spaces in assembly spaces Auditorium ambulatory seats . . . . Assistive Listening Devices . . . . Public Telephones . . . . . Elevator . . . . . Elevator Signage . . . . . Interior Accessibility Signage . . . . All Program Spaces are Accessible . . . There is an Accessible Toilet Room on Every Floor

* (PENC) Pre Existing Non-Conformance

STRUCTURAL DESIGN CHECKLIST 1


Project Number

page 5 of 9

TUSD
District Name Building Name

1604.5 Prior to structural design, the District has been consulted to determine if this facility is currently or will be considered for use as an emergency shelter facility? Yes Will this building be used as an emergency Shelter? The 2006 International Building Code Section 1603 requires, "The design loads and other information pertinent to the structural design required by Sections 1603.1.1 through 1603.1.8 shall be clearly indicated on the construction documents for parts of the building or structure." Conventional light-frame construction: Floor and roof live loads Ground snow load
list drawing numbers NA list drawing numbers

Yes

Basic wind speed (3-second gust), miles per hour and wind exposure
list drawing numbers

Seismic Design Category and Site Class


list drawing numbers

1603.1.1 Floor live load


list drawing numbers

1603.1.2 Roof live load 1603.1.3 Roof snow load

Exceeds 10 pounds / sq. ft. list drawing numbers

list drawing numbers

1603.1.4 Wind load


list drawing numbers

1603.1.5 Earthquake design data


list drawing numbers

1603.1.6 Flood load

Not in flood hazard area per Section 1612.3 Flood certification provided per Section 1612.5 Not applicable applicable code sections list drawing numbers list drawing numbers

1603.1.7 Special loads

1603.1.8 System and components requiring special Not applicable inspections for seismic resistance
list drawing numbers

Soils 1802.6 Soil classification & design load bearing capacity


list drawing numbers list specification numbers

Soil investigation report

Available

Not applicable Yes

1621.2 and 1621.3 have been reviewed and coordinated with architect and engineers 1704 Special Inspection requirements, where are they located in the documents?

list drawing or specification numbers

Print name:

Signature:

Date:
Seal of P. E. or R. A. licensed in Arizona

Telephone:

ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE CHECKLIST


Project Number

page 6 of 9

TUSD
District Name Building Name

The 2006 International Energy Conservation Code Section 101.5.1 states "Compliance with specific provisions of this code shall be determined through the use of computer software, worksheets, compliance manuals and other similar materials when they have met the intent of this code." (www.eren.doe.gov/buildings/tools_directory/software/comcheckez.htm) Section 104.2 requires " Construction documents shall be of sufficient clarity to indicate the location, nature and extent of the work proposed and show in sufficient detail pertinent data and features of the building and the equipment and the systems as herein governed, including, but not limited to, design criteria, exterior envelope component materials, U-factors of the envelope systems, Ufactors of fenestration products, R-values of insulating materials, size and type of apparatus and equipment, equipment and systems controls and other pertinent data to indicate conformance with the requirements of this code and relevant laws, ordinances, rules and regulations." Applicability:
(check the definitions) New Building Additions Low Energy Usage Building Substantial alterations Historic Building Unconditioned Building Change in occupancy

Exempt Building: Thermal Design Parameters: Outdoor design temperature Degree days (heating / cooling) Climate Zone:

Per ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals Per ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals 10B 15 11B 16 between 10% and 25% between 25% and 40% Chapter 8 - Acceptable Practice between 40% and 50% DOE software used 12B 13A 14A

Glazing percentage: Design Approach:

10% or less

Chapter 7 - Prescriptive Chapter 7 - System Chapter 7 - Energy Cost Budget

802 Building Envelope Requirements: U-factors of the envelope systems

In compliance

Worksheets available

Not applicable

or
list drawing numbers list specification sections

U-factors of fenestration products


list drawing numbers

or
list specification sections

R-values of insulating materials


list drawing numbers

or
list specification sections

803 Building Mechanical Systems: Design Load 804 Service Water Heating: 805 Lighting and Power Systems: Interior lighting power
806 Design By Total Building Performance:

803.2 Applicable

803.3 Applicable

Not applicable

list drawing number Applicable Not applicable

Applicable Entire building method Applicable

Not applicable Portion of building method Not applicable list drawing number or specification section

Provide a full detailed analysis of the entire building and all systems.

FIRE & ELECTRIC CODE REVIEW CHECKLIST


Project Number

page 7 of 9

TUSD
District Name Building Name

NA = Not Applicable

= LOCATION in Construction Documents

FIRE SERVICE Access Roads Access Openings Stairway Identification Premises ID Hazards Firefighters Water Supplies Fire Hydrants Fire Command Center

NA

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

MEANS OF EGRESS New Buildings . Corridor Plenum Exit Enclosure Ventilation . . Exit Signs . . Egress Illumination . Emergency Power . Area of Refuge . Boiler/Furnace/Refrig. Rms Fire Code Section 1010

NA

. . . . . . .

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

BUILDING SYSTEMS Emergency Power . . Electrical Eqpt, Wiring & Hazards Mechanical Refrigeration . . Elevator Recall . . Battery Systems . . FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS . Automatic Sprinkler System . Alternative System . . Hood Fire Suppression . . Standpipe System . . Fire Extinguishers . . Fire Alarm . . Automatic Detection System . Emergency Alarm System . Smoke Control System . . Smoke & Heat Vent . . Municipal FA Station . . Explosion Control . . Fire Dept. Connections . . Fire Pumps . . AH Units & Fans shutdown w/ FA

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

NA NA NA NA NA NA

Renovations, alterations, reconstructions, additions, and changes of occupancy

Exit Signs . Egress Illumination Emergency power

. . .

. . .

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

Combustible Dust . . Fire Safety During Construction Flammable Finishes . Service Stn. & Repair Garage

GENERAL - FIRE Acceptance Testing/Inspection Training . . . . Equipment Listed/Labeled . Fire Stopping . . . Identification . . . Equipment Location . .

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

NA NA NA NA NA NA

ELECTRICAL Telephone . . NEC (NFPA 70) Electric Work . Panel/Circuits Identified . . Artificial Light . . Explosion Proof Equipment . Shop Emergency Shunts . . Dust Proof Shop Outlets . . Shielded Shop Light Fixtures . Closed Elec. Htg. Elements & UL Underground Electric Service . Elevator Code A17.1 . . Electric Operated Partition . Plenum Cable . . HID Self Extinguishing . . . . Other

NA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

GENERAL - ELECTRIC Acceptance Testing/Inspection Training . . . . Equipment Listed/Labeled . Fire Stopping . . . Equipment Location . . Access/Clearances . . Identification Lines/Mtl./Eqpt. Instruction Manual / Video . Material/Eqpt Reuse . . Unsafe System Rehab/Rmvl.

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

MECHANICAL REVIEW CHECKLIST


Project Number

page 8 of 9

TUSD
District Name Building Name

NA = Not Applicable NA

= LOCATION in Construction Documents

BOILER ROOM Fuel: Oil

Gas Other

Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Other
NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

Low Water Cutoff . Combustion Air . Clearance . Safety Burner Switch . Chimney/Vent . Standards . Electronic Flame Safeguards Safety Valves & Controls . (Ind. Code Rule 4) Remote Burner Shutoff Valves Fuel Train Standards . Scald Protection Domestic HW ASME Vessel . MECHANICAL Ventilation Intake Openings & Protections Ventilation Rate . Common System . Balancing . Uninhabited Spaces . Exhaust Independent Systems . Toilet/Locker/Janitor Closets Hazardous Areas . Laboratories . Shops . Kitchen Domestic . Kitchen Commercial . Kitchen Commercial Makeup Mechanical Equipment Rooms Elevator Equipment Rooms Subslab . . Other GENERAL Acceptance Testing/Inspection Training . Equipment Listed/Labeled . Fire Stopping . Equipment Location . Access/Clearances . Controls .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

Duct Systems . . . Plenum . . Construction . . Insulation . Filters . . . Smoke Detection Systems Fire Dampers . . Smoke Dampers . Appliances Cooling Towers . . Forced Air Furnace . Engine/Turbine . . Other Other Refrigeration ASHRAE 15 . . . Refrigerant type . . Machinery Room Piping . . . Hydronic piping Material . . . . . Insulation . . . . Valves Installation requirements Fuel Oil . . Materials . . . . Piping . . . Storage . . . Valves Solar Systems

NA

. . . . . . . . . .

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

. . . . . . . . . . . .

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

. . . . . . .

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

Sequence of Operations . Identification Lines/Mtl./Eqpt. Instruction Manual / Video . Material/Eqpt Reuse . . Unsafe System Rehab/Rmvl. Condensate Disposal . . No Direct Fired Heaters .

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

PLUMBING & GAS REVIEW CHECKLIST


Project Number

page 9 of 9

0
District Name Building Name

NA = Not Applicable

= LOCATION in Construction Documents

PLUMBING Rodent proofing . Protection plumbing systems Structural Safety . Piping Support . Floodproofing . Fixtures/Faucets/Fittings Fixture Adequacy . Accessible Facilities . Emergency Shower/Eyewash Drinking Fountains Sink - Bubbler Separated . Lavatories . Showers . Sinks . Urinals . Water Closets . Water Saving Fixtures . Water Heaters DHW Heater ASME Tank . Location . Controls . Safety Devices . Insulation . Water Supply and Distribution Protect Water Quality . Size/Material Piping . No Lead Solder . Disinfection . Sanitary Drainage Sanitary Discharge Permits Storm - Sanitary Separated Size/Material Piping . Sumps/Ejectors . Indirect/Special Waste . Vents . Traps/Interceptors/Separators Storm Drainage . Swimming Pool . GENERAL - PLUMBING Acceptance Testing/Inspection Training Equipment Listed/Labeled Fire Stopping Equipment Location Access/Clearances

NA

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

GAS Low pressure 1/2 psig or < . No gas lines in corridors . Master Gas Valve for Outlets . . Pipe Size/Material . . . . Valves Enc. of Pressure Regulation Eq. . PSC Distribution Service Liq. Petroleum Gas NFPA 58 . . Vent/Chimney . . . Appliances Shown . Other . Other GENERAL - GAS Acceptance Testing/Inspection . . . Training . Equipment Listed/Labeled . . . . Fire Stopping . Equipment Location . . . Access/Clearances . . . Controls . . Sequence of Operations Identification Lines/Mtl./Eqpt. Instruction Manual / Video . . Material/Eqpt Reuse . Unsafe System Rehab/Rmvl. . Condensate Disposal . . No Direct Fired Heaters

NA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

NA NA NA NA NA NA

Identification Lines/Mtl./Eqpt. Instruction Manual / Video Material/Eqpt Reuse Unsafe System Rehab/Rmvl. Condensate Disposal

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

NA NA NA NA NA

TUSD SPORTS EQUIPMENT STANDARDS

BASKETBALL BACKBOARDS: Bison BA 42XL, rectangular 42" x 72"; lifetime warranty for PE and athletics BASKETBALL BACKBOARD PADDING: Bison BA68U, 72" wide, 5 year warranty, school colors BASKETBALL BREAKAWAY GOALS: Bison BA-35E Elite, 5 year warranty for athletics, recreation, and PE VOLLEYBALL SYSTEM - SINO: Uprights - AL7, aluminum pin stop Uprights Safety Padding - FP1 Floor Plate- KA25-LF Floor Plate Sleeve - KA25-S Official's Stand - PS1 Official's Stand Padding - PSP1 Technora Net - HM50 Net Antennae - NA2, pair Heavy Duty Net Ratchet and Crank Handle - HDNR BASKETBALL, VOLLEYBALL, WRESTLING SCOREBOARD: Nevco 2550-D, 8' x 6' x 8", MPCW-6 wireless control & case, 5 year warranty

IES RECOMMENDED ILLUMINATION LEVELS The Illuminating Engineering Society has developed the following illumination level criteria based upon the type of sport, the skill level, and the capacity of the facility. Class I For competition play in large-capacity arenas and stadiums (from 5,000 to 200,000 spectators). For competition play with less than 5,000 spectators

Class II

Class III For competition play, but with few spectators Class IV For social and recreational play

Sport/Class

Horizontal Vertical Uniformity Footcandles Footcandles Max:Min 75 50 50 30 50 30 50 30 50 30 10 40 30 50 Infield 30Outfield 30 Infield 20 Outfield N/A N/A N/A N/A 30 15 40 N/A 30 N/A N/A N/A N/A 40 Infield 25 Outfield 25 Infield 15 Outfield 2.1 3.0 2.0 2.5 2.0 3.5 2.0 3.0 1.5 2.5 3.0 1.7 2.0 2.0 Infield 2.5 Outfield 3.0 Infield 3.5 Outfield

Basketball / II BasketBall / III Gymnastics / II Gymnastics / III Volleyball / II Volleyball / III Football / II Football / III Soccer/ II Track & Field / III Track & Field / IV Tennis / III Tennis / IV Baseball / III Baseball / IV

Review specific requirements with TUSD Project Manager

Components of a Diapering Change Area


1. Establish one location for diapering activities. This area must never be used for classroom activities, health office activities, food, or medication/treatment preparation. Rationale: Feces are a source of multiple organisms that cause gastrointestinal infections. Cross contamination of fecal material to hands to mouth must be avoided. The health office restroom must be used by ill students who may be vomiting, have diarrhea, or other acute infectious illness; therefore it is an inappropriate place to diaper special needs students. 2. Diapering areas must be adjacent to a hand-washing sink, supplied with running water, liquid soap and disposable paper towels. The sink may never be used as a source of drinking water, classroom activity water, food preparation water, or medication/treatment preparation water. Running water temperature should be between 86 and 110 degrees Fahrenheit. Rationale: See step 1 above. 3. A plastic lined container must be available for trash disposal. A separate plastic lined container, with foot operated lid, must be available for soiled disposable diapers. 4. Changing Table Requirements: A. There should be at least a five-foot clearance on the front side of the diapering table to allow adequate space for wheelchairs and transfer activities. B. Changing tables for diapering and related activities must be sturdy and have a height to minimize back strain for the average height staff person. Changing tables must have a safety-retaining rail to prevent child from rolling off. Safety retaining rail should preferably be hinged and capable of folding down flat to facilitate transfer of child to table. If children are over 50 Ibs., consideration must be made for 2 person transfers and/or mechanical lift assistive devise, and/or adjustable height table C. Commercially laundered towel or disposable paper product may be used to cover the surface for each child. Such covers must be for single use only replaced between each child and properly disposed of in a soiled linen container or the plastic lined disposable diaper container. D. The surface of the changing table must be sanitized with TUSD approved disinfecting spray obtained from the custodian. The spray must be kept in the original labeled container provided by the custodian. The solution must remain on the changing table surface for the manufacturer's recommended time.
Tucson Unified School District Special Health Care Needs Manual Section 6 Diapering Revised: 06/2004

Diapering Area Set-up Check List


Instructions: When evaluating potential diapering areas, place a check mark by each of the requirements listed below that the area has. To be considered an acceptable diapering area, all criteria must be met. The area protects student privacy during diapering and/or catheterization procedurE A hand-washing sink is located near the diaper changing area. The hand washing sink and counter area is not used to draw drinking water, prepare food, administer medications or administration of other treatments. Running water should be between 86 and 110 degrees The use of the sink and area for diapering should not disrupt the normal provision of services to other students unless arrangements are made for alternate coverage. A plastic lined container must be available for trash disposal. A separate plastic lined container, with foot operated lid, must be available for soiled disposable diapers There should be at least a five-foot clearance on the front side of the diapering table to allow wheelchair accessibility. The changing table is sturdy and has a height to minimize back strain for the average height staff person. The changing table should have a seamless, smooth, and nonpermable surface to allow for adequate cleaning and disinfecting. Any towel or paper product used under the student is commercially laundered and used once per each student or disposable and used once per each student. If student over 50 lb. is diapered, a two staff transfer is to be used. Unusual orthopedic/health conditions may indicate the need for mechanical assistive devises or adjustable height gurneys. Adequate storage is available for diapering/catheterization supplies. Adequate storage for disinfecting spray solution, out of reach of students is available. Antibacterial soap and disposable towel dispensers are available at sink and stocked at all times.

Name/Position Principal

Date Date

Tucson Unified School District Special Health Care Needs Manual Section 6 Diapering Revised: 06/2004

Diapering Procedure
PROCEDURE GUIDELINES FOR INFECTION CONTROL IN DIAPERING A. A covered container, preferably foot controlled with plastic liners must be used for disposable diapers and related disposable products used in diapering. Container must be emptied in outside proper dumpster at end of school day or more often if full. RATIONALE

A. Covered, foot controlled containers odors and cross contamination of hands and gloves.

B. A separate, preferably foot


controlled covered container, trolled, with plastic liners must be used for towels and washcloths. Towels and washcloths must be commercially laundered. C. The child's soiled clothing should be placed in an individual plastic bag, tied and returned to the child's parent at the end of the school day. Solid feces should be dumped from the diaper/clothing directly into the toilet and flushed. The diaper or clothing item should not be soaked in the toilet. It should be bagged, tied, and labeled to be returned home at the end of the school day. E. Disposable towelettes and other diapering products must be in an individual container, labeled with child's name, stored in child's individual cubby/container, and used only for that child

C. School washers and dryers are for light soil items. They cannot adequately sanitize towels and washcloths in group childcare where high-risk pathogens are likely to present. D. Soaking diapers and/or clothing in a public toilet increases likely hood of cross contamination of pathogens between students and staff.

D. Cross use of supplies risks contamination of supplies from staff hands/gloves.

Tucson Unified School District Special Health Care Needs Manual Section 6 Diapering Revised: 06/2004

Wash hands and check all supplies before bringing the child to the diapering area. 1. Place child on disposable paper or single commercially laundered towel. 2 Put on disposable gloves

Never leave a child unattended on diapering surfaces. 1. Do not stack pad of towels for multiple child use. High risk for cross contamination.

2. Any diapering activity is a potential exposure to body fluids or. pathogens.

3. Remove soiled diaper/clothing.

4. Single swipes with clean 4. Clean child's perineal area with


child's individual towelettes or tissue. Use wet wipes or towelettes only once, wiping from girl's vaginal area to the rectal area. Boys should be wiped' from the penis to the rectal area. 5. Raise the pupil's legs, remove the diaper. Place the soiled diaper and any used towelletes in the covered disposable diaper container utilizing the foot control for the lid. If the lid is notfoot controlled, the soiled diaper may be placed on several sheets of clean, single-use disposable towels or a plastic bag that has been placed on the changing table within reach of staff person before starting the diaper change. 6. Wash the child's buttocks with a clean towellette or with a clean, warm, wet commercially laundered washcloth. 6. Wash even if not obviously soiled to prevent skin breakdown and infection of unseen contamination by fecal/urine. 5. If foot controlled container is not available, do not attempt to dispose of soiled diaper during diapering process. Touching container lid with gloved hand contaminates the lid. Ungloving and turning from the child risks child rolling off changing surface. towellete or tissue from front to back minimizes risk of contaminating urinary urethra with fecal pathogens.

Tucson Unified School District Special Health Care Needs Manual Section 6 Diapering Revised: 06/2004

7. If paper or towel is soiled, fold up clean end to lay child back on or slip another clean sheet or towel beneath child. 8. Apply skin ointment or lotion only if supplied by the parent and approved as part of the health plan of care by the school nurse. 8. Using child specifically approved ointments risks allergic reactions and cross contamination. Some skin conditions, such as yeast infections, may be made worse by the incorrect product. 9. Remove gloves. Use clean towellete to wipe hands if soiled 10. Dispose of soiled gloves and towellete in foot operated soiled diaper container or place on top of soiled diaper for later disposal. Reglove with clean gloves. 11. Place clean diaper on child. Redress child. 12. Wash child's hands with liquid soap and under running water. Dry child's hands with clean single-use disposable paper towel. All children are to have hands washed after diapering regardless of age or participation in diapering process. 13. Remove gloves and dispose of properly. 14. Return the child to wheelchair or appropriate activity area. 16. Clean and disinfect the diaper area and all contaminated surfaces with TUSD approved spray disinfectant obtained from custodian. 14. Protects child from falls and injury before proceeding with clean up. 16. TUSD approved germicidal spray must be left on the diapering surface for the minimal time indicated by the label instructions for effective infection control.
Tucson Unified School District Special Health Care Needs Manual Section 6 Diapering Revised: 06/2004

10. Touching container lid with gloved hand contaminates the lid. Ungloving and turning from the child risks child rolling off changing surface.

17. Wash hands with liquid soap and running water. Dry with singleuse disposable paper towel. Dispose of paper towel properly. 18. Document on dated and timed log includes any notations on unusual character of urine/feces or skin condition Report to the school nurse and parent any unusual observation.

17. Hand washing is necessary at completion of task to ensure complete infection control.

Tucson Unified School District Special Health Care Needs Manual Section 6 Diapering Revised: 06/2004

Diaper changing Checklist For:


Concerns Parent &/or RN must be notified by note
Odor Ointments
Initial

Check all that apply:

Date

Time

Dry

Urine

Bowel Movement

Signatue & Title

Initial

Signature & Title

Initial

RETURN LOG TO SCHOOL NURSE WHEN COMPLETED Tucson Unified School District Special Health Care Needs Manual Section 6 Diapering Revised: 06/2004

TUSD Playground Equipment: Design Requirements


A. General Design Requirements: Playground equipment shall meet the following general design requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. Equipment shall be six feet or less in height unless designed for uses other than climbing (i.e. basketball backboards, tether ball poles, etc.) Equipment shall be free of points, sharp edges and protrusions that may cut or puncture. Equipment shall be free of protrusions and other elements that may snag clothing or body parts. Equipment shall be free of angles 55) or openings that may entrap body parts. Equipment shall be free of pinch, crush or shearing points. Equipment shall be free of splinters ant be subject to future splintering. Equipment shall have slip resistant walking and climbing surfaces. Equipment shall have components that drain freely and not collect standing water. Equipment shall have steps and handholds of proper size, spacing and incline where necessary to assist climbing. Equipment shall have all moving parts constructed of materials that minimize the potential for impact injuries. Equipment shall have handrails, raised edges and other barriers where necessary to minimize the potential for falls. Equipment shall have vandal-proof connectors that cannot be loosened or unfastened without special tools. Equipment shall permit easy access by adults for maintenance and emergencies. Equipment shall provide more than one means of access and exit. Equipment shall be designed to support the maximum possible load able to be imposed on the apparatus. Equipment shall be designed to be permanently anchored in place. Equipment shall be constructed of non-rusting and non-toxic materials. Equipment shall be constructed of materials that will remain durable in an outdoor environment. Equipment shall provide the ability to view entire playground as child approaches the area; thus no equipment that causes an obstruction. Equipment shall be easy to use and not require specific supervision or need special training to use, as the play equipment is used after school hours. Additional play equipment being added to a school shall trigger improving the surface material from sand to wood chips.

B. Specific Design Requirements Individual equipment shall also be required to meet the following specific design requirements: 1. Balance Beams: a. 24" maximum height b. 4" minimum width c. 1/2" radius at exposed edges and comers Basketball Backboards: a Minimum distance between backboard and support structure b Rim height (lower rim height is more accessible to vandalism) Cargo Nets (boarding nets): a. 6'** Maximum height b. Top, side, and bottom edges anchored in place Modular Equipment: a. Individual parts shall comply with applicable design requirements: i. Horizontal bars: -- 5'** maximum height -- 4' minimum height

2.

3.

4.

Rev. 01/01/2007

11. Ladders:

111. Platforms:

iv. Ramps:

v. Rings: Swings vii. Slides:


VI.

-- 1 "to 1.67" diameter for horizontal elements -- Equal spacing between steps or rungs (including the spacing between the top step and rung and the surface of the platform) -9" minimum distance between steps or rungs -- 75 maximum incline for ladders with steps 75 to 90 incline for ladders with rungs -6'** maximum height -- Handrails installed on platforms above 30" -- Handrails and vertical infill panels installed on platforms above 4' in height. -- 1:8 (vertical: horizontal) maximum slope -- At least 16" in width -- Handrails installed the full length of ramp -- Ring size (inside diameter): 5" or less; or 10" or more -- Ring handhold: 1" to 1.67" diameter -- Not recommended for modular equipment. -- 6'** maximum height -- 30 maximum slope and any change in the slope of the slide (Wave slide) should not allow a child to lose contact with the sliding surface -- 3' long side rails along top 3' of slide -- 4" minimum raised edge along each side of straight slides -- 6" minimum raised edge along each side of spiral wave slides 12" to 16" long horizontal transition run off piece at the bottom of slide -- 12" maximum height of horizontal run offpiece 1/4" minimum radius at edge of horizontal run offpiece -- 6' minimum clearance beyond exit of slide or for a distance of the height plus 4' whichever is greatest. 6' minimum clearance to each side of the slide
n n n n

Horizontal Bars: a. 5' ** maximum height b. 4' minimum height c. 1" to 1.67" diameter of horizontal elements 6. Horizontal and Arched Ladders: a. 6' ** maximum height b. 9" minimum spacing for rungs c. 15" maximum spacing for rungs d. Above spacing does not apply to overhead rings e. The first and last ring or rung shall not be located directly above the access platform or ladder 7. Ladders: a. Equal spacing between steps or rungs (including the spacing between the top step and rung and the surface of the platform) b. 9" minimum distance between steps or rungs c.75 maximum incline for ladders with steps d. 75 to 90 incline for ladders with rungs 8. Platforms: a. 6'** maximum height b. Handrails installed on platforms above 30" c. Handrails and vertical infill panels installed on platforms above 4' in height. 9. Ramps: a. 1:8 (vertical: horizontal) maximum slope b. At least 16" in width c. Handrails installed the full length of ramp **Maximum equipment heights may be greater with prior approval from Risk Management.

5.

Rev. 01/01/2007

PLAY EQUIPMENT INSPECTION FORM Turn in this checklist to principal each month. NAME ______________________________________ DATE ___________________ _ LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT ___________________________________________ _ YES NO DOES WOOD CHIP MATERIAL NEED TO BE REDISTRIBUTED ---AROUND ANY PIECES? (Spooned out areas need to have 12 inches of depth) Describe: IS HARDWARE BROKEN ON ANY PIECES OF EQUIPMENT? (Loose fasteners, missing pieces, or parts) Describe: ARE THERE SHARP POINTS OR EDGES? Describe: ARE BORDERS UNSAFE IN ANY WAY? (Cement cracked, or needs repair) Describe: IS AREA UNSAFE TO PLAY IN? Describe: ARE THERE ANY UNUSUAL SAFETY HAZARDS? (i.e. rocks in woodchips, glass in woodchips) Describe: _________________________________________________ Describe any injuries that have taken place in the last week in equipment area:

OFFICE USE: CORRECTIVE ACTION: Repairer Name (please print) ___________________________________________ Signature ---------------DATE
------

Rev. 01/01/2007

Playground Safety Checklist


Items to be checked

y=
Safe

Remarks

1. Make sure surfaces around playground equipment have more than 9 inches of wood chips, mulch, sand, or pea gravel, or are mats made of safety-tested rubber or rubber-like materials.
2.

Check that protective surfacing extends at least 6 feet in all directions from play equipment. For swings, be sure surfacing extends, in back and front, twice the height of the suspending bar.

3.

Make sure play structures more than 30 inches high are spaced at least 9 feet apart.

4.

Check for dangerous hardware, like open "S" hooks or protruding bolt ends.

5. Make sure spaces that could trap children, such as openings in guardrails or between ladder rungs, measure less than 3.5 inches or more than 9 inches.
6. 7.

Check for sharp points or edges in equipment. Look out for tripping hazards, like exposed concrete footings, tree stumps, and rocks.

8. Make sure elevated surfaces, like platforms and ramps, have guardrails to prevent falls.
9.

Check playgrounds regularly to see that equipment and surfacing are in good condition.

10. Make sure that children are carefully supervised on playgrounds to ensure their safety.

Location: _______________________________________________________ _ Inspected by (signature): __________________________ Date: _________ _ Print Name:

Rev. 01/01/2007

APPENDIX E: PROJECT CLOSEOUT

Substantial Completion Contractor files written notice of substantial completion with list of items to be completed Architect conducts inspection to validate - If complete, schedule final inspection - If not complete, notify contractor in writing Contractor remedies deficiencies Contractor issues second substantial completion notice Substantial completion inspection by A/E and PM scheduled and conducted A/E issues written list of deficiencies (punch list) that need to be corrected to the Contractor and copies PM Contractor corrects deficiencies Architect prepares Certificate of Substantial Completion Contractor provides Certificates of Inspection form Governing Agencies and Certificate of Occupancy.

Contract Closeout Contractor will furnish closeout documents to the Architect and then to the District Certificates of Occupancy Certificates of Inspection by Governing Agencies Project Record Documents Operation and Maintenance Data Training of required personnel Warranties and Bonds Keys and Key schedules Return assigned keys to the District Spare parts and maintenance materials Evidence of payments and release of liens Architect prepares and processes final application for payment Final completion document issues by TUSD PM closeout check list